The Karaite Tradition of Hebrew Grammatical Thought in Its Classical Form: A Critical Edition and English Translation of al-Kitāb al-Kāfī fī al-Luġa al-ʿIbrāniyya by ʾAbū al-Faraj Hārūn ibn al-Faraj 9004132724, 9789004132726, 9789004348530

Citation preview

THE KARAITE TRADITION OF HEBREW GRMIMATICAL THOUGHT IN ITS CLASSICAL FORM VOLUME 1

STUDIES IN SEMITIC LANGUAGES AND LINGUISTICS EDITED BY

T. MURAOKA AND C.H.M. VERSTEEGH

VOLUME XXXVIIIl

THE KARAITE TRADITION OF HEBREW GRAMMATICAL THOUGHT IN ITS CLASSICAL FORM

THE KARAITE TRADITION OF HEBREW GRAMMATICAL THOUGHT IN ITS CLASSICAL FORM A Critical Edition and English Translation qf al-Kitab al-Kan n al-Luga al-cIbraniyya by 'Abfl al-Fared Hiiriln ibn al-Farqj BY

GEOFFREY KHAN MARiAANGELES GALLEGO JUDITH OLSZOWY-SCHLANGER VOLUME 1

BRILL LEIDEN . BOSTON 2003

This book is printed on acid-free paper.

Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data Abu al-Faraj Harun ibn al-Faraj, II th cent. The Karaite tradition of Hebrew grammatical thought in its classical form: a critical edition and English translation of al-Kitab al-kilfi: fi: al-Iuga al'Ibraniyya by 'Abi:i al-Faraj Hariin ibn al-Faraj / by Geoffrey Khan, Mafia Angeles Gallego,Judith Olszowy-Schlanger. [Kitab al-kafi fi al-Iughah al-'Ibraniyah. English &Judeo-Arabic] p. cm. - (Studies in Semitic languages and linguistics; v. 37) Includes bibliographical references and index. Text inJudeo-Arabic and English; commentary in English. ISBN 90-04-13272-4 I. Hebrew language--Grammar-Early works to 1800. 2. Karaites-Early Works to 1800. I. Khan, Geoffrey. IT. Gallego, Mafia Angeles. Ill. Olszowy-Schlanger,Judith. IV Series. PJ4557.A282003 492.4'82-dc21 2003050297

ISSN ISBN ISBN ISBN

0081-8461 9004 13272 4 (Set) 9004133119 (Hd. 1) 9004133127 (Vo!' 2)

© Copyright 2003 by Koninklijke Brill nv, Leiden, The Netherlands

All rights reserved. No part qf this publication mqy be reproduced, translated, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any firm or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without prior written permission from the publisher. Authorization to photocopy items fir internal or personal use is granted by KoninkliJke Brill provided that the appropriate fies are paid directly to The Copyright Clearance Center, 222 Rosewood Drive, Suite 910 Danvers MA 01923, USA. Fees are subject to change. PRINTED IN THE NETHERLANDS

CONTENTS PREFACE ....... INTRODUCTION 1.0. 2.0.

................................................. IX

......... Xl

)AbO al-Faraj Hartln and the Karaite grammatical tradition ............ Xl Al-Kitab al-Kafifi al-Luga al-AbO. a1-Faraj Hiirtin ibn Faraj lived in Jerusalem in the first half of the eleventh century C.E., where he was attached to a Karaite college (diir li-IJilm) that had been established by his teacher >AbO. YaCqub Yusuf ibn

Nul).. This consisted of a circle of Karaite scholars, who devoted themselves to various fields of learning in addition to that of grammar, including philosophy, law, exegesis and Bible translation. >AbO. al-Faraj's contemporaries at the college included the philosopher Yusuf al-B~Ir

and

Levi ben Yefet, who was the son of the exegete Yefet ben CElL After the death oflbn Nul)., >AbO. al-Faraj took over the leadership of the college.! >Abu al-Faraj Hiirtin wrote numerous works in Arabic on the Hebrew language of the Bible. The largest of these is a comprehensive work on Hebrew morphology and syntax consisting of eight parts entitled al-Kitiib al-Mustamil Cala al-~U

wa-lFu~

fi al-Luga al-Cfbraniyya ('The

Comprehensive Book of General Principles and Particular Rules of the Hebrew Language'), which was completed in 1026 C.E? This consisted of eight parts, which may have originally been produced as separate

!

Our source for most of these biographical details is the chronicle of Karaite scholars

by Ibn ai-HIli, who was writing in the fifteenth century; see G. Margoliouth (1897: 433, 438-39). For the background of Ibn Nui).'s college, see J. Mann (1935· 33-34). For the Jerusalem circle of Karaite Bible translators see Polliack (1997). 2

For a summary of the contents of the al-Kittib al-Mustamil see Bacher (1895a:

232-256), who publishes a few short extracts.

Recent studies of aspects of the

grammatical theory of the work have been published by Maman (1996a, 1996b, 1997, 2001,2002) and Basal (1998,1999,2001,2002).

XlI

INTRODUCTION

books. The work al-Kitab al-Kafi fi al-Luga alJlbraniyya

(,The

Sufficient Book on the Hebrew Language') was a shortened version of

al-Kitab al-Mustamil. The earliest known manuscript of this work has a colophon dated 1037 C.E.3 Al-Kitab al-Kafi had a much wider circulation than al-Kitab al-Mustamil, judging by the large number of extant manuscripts containing the work. 4 We have a few fragments of two additional works that appear to be epitomes of al-Kitab al-Kafi. One of these is referred to by )AbO al-Faraj simply as

al-Must~r

('The Short

Version') and the other was entitled Kitab alJUqud fi Ta~rif

al-Luga

a!Jlbraniyya (,Book of the Pearl-strings on the Grammatical Inflections of the Hebrew Language,).5 In the introduction to Kitab alJUqud it is stated that this work is more concise than al-Must~r.6 3

A further work of

II Firk. Evr. Arab. I 4601, fo1. 107r. A note in the margin of fo1. 110r indicates that

the manuscript was the property of the author's two sons, Faraj and Yehudah. 4

See Skoss (1928, introduction 11-27), Gil (1983, vo1. I, section 938, and the

references cited there). Short extracts from al-Kitiib al-Kiifi have been published previously by M. N. Zislin (1962 [1.l5], 1965 [1.22.1-13]), N. Allony (1983 [1.21.18], [1.27.30]), D. Becker (1991 [1.22.1-27]), G. Khan (1997 [ILl6.12-15, II.17]; 2001 [1.1.1, II.8.7, 11.20.18, 11.4.20, II.4.22]) and Basal (2002 [1.25.53]). The fragment published by Allony (1983: 246) is incorrectly attributed to al-Kitiib al-Kiifi. 5

Fragments of Kitiib alJUqud were published by H. Hirschfeld (1922-23: 1-7). N.

Basal (1997) has published some leaves that he identifies as coming from al-Mu!st~r

of'Abii al-Faraj. The passages on grammatical particles published by S. Poznanski (1896b: 200-213) are shortened versions of ILl8 and II.19 of al-Kitiib al-Kiifi and so must also be assumed to come from either al-Mu!st~r

or Kitiib

al-CUqud. Other manuscripts containing an abbreviated version al-Kitiib al-Kiifi

include II Firk. Evr. Arab. 12578 (18 fols.), II Firk. Evr. Arab. 12753 (1 fo1.), II Firk. Evr. Arab. I 2933 (1 fo1.), II Firk. Evr. Arab. I 2951 (2 fols.), II Firk. Evr. Arab. I 3368 (20 fols.), II Firk. Evr. Arab. I 3382 (2 fols.), II Firk. Evr. Arab. 13387 (1 fo1.). 6

T" T:m~

1;:)N 1ln:J" 1ln:JN TN 7'NO 7NO' ... iJl77N 'I) 'I)N:J7N mln;:)N nJ:J

'i'

1':J''''N 1ln;:)"'N 'I summarized the book al-Kiififi al-Luga ... and somebody asked

me to make another short version that is more concise than the aforementioned short version' (Hirschfeld 1922-23: 5).

INTRODUCTION

xiii

'Abii al-Faraj Hartin, which has survived in various manuscript fragments, is an introductory treatise on grammar entitled Kitiib al-Mad/sal Yi/ii Cllm al-Diqduq fi Turuq al-Luga alJlbriiniyya ('Book of

Introduction into the Discipline of Careful Investigation of the Ways of the Hebrew Language'). According to the preface of this text, 'AM al-Faraj wrote it after his completion of al-Kitiib al-Mustamil al-Kitiib al-Kiifi.

and

7

All these grammatical works of'Abii al-Faraj Harun are systematically arranged studies of the Hebrew language as an independent discipline. He, indeed, sometimes goes beyond a description of specifically Hebrew grammar and discusses general principles of language. In some sections of his works he addresses philosophical issues such as the origin of language and its nature. 8 Also extant are manuscripts of a grammatical commentary on the Bible known as Ta/sir al-YAfi~

('Interpretation of Words') that is

attributed in the colophons to 'AM al-Faraj. The presentation in this work follows the order of the Biblical texts. It includes an Arabic translation of the Biblical verses and grammatical notes. 9 'AM al-Faraj also applied himself to a style of Bible exegesis that was only marginally concerned with grammatical issues. One surviving example of this is a reworking by

7

A large section of this work has been preserved in Il Firk. Evr. Arab. I 4601, fo1.

110a ff. Other extant manuscripts include: Il Firk. Ev. Arab. I 2549 (5 fols.), Il Firk. Ev. Arab. 12559 (2 fols.), Il Firk. Ev. Arab. 12609 (2 fols.), II Firk. Ev. Arab. I 2720, II Firk. Ev. Arab. 12827 (fols. 11-14), Il Firk. Ev. Arab. 12813, Il Firk. Ev. Arab. Il 285 (2 fols.). It is mentioned in a medieval booklist under the abbreviated title as

al-Mad/sal fi al-Diqduq (Il Firk. Evr. Arab. 12524). 8

For the views of the medieval Karaites on the origin and nature of language see

Olszowy-Schlanger (1997) and (1998: 87-97). 9

For this text see Olszowy-Schlanger (2001). A fragment of the text was published by

Poznanski (1908: 55-67); cf. also British Library Or. 2499 fols. 1-21 (Margoliouth, 1899 no. 276).

INTRODUCTION

XIV

)Abu al-Faraj of a commentary on the Pentateuch by )AbU Ya(qub ibn Nul). 10 We are indebted to )Abu al-Faraj mU-un also for one of the most important treatises on the pronunciation and cantillation of the Tiberian Masoretic tradition of Biblical Hebrew. This was know as Hidiiyat al-QiirP (,Guide for the Reader'), which was written in Arabic by the

Karaite grammarian )AbU al-Faraj Harun." It was intended by )AbU al-Faraj to complement his work on grammar, al-Kitiib al-Mustamil and its shorter versions, which contained little description of the pronunciation of the language. He produced the work in a longer and a shorter version. As is the case with al-Kitiib al-Kiij'i, the shorter version of Hidiiyat

al-Qir~

had a much wider distribution than the longer one

judging by the number of manuscripts that are extant. 12 )Abu al-Faraj Harun was not the first Karaite grammarian. Works on Hebrew grammar had been written by Karaites before him. The works of his Karaite predecessors are briefly described here. This will allow us to assess )Abu al-Faraj's originality as well as his indebtedness to the earlier Karaite grammatical tradition. )AbU al-Faraj's teacher, )AbU Ya(qub Yusuf ibn Nul), the founder of the Jerusalem college and one of the foremost Karaite scholars of his age,13 wrote an Arabic work on Hebrew grammar that is referred to in the 10

The text is preserved II Firk. Evr. Arab. I 1754 (798 fols.).

11

For a detailed study of this text see Eldar (1994).

12

Extracts from the longer version are published in Eldar (1981, 1994). Most of the

text of the shorter version that is known to be extant is published in Eldar (1987). 13

One source includes him in a list of scholars whom it describes as the 'teachers of

Jerusalem'; cf. Mann (1935: 31). The other scholars in the list are his contemporaries Yefet ben (Eh and )Abii ai-Sum ibn Zuta. He is referred to in the colophon of another manuscript (MS II Firk. Evr. Arab. I 1754, fol. 105r.) as 'the prince Joseph' (ha-sar

Yosep).

INTRODUCTION

xv

colophons either simply as the Diqduq or as Nukat Diqduq 'Points of Grammar' .14 It is datable to the second half of the tenth century. )Abu al-Faraj Hartin mentions the grammatical work of Ibn Nul). in his writings. 15 Ibn Nul)., in turn, was heir to a tradition of Hebrew grammar that had developed among the Karaites ofIraq and Iran. This was brought to Jerusalem in the migrations of Karaites from the East during the tenth century. Ibn Nul). himself was an immigrant to Palestine from Iraq. This grammatical tradition will be referred to as the early Karaite tradition of Hebrew grammatical thought. 16 )AM al-Faraj Hartin continued some of the elements of this tradition, but was innovative in many ways, both in method and content. )AM YaAM al-Faraj correspond closely to what we find in Ibn NUl).'s Diqduq. Ibn NUl). was an immigrant to Palestine from Iraq, where he was, it seems, a pupil of the Iraqi circle ofKaraite grammarians. 22 )Eskol ha-Koper, 167, letter sin, 173, letter :jadhe. 23 Ed. Skoss, New Haven, 1936-1945. 24 E.g. II Firk. Evr. Arab. I 4323, fol. 9a: hiigii huwa maghab bacq. al-culamiP raJ:timahu alliih 'This is the opinion of one of the sages, God have mercy upon him',

where the blessing raJ:timahu alliih suggests that the man in question is deceased.

25 E.g. al-Kitiib al-Kiifi: allagf gahaba )itii giilika ... min al-diqdaqiyyfna qawm min al-7N7N il1m

7:J :JNl1:J7N il:s7~1

mN7 N)il il:s7N1'N:J .,NWN1 TN:J~7

7NM T~

0'7 ri7N

N1il:J i"N7 N~7:J il:J i"N77N TN:J~7

'The author composed the ensuing words after having completed this part of the work, not while he was still writing the book. Rather, after having completed it, he noted some pertinent remarks in this place and indicated that it should be inserted here, since it is the suitable place for them' [MS FEA 12437, fol. 17v. Scribal note relating to 11.15.33]. As a result of the fact that) AbO al-Paraj allowed himself such creativity in the composition of al-Kitab al-Kafi, the work reached a considerable length. It still included, furthermore, many philosophical discussions of general principles of language. It is unlikely, therefore, to have been intended to have a purely pedagogical purpose. The demand for a more

INTRODUCTION

xxxv

pedagogically orientated grammar no doubt led to al-Kitiib al-Kiij'i being reduced in length to form the two shorter versions known as

al-Mu!st~r

and Kitiib alJUqad. Even these, however, appear to have contained some innovations that were not found in al-Kitiib al-Kiij'i, judging by a comparison of the surviving fragments ofthese with al-Kitiib al-Kiij'i63and the remarks in the introduction to Kitiib al-CUqad: il:JN':JN 7~'tV" 07 N~

N'~n:l

nN1N"T7N T~

i1:',77N "0 "ON::l7N n'~:lN il"O 7~n

N~

N'O m~

n)::l 1i' 1N'tV7N N7N "ON::l7N m~n"

'I have summarized al-Kiij'i j'i al-Luga with a summary that includes its sections, apart from those dealing with exceptional issues, as well as additions that are not contained in al-Kiij'i.' Al-Kitiib al-Kiij'i is composed of two parts. Some manuscripts contain

both parts. These were sometimes, however, bound separately and purchased independently of one another. This is shown by a list of books written at the end of a medieval manuscript, which presumably constituted an inventory of the library of a Karaite. The first item on the list is 'Al-Kiij'i of the elder )AM al-Faraj Harun, may God have mercy on him. The first part of it. ,64 There is no mention of Part Two elsewhere in the list. Part One consists of twenty-eight chapters and Part Two of twenty-two chapters. The longer work al-Kitiib al-Mustamil is composed of eight parts. A comparison of the layout of the contents in each of the two works shows that some degree of the ordering of the topics in al-Kitiib al-Mustamil is reproduced in al-Kitiib al-Kiij'i, but there has nevertheless

63

64 i1J~.

Cf. Basal (1997: 221-223). II Firk. Evr. Arab. I 2524: ,~

m.'~

ill I ' - J

V.J~

t....Abu al-Faraj maintains that the morphological base of a verb is the infinitive form (11.16.12-15). The indebtedness of chapter 1.22 to the early tradition is reflected also in the frequent use of the old Hebrew term 1:137 for the past form of the verb. 73 The notions of 'first imperative' and 'second imperative' that are found in ILl 1.3 are taken over by >AM al-Faraj from the early tradition,74 though in ILl7 he indicates that such terminology is antiquated. Parallels to the interpretation of pausal and context forms of verbs in 11.8 can be found in the Diqduq ofIbn Nul)..75 The practice of reflecting the morphological difference between a construct and absolute form of a noun in translation, as is proposed in 11.20.27, is based on an early Karaite practice. 76 The derivation of anomalous plural forms of nouns from non-existent, hypothetical singular forms (LlO.2, 11.20.12-13) is a feature of the early tradition. 77 The concept of a nominal category know as 17iil ('continuing'), which is mentioned in 11.1.14. and 11.7.11, is taken from the early Karaite tradition. 78 The notion of 'lexical class', which denotes a group of words sharing a common element of meaning and common root letters, is found also in. the early tradition. This is referred to in al-Kitiib al-Kiij'i by the Hebrew term PlV~

or the Arabic

term luga. 79 Finally, the categorization of the letters of the alphabet into functional groups (1.24) is a practice that >AM al-Faraj attributes to the earlier Diqduq scholars. >AM Ya(qub Yusuf ibn Nul)., the foremost 72 Cf. Khan (2000b: 18-36). 73 Cf. Khan (2000a: 146). 74 Cf. Khan (2000a: 53-55). 75 Cf. Khan (2000a: 116-131). 76 Cf. Khan (2000a: 118). 77 Cf. Khan (2000a: 64-66). 78

Cf. Khan (2000a: 115-116; 2000b: 235-237).

79

Cf. Khan (2000a: 78-82).

INTRODUCTION

xxxix

grammarian ofthe early Karaite school, is the only scholar mentioned by name in al-Kitiib al-Kiifi (II.1S.32). 3.0. Grammatical terminology

As remarked above, the grammatical terminology of'Abii al-Faraj is for the most part the terminology used in the mainstream

Ba~rn

school of

Arabic grammar. There are a few survivals of Hebrew terms from the early Karaite tradition. We present here a list of the main technical terms that are used in al-Kitiib al-Kiifi, with an indication of the sections that are concerned principally with the concepts that they express. ARABIC TERMS

iTl~N

Cahl al-luga): see iTl ~.

~iTN

iT":J's7~N

~iTN 'N~l":J

'~N

Cikt~r):

Cahl al-'arabiyya): The speakers of the Arabic language.

Elision. '~1"l:J

(mukta~r):

Camr): Imperative. ~'N

imperative (II.17), ")Nl~

Elided. '~N

(aPamr al-Jawwal) First

'~N

(aPamr al-Jiini) Second

imperative (II.17). ~N:s7)

Cinficii/): The niphcal conjugation of verbs that would normally

be translated by an Arabic JinfaCala form (1.26.80, ILl 1.3, II.lS.34,

~N)

36,37). Cinf~/):

The state of being a free-standing morphological form.

The state of being in pause (ll.20A). ~)

(munfa~il)

Separate,

independent. Pausal. CON Cism): Noun. CNl"l CON Cism tiimm) Complete noun, expressing

meaning by itself (I1.19.3). fPN) CON Cism which cannot express meaning by itself. '~Nl Non-conjugable noun (11.9.1.).

niq~)

Defective noun, CON Cism jiimid)

xl

INTRODUCTION

1~UON

eisnad): Connection between verb and its grammatical subject.

ONmmON (istifham): Interrogative. :JNil'N eicrab): Case inflection in Arabic. 7Nl'T~

eiftiCal): The hithpaccel conjugation, corresponding to the

i1~N

.

pattern. (1.26.55, 11.11.3).

Arabic ~iftaCl

eit;lafa): Conjoining (11.5). ~N

.

(mut;laf): Conjoined. ~N

.

i1"7N (mut;laf'ilayhi): Item to which some other item is conjoined.

"1;'7 nN7~ ei~tla

lugawl): Linguistic convention (11.14.1).

pNpTl'tl.'N eistiqaq): Derivation. TlN:JTlN eilbiit): Assertion. l'NOTlN eittisaC): Widening of basic meaning and usage. 7N~Tl

eit~al):

Connection by affixation of morphological elements.

Connection in meaning between adjacent words that are not in pause (11.7.11, 11.20.4).

7:!m~

(mutta$il) Connected, affixed.

Non-pausal. 71:J (badal) Permutative, apposition (1.14.23). :J"N"

Absent person, third person reference. (ga~ib):

:JN1" (jawab): Apodosis.

"ii11" (jawharl) Belonging to the root (ofa verb): See ~in. NT;' (jaz~):

Apodosis. NT;'7N1 ~i'tl.7N

(al-sart wa-ljz~):

A conditional

clause followed by its apodosis.

i"" (gayr mutaCaddin): See 1l'T~ 1l'T~

i17~;'

(mutaCaddin).

l'~;

(jumla): Clause. (jam C): Plural (1.10). 07N07N l'~;

plural (1.11). iO:J~7N (1.11 ).

l'~;

7N (al-jam C al-salim) Sound

7N (al-jamC al-mukassar) Broken plural

INTRODUCTION

xli

CO" (jism): Tangible body. C':l£)n7~

~i1

(hiP al-ta.ftfm): Otiose heh at the end of a verb (1.27.126).

T71 (wazn): Morphological pattern. 9~'

(wa~!): "~T

Attribute (1.14).

(ziPid): See i1'~T.

"l (zujj): Qibu~. i1'~T

(ziyada): Redundant addition. "~T

7~n

(/:tal):

Present tense

(zaJid) Redundantly added.

(lA, 1.18.3, 1.26.1, 11.3.2, 11.15.12).

Circumstances of action (1.21.17).

9,n (/:twjj): Elision. C:::ln (/:tukm): Grammatical status. i1p'pn

(/:taqfqa): True, basic meaning, definition (as opposed to

metaphorical meaning) (11.14).

i1:::l1n (/:taraka): Vowel.

91n

(/:tar!): Letter, particle. verb). '7~

'1m" 91n

91n (/:tar! Ja~lf):

(/:tarf jawhari) Root letter (of a

Root letter. 7:s£)~

91n (/:tar! JafCal)

Elative form (1.27.60).

1:J:::l (gabar): Informative item in clause, predicate. C'~:l

(gawadim): Servile particles (11.18). C~7:l

(kalam): Speech. "£)~

C~7:l

(kalam mufid) Meaningful speech.

"'1:::l (guriij): Pronunciation. i1i7

(luga): Language. Lexical class. i1"7~

7i1~

eahl al-luga): The

people of the language, the speakers of the language. Grammarians.

Tn7 (la/:tn): Accent. i16£)7 (lafza): Word, utterance.

xlii

INTRODUCTION

rN~,

'~N7 m.7N:J~

(mafjin, al-mafji): Past form of verb. (mubiilaga): Intensiveness (of meaning) (ILlS).

'):J~

(mabni): (Letter) added to the structure of a word (1.26.15), as

distinct from root letter ('7~N

Ja#i) and affixed letter (:J'~

murakkab). (mubtada J): Initial item in clause. N'n:J~

TNi~

(majaz): Metaphor. Extension of basic meaning and usage (II.14). ':J~

(mugakkar): Masculine. n)'~

(muJannal): Feminine.

l'~

(mawfjiC): Function, grammatical status.

:J ~N:J

(muga!ab): Addressee, second person reference.

'~n:J

(mugta$ar): See 'N~n:J.

'7~

(malik), pI. "7~

7~tI)

(mulitk): Vowel (ILl).

(munfa$il): see 7N~tI).

7:JimO~

(mustaqbal): Future form of verb. ~'l

(maC!itf): See ~l'.

i1'7N ~'l

(maCna): Meaning. ')l~

i1t'~

7'ltI~

(maC!itf Jilayhi): See ~l'.

(maCrifa): Definite noun (Ll3). (mariti): Patient (1.20, 1.21). Verbal complement. i'7~

7'ltI~

(mariil mut/aq) Absolute verbal complement (1.21.2, II.16.3-5, 8),

i1:J 7'ltI~

(mariti bihi) Patient of an action (1.21.8), i1'tI 7'ltI~

(mariti fihi) Verbal complement that has the sense of an Arabic

phrase introduced by the prepositionfi 'with' (1.21.14). i17 7'ltI~ (mariillahu) Verbal complement expressing purpose that has the

INTRODUCTION

xliii

sense of an Arabic phrase introduced by the preposition 1- 'to' (1.21.16). il17~

"17£)~

(marul maCahu) Verbal complement that

has the sense of an Arabic phrase introduced by the preposition maitayhi) Item

to which a connection is made. il~N73

(Calama): Distinctive feature, marker (ofa grammatical category). Symbol of a verbal conjugation (1.22).

f'37 (Cararj): Abstract, intangible entity. il'''N£> (fa>ida): Meaning, function. 737N£> (facil): Agent (1.16, 1.20). 737N£>7N CON eism al-facit) Noun of agent (11.15). il737N£> CO" C7 "'7N 737£>7N (al-fn aUag}; lam

yusammafacituhu) Passive verb. ifatil:za): Patal:z. iln~

737£> (fN): Action. Verb. il73~£>

CO" C7 "'7N 737£>7N (al-fn aUag};lam

yusammafaCiluhu) Passive verb.

"6£>7 737£> (fn laJzf): A verb in form only that does not denote a real action (1.15.4).

7'P)~

737£> (fN manqul): Transferred verb, which is not intended to refer to the agent that it has been given (1.15.5). 'N37nO~

737£> (fn must«ar): Transposed verb, the subject of which is in reality the patient of the action rather than the agent (1.15.3).

(rjamm): Shureq (11.1.19). C~

(rjamfr): Pronoun (11.2-11.4). il"~

,.~

(~fga):

Morphological form.

INTRODUCTION

i1'7~

xlv

($ila): Relative clause.

i1~

($ita): Attribute. i1~p

(qim~a):

l'~p

Qame~.

(qat): State of being disjoined, in pause. l'1~p

(maq!iin

Disjoined, pausal.

COp (qism): Part, category. c~'7:l C~OpN

eaqsiim al-kaliim) The parts

of speech (1.2).

m",p (qarlna): Context, item(s) with which a word is collocated. ~,tv

(sarI):

Condition. ~Ti'71

~,tv'7

(al-sar! wa-l-jazii»: A

conditional clause followed by its apodosis. l':J~n

(tiibn, pI.

l':J~m

(tawiibn: An item that follows a noun and

qualifies it (1.14).

'7"1~n

(ta>wll): Explanatory exegesis. ':l~n

(ta>kld): Emphasis. n")~

(ta>nll): Feminine gender. See n)1~.

nin (tajawwuz): Extension of basic meaning and usage. cf. T~i. '''::l,n (tadkfr): Masculine gender. See ':l~. l'~1n

(tawii{iu C ): Linguistic convention.

'''::l1n (tawkld): Emphasis (1.14.20). p"pnn (taJ:tqlq): True meaning,

basic meaning (as opposed to

metaphorical meaning). ~P)

n~'7 T"~n

(Jaliil nuqa!): Seghol. (tamylz): Specification (1.25.53).

i1"~on

(tasmiya): Naming, acting of creating a noun to denote an item. ~"'ln

(tacrif): Definition.

xlvi

INTRODUCTION

"1!J11 (ta/rid): Singular. ~'1

(ta~rif):

~1

Conjugation (of verb), inflection.

(ta~ruf):

Inflection.

1':JNm C"i'l1 (taqdim wa-t~!sir):

Interpretation of a verse by reversing

the order of its elements (H.20.18).

1"i'11 (taqdir): Virtual form of a word or construction that existed in the mind of the speaker but is not expressed directly in speech.

,','CZm (tasdid): Dagesh. iT')1111 (talniya): Dual number (1.10).

HEBREW TERMS

W.",: Dagesh.

i"'i":

Grammar.

T"i"'i"'N

The earlier Karaite grammarians (1.2.1.,

1.4.1,1.22.1,1.22.55,1.24.4,1.24.5,1.27.91,11.7.11,11.16.12, H.17, 11.20.27)

",iT: Continuing form of a noun (H.1.14, H. 7.11).

PW': Lexical class. O'1nN 'W~,

'~37

'W~

:

'Including itself and including others',

gapping of elements in a parallel component of a verse (H.22).

1::137: Past form of the verb (1.22).

Qame~ i1~:

r~i':

nl1!J: PataJ:t (also iTnl1N!J).

(als iT~N'). Interrogative (1.27.91).

INTRODUCTION

xlvii

4.0. Manuscripts 4.1. Provenance and dating

Al-Kitab al-Kafi has been preserved in a large number of manuscripts. These are far more numerous than the extant manuscripts of al-Kitab

al-Mustamil or the shortened versions of al-Kitab al-Kafi known as al-Mul5ta$ar and Kitab alJUqud, which reflects the great popularity of al-Kitab al-Kafi in the Middle Ages. The vast majority of the surviving manuscripts are in the Second Firkovitch collection of the Library of Russia in St. Petersburg. This was acquired by the Karaite bibliophile Abraham Firkovitch in the Near East between the years 1863 and 1865. The majority of the collection appears to have originated from the Karaite synagogue in Cairo.80 A full inventory of the manuscripts that have been identified in the Second Firkovitch collection is presented as an appendix at the end of the volume. A small number of manuscripts are found in other collections, the majority being isolated leaves preserved in the Cairo Genizah. 81 . The majority of the extant manuscripts of al-Kitab al-Kafi are written in Hebrew script and are datable on paleographical and codicological grounds to the thirteenth-fourteenth centuries. This is confirmed by the colophons, most of which bear a date falling within this period, e.g. II Firk. Evr. Arab. I 2447, fo1. 74r

il")~':37

m\"~

p'~il

"'~37i

i,£)~

.,£)

il"~

':l~

fb'37~:l

,~£)'

"£)~'

:l~n

")~n'

0'~37

1~

,i~

Ti,~

,~

Ti,~

,.'tV~

m,ii", il"'37 il"~

on ~"'n

il~n'

80 See Harviainen (1991), (1996) and (1998 n.7). 81 Becker's publication (1991) of part of chapter 1.22 is based on a fragment from the Taylor-Schechter Genizah collection. The fragments published by Allony (1983) from the Austrian National Library in Vienna also emanate from the Genizah.

INTRODUCTION

xlviii

.,£) T;'~N mN~

N'" 10) ~1 "N'£)~ ~N n)o n~ lV~m

"::1,"::1 P"N "::1,"::1

1N:J' l~N' lV'" l~Ni 1

"lV~

l~N

.,:., 1"::1 "iN~n

'£)

::1n:J' 0')'" "'N~

0~'37

'£)O~

0'"

O")~lV'

"lVlV

pN::1 37""" 1":J" "~lV

'The first part of The Sufficient Book on the Hebrew Language by the authorship of the noble, erudite and distinguished elder) AM al-Faraj Hariin, may God have mercy on him, has been completed and it will be followed by the second part, with the help of God, the Exalted One. The Lord is blessed for ever. Amen. Amen. The copy of this part was finished on Tuesday, the eighth of the month of Tammuz, in the year 1586 according to the counting of the Greeks (=1274 C.E.). It was written by Moshe son of R. Aharon son ofR. Shlomo ha-Kohen, known as Ibn al-MawardL'

11 Firk. Evr. Arab. 12844, fo1. 196v.

0" "N~

'£) 37Ji, ':In p~N:J

"£)N:J7N m'37~:1

no, l'37om 370n mo 1N~'

l'''N P ~o,. ;37 ri) 1":~

P ~N'lV P "~lV •••.. "n~37)

"'N~

:J7N Tl7N on 1~

l"'lV37' 01NO N37:1'~ ,,::1 ..~ "p~37

P ~N'(1) P "lV~ N':JNlV' ,~ N'~"

N~

~N37lV'

P ""'::1'37 P l"T:J P 37"""

'The second part of The Sufficient Book has been completed with the help of the Creator, the Blessed and Exalted One, on Wednesday, 26th Ramagan, in the year 699 according to the reckoning of the Arabs (= 1300 C.E.), from which he wrote extracts for .. and his children, by Shmuel ben Yoseph ben Aharon ben cObadiah ben Moshe ben Israel ben Shlomo ben Mvorakh, may they rest in Eden, known as Ibn Khazjak, praising God and offering thanks for His benificence ... '

INTRODUCTION

xlix

11 Firk. Evr. Arab.! 2533, fol. 2v. ;,'':IN'::I377N

m.77N

.,!) "!)N:>7N ::INn:> 1~

":JNn7N n7N on

i1)0 ;,'37P7N ,;,tL' "£1 i1)NOnN 0"637' "7N37n ;,77N i1)'37~:

n~

'T37"7N

1::1

N.,tL':J;' ,.", ::In:>, ::1'3777 ;,"N~

37::10' 370n

'The second part of The Sufjicient Book on the Hebrew Language has been completed with the help of God, the Exalted One, and His great goodness in the month of Oil al-Qacda in the year 709 according to the reckoning of the Arabs (= 1310 C.E.). It was written by David ha-Nasi ben E1icezer Semal). ha-Nasi.' 11 Firk. Evr. Arab. 11 1181, fol. Iv.

m."N

"£1 ''£IN:>'N ::INl1:J'N ':IN ,m ":JNn'N ,n'N [on]

"'£I'N '::IN [7~N]£I' 1"[mN

0'N377N '''N'N TtL"N [ ] p£lN'~

'''''N T~

[

] ;,'':IN'::I37'N

] i1)37 ;,"N TN'~

;'N~]

11';'

37::10' 1"n7m

'The second part, and the last, of The Sufficient Book on the Hebrew Language [by the authorship of] the noble, erudite and

distinguished elder )Abil a1-Faraj Hariln, may God be satisfied with him [was completed on ... ] Iyyar, which corresponds to [..... . in the year] 732 (= 1332 C.E.).' A few manuscripts are earlier and can be dated to the eleventh century. Some of these are written in Arabic script. The most notable of these early manuscripts is 11 Firk. Evr. Arab. I 4601, which contains most of Part Two written in Arabic script. It is dated in a colophon Rajab 428 A.H. (=1037 C.E.), which fell within the life time of'Abil a1-Faraj. There are, furthermore, grounds for believing that this manuscript preserves a

INTRODUCTION draft of the text in the hand of the author himself. There are numerous corrections and additions written on virtually every page. The later manuscripts always follow the text of the corrected version and never the original deleted version of the draft text. One must assume, therefore, that the later manuscript tradition is based on fair copies of the text made on the basis of this or a similar draft. The view that the manuscript is a private copy of )AbO al-Faraj himself is supported by the fact that a marginal note (fo1. 11 Or) indicates that it belonged to 'Faraj and Yehudah, the sons of ('AbO al-Faraj) Harun.' The beginning of the colophon of the manuscript is as follows:

4

I..r.--J I WlI ~

t')J .:>!~J

~I

.IA"~ ~J

I

~

~

~

u, ~

ill I :i.:.~

'-:-'>.'J ~

-.;,l...,..;..1

J...wl -.;,~ IJo4 ~

~

~

lla.:;

uW ~ ~.,:JI

~

,-:-,l:6J1 ~

1.:.~JI.S'

~.Lo

~I

A:...4J

.. ~

.. 'Y..

I IJo4 .) l::05':i IJ ~

I J..=..:...., dl~

W

W

L(;;J I

I JU

'The Sufficient Book on the Hebrew Language has been completed

with the help of God, the Exalted One, and His great goodness in Rajab of the year 428 (=1037 C.E.). I entreat of Him, may He be praised, success in achieving what will please Him and turn away his anger, easing of the onerous tasks and abundance of kindness with regard to them, so that my desire may be thereby achieved and my purpose may be attained by them.' A manuscript in Hebrew script consisting of four folios (ll Firk. Ev. Arab. I 2601) preserves a fragmentary colophon from the eleventh century. It refers to some kind of textual addition, though it is not clear

INTRODUCTION

li

whether this is referring to additions to what the author wrote in al-Kitiib al-Mustamil or an addition made to the text of al-Kitiib al-Kiifi like the

one indicated by the scribal note relating to 11.15.33 that is discussed above (§2.0.):

i1]~"T

]~

[ ]

37~

n1im.~

] "7~

37:3 ,~ i1"~

~

i1"37~

]7~

137:3' [ i1~n7

] mo T~

[

.,£) [

07 ~mn"

] ":J1~7

[

:3~'

[~

:3~nJ7

'The Sufficient Book on the Hebrew Language has been completed

with the help of God, the Exalted One [ 4[ ] including [

] in Rajab of the year

] the addition of what was not contained in [

after I exerted myself [

] the aforementioned book [

there is need for [ ]. '

The full title of the work that appears in the colophons and elsewhere in the manuscripts is generally al-Kitiib al-Kiifi fi al-Luga alJlbriiniyya. This is the form of title that appears in the colophon of the autograph draft (11 Firk. Evr. Arab. I 4601). In some cases the title is abbreviated to al-Kitiib al-Kiifi or simply al-Kiifi.82 In a colophon at the end of Part One

in the manuscript 11 Firk. Evr. Arab. I 4602 (fo1. 69r) the title appears as Kitiib al-Kiifi fi Diqduq al-Luga alJlbriiniyya , in which the word Diqduq

appears to be a later scribal addition.

82

Cf. the colophon of II Firk. Evr. Arab. I 2844 (fol. 196v), which is reproduced

above. In a booklist contained in II Firk. Evr. Arab. I 2524, the work is also referred to in its abbreviated form: m~

?'N?N m.?N ..ul

"""J

iJ.~

(;iJI ,-""I ~

'!:IN::l?N.

INTRODUCTION

lii

4.2. Edition corpus The numerous manuscripts of al-Kitab al-Kafi preserve a remarkably uniform text. It was, therefore, considered unnecessary and impractical to collate every extant manuscript in the preparation of the edition. A more pragmatic methodology was followed, which, we believe, has produced a critical text that is unlikely to be inferior to one that could be attained through a maximalist collation of scores of manuscripts. Our critical edition is based on the collation of a small corpus of manuscripts, which include some of the longest and best preserved manuscripts of the work in the Second Firkovitch collection. These were originally identified by P.K. Kokovtsov and M. Zislin. 83 On the basis of this corpus we were able to establish the vast majority of the text of the work. The small gaps that remained were subsequently filled from other manuscripts in the Second Firkovitch collection. The manuscript in Arabic script that has been identified as an autograph of>Abii al-Faraj Harun (11 Firk. Evr. Arab. I 4601) was not included in the basic corpus on account of the fact that it is a draft with numerous deletions and additions and that it presents severe problems of decipherment. This manuscript has been used, however, to fill some gaps and to verify correct readings on a number of occasions. The basic manuscript corpus for the edition consists of sixteen manuscripts. The five largest manuscripts are the following: 11 Firk. Evr. Arab. I 2437 (419 fols.) 11 Firk. Evr. Arab. 14602 (194 fols.) 11 Firk. Evr. Arab. 12441 (129 fols.) 11 Firk. Evr. Arab. I 4478 (94 fols.) 11 Firk. Evr. Arab. I 2447 (90 fols.)

83

See Zislin (1962), (1963) and (1965).

INTRODUCTION

liii

The remaining eleven manuscripts preserve smaller parts of the work: 11 Firk. Evr. 11 Firk. Evr. 11 Firk. Evr. 11 Firk. Evr. 11 Firk. Evr. 11 Firk. Evr. 11 Firk. Evr. 11 Firk. Evr. 11 Firk. Evr. 11 Firk. Evr. 11 Firk. Evr.

Arab. I 2580 (42 fols.) Arab. I 2702 (29 fols.) Arab. I 2405 (28 fols.) Arab. 12946 (16 fols.) Arab. 12406 (10 fols.) Arab. I 2504 (10 fols. ) Arab. I 2475 (10 fols. ) Arab. 12374 (6 fols.) Arab. 12351 (5 fols.) Arab. I 2788 (2 fols.) Arab. 12584 (2 fols.).

A particular difficulty for the editorial work has been caused by the disordered state of most of the manuscripts, in that chapters and individual folios are often out of order. 84 Since none of the other grammatical works of )AM al-Faraj Rarun that are related to al-Kitab al-Kafi has yet been edited, the reconstruction of the correct order of leaves and chapters was based largely on internal evidence of the manuscripts. 4.3. Paleographical and codicological features of manuscripts m the edition COrpUS85 All the manuscripts used for the present edition constitute codicological units and are written in Hebrew script. Only in MS FEA I 2580 86 do we 84 The disorder of folios is attested, for instance, in the reconstruction of chapter 25 of the Part I, for whose edition the following manuscripts and leaves have been used:

II Firk. Evr. Arab. 12437, fols. 386v-389v; 271r-276v; 297r-298r; II Firk. EVL Arab. I 2441, fols. 96v-97v, 89r-89v, 59r-61r; II Firk. Evr. Arab. I 4478, fols. 72r-73v. The ensuing description of the manuscripts (§§4.3.-4.21.) is largely based on Gallego (2001) with a contribution on the dating of the script by Judith

85

Olszowy-Schlanger. 86

Henceforth the full classmark of the manuscripts will be abbreviated by replacing

INTRODUCTION

liv

find a later addition: two folios (31 and 32) in Arabic script, which belong, nevertheless, to the same work. The colophon of the manuscript FEA I 2447 indicates that it was written in 1274 C.E. MS FEA 14602 can be dated by a colophon to the year 1332 C.E. The leaf containing the colophon has now become detached from the manuscript and put under the separate c1assmark 11 Firk. Evr. Arab. 11 1181. 87 A note written at the front of the manuscripts by a librarian in the nineteenth century, however, indicates that this leaf originally belonged to FEA I 4602. All manuscripts of the edition corpus are written on Oriental paper in Hebrew script (of square, semi-cursive and cursive types), except for the two folios in Arabic script in MS FEA I 2580 (fols 31 and 32), which were probably inserted at a later stage. Both scribal practices, such as the graphic means used to keep the left margin even, and the script itself indicate the Oriental origin of all these manuscripts. The date of the manuscripts that do not have a surviving colophon may be proposed on the basis of a paleographical analysis. It must be stressed that such dates are only approximations. The dating is principally based on the comparison with other dated manuscripts. The comparison carried out in our work is based both on the dated manuscripts from our edition corpus and on the samples of dated manuscripts published by the Hebrew Palaeography Project. 88 The dated manuscripts in Hebrew script of our corpus are written in Oriental cursive script. MS FEA 12447 is dated by its colophon to 1275 C.E. It is written in cursive script, except for the headings and the phrase II Firk. Evr. Arab. I (Le. Second Firkovitch collection, Hebrew-Arabic I) by FEA I. This practice is also followed in the critical apparatus of the edition. 87

The text of these two colophons has been reproduced above.

88

Beit-Arie and Sirat (1973), Beit-Arie and Sirat (1979), Beit-Arie, Sirat and Glatzer

(1986).

INTRODUCTION

Iv

sub-headings written in square characters. Despite its cursiveness, the script of this manuscript is very neat and elegant. There is a clear distinction between the letters daleth and resh, and between beth and kaph. The characters are particularly rounded, the upper stroke of the lamedh, as well as descenders of qoph and final peh are curved. The ligature

is written with two strokes which meet at a sharp ~aleph-md

angle, and the right-hand stroke begins by a decorative bend. The

~aleph

has a form resembling the letter 'K', which is very characteristic of the Oriental cursive. The right-hand stroke of the daleth is written on a slant relative to the bottom line of writing. The letter zayin has a characteristic shape resembling the Arabic independent letter jlm. The middle stroke of the letter shin is very short and is situated in the upper part of the left-hand stroke~

Many of these features are also attested in the script of

MS FEA I 2844, dated to 1300 C.E. by its colophon. Also in this manuscript the letters beth and kaph and daleth and resh are dissimilar. The decorative bend to finish the descenders of some characters is even more pronounced than in MS FEA I 2447. Here this feature concerns not only qoph and final peh, but also final nun and final ~adhe,

whose

descenders are also very long, and final kaph, which is also characteristically bent, leaning to the right. There are two forms of the ligature, one structurally similar to that in MS FEA 12447 ~aleph-md

and the other obtained by a stroke in a shape of semi-circle with a straight stroke on its top. There are also two forms of the zayin, one similar to that in MS FEA 12447, and the other closer to the ductus of a square zayin. The shin has also a very short middle stroke attached to its left hand stroke.

lvi

14~

INTRODUCTION

---:-;6sf!:,-(,6' (» ~'

. ~\

~ ".f1

W~

· F' k":'l-;~

:;/~,_ ~tln) ~'t· _ 1i!' · · ~.)"':U»?rt ('1J lJW~ " :f;" ~ ' -?~ - ~ .'3).JIt';J ,~ . ~ : f:;,t.o~' ~/:OA - ' fJ1 ( ' tK:!~ '~( -

to

~

.,~

l~W'

.

fPr,jcQ

-

)'~ - ~}'nP

otOk'.9 ,~

,tob ~;6,)IW ~j,

-.,,,,;2.$

Plate 1: FEA I 2447

The ductus of particular characters is in many cases similar in MS FEA I 4602, written in 1332 C.E. However, this manuscript contains less calli graphic features than the ones just mentioned. The descenders of final kaph, nun, peh,

~adhe

and qoph have less pronounced bends and

sometimes are completely straight. The ductus of the JaZeph is different. It is written in three gestures of the calamus with a 'zigzag' shape. The final kaph is still long and leaning to the right. The letter lamedh has been

written in various ways, though a characteristic form of lamedh in this manuscript is one written with two strokes which meet in such a way that the letter has a shape of the numeral '3'. The middle stroke of the shin is still very short and issues from the very top of its left-hand stroke.

Plate 2: FEA I 4602

INTRODUCTION

lvii

The earliest of the undated manuscripts of our corpus seem to be those written in square script. The writing of MS FEA I 2475 has marked affinities with that of the Karaite marriage contract CUL Add. 3430, written in Jerusalem, in 1023 C.E.89 Although they were probably not copied by the same hand, they may well have emanated from the same scribal school. The similarities between the two manuscripts include graphic devices as well as the morphology of particular characters. In addition to these similarities, the early date for this manuscript (eleventh century) can be argued on the basis of some of its graphic features. It is noteworthy that in MS FEA I 2475 there are almost no graphic devices to keep the left margin even, except for an occasional elongated letter. Consequently, written lines are of uneven length, which is a feature more prominent in older manuscripts.

Plate 3: FEA I 2475

MS FEA I 4478, also copied in square script, likewise seems to date from

the eleventh century. The left hand margins are still irregular although some graphic devices have been used to keep them even. The blank spaces at the end of shorter lines are filled with a sign made with two parallel strokes of the calamus (two dots or two short parallel lines) at the level of the top line of the writing. The script contains some calligraphic 89 Olszowy-Schlanger (1998: plate XII).

lviii

INTRODUCTION

features such as decorative serifs and 'flags' on the ascender of the lamedh, and its general style corresponds to that of many dated Oriental manuscripts from the eleventh century.

Plate 4: FEA I 4478

As for the MS FEA 12580, the general appearance of its script, as well as graphic devices used to keep left-hand margins even are similar to those in MS FEA I 4478. The lines, however, are of more regular length, and some of the features of the script are those found in twelfth century manuscripts. These features include a characteristic shape of the ligature :>aleph-lamedh. In MS FEA 12580, alongside more formal ligatures made with three strokes of the calamus, we find a fair number of slightly more cursive ligatures, made with two movements of the calamus, where the right hand stroke is rounded. 90

90

Such a shape of the ligature >aleph-lamedh is found for example (also alongside

more formal ligatures) in MS AID 234H written in 1198 C.E., cf. Beit-Arie et al. (1987: no 39).

INTRODUCTION

lix

Plate 5: FEA I 2580

MS FEA I 2504 and MS FEA I 2788, written in a square script with some cursive features, also seem to be early, dating probably from the eleventh century. There are marked affinities between the two manuscripts and, while it is difficult to ascertain that they were written by the same hand, they very probably emanate from the same scribal circle. The density of the script and the frequency of elongated letters to fill short lines are different in both manuscripts. The ductus, however, and the morphology of some particular letters are strikingly similar. In any case, both manuscripts belong to the same style which is relatively easy to define. This style of script is careful and deliberate, and includes some calli graphic features, but its general appearance is one that has not been carefully executed. This apparent lack of regularity is due to uneven top and base lines of the writing, to uneven left margins, and to the fact that the overall uniform inclination of the writing is interrupted by additional serifs and strokes, which are traced at different and often conflicting angles. The top horizontal bar of the daleth, for example, has one additional short vertical serif on each extremity, one leaning to the left and the other to the right. The addition of many serifs is probably the most overwhelming general feature of the script, the feature which gives

Ix

INTRODUCTION

it a characteristic sharp and spiky appearance. Short vertical serifs were appended to the top bars of the letters beth, daleth, heh, lJeth, kaph, final

mem, samekh, peh, qoph, resh and tav. In addition to the usual form of yodh, which is a rounded stroke like a comma, there is another form, which is angular resembling a French circumflex accent. The final mem is rounded, but its left-hand vertical stroke is extended and an additional stroke is attached to the base of the letter. The ductus of the peh is very elaborate and resembles that found in early calligraphic square manuscripts. The top of the letter is finished by a sharp serif, and the right-hand stroke is curved towards the middle of the letter. The gimel is long and descends well below the base line of the writing. The base of the

cayin is long. It sometimes underlines the following letter, or, at the end of the word, it curves up and often joins the left-hand vertical stroke. The descenders of the final kaph and qoph are quite straight. All these features put together make this style of the script quite distinctive. Very similar features are found in some eleventh century Palestinian manuscripts, such as MS T -S 13 J 1. 11, written in 1045 in Jerusalem. 91

Plate 6: FEA I 2504

91

Beit-Ari6 et al. (1987: no 55).

INTRODUCTION

lxi

Plate 7: FEA I 2788

The undated MS FEA I 2351 and MS FEA I 2406 should also be considered together, since their scripts are very similar. This script is an elegant Oriental cursive. The handwriting is careful and well executed, but the varying inclination of the letters gives a general impression of an intended irregularity. Indeed, while the general orientation of the writing is leaning to the right, the ascenders of the lamedh and of the Jaleph-lamedh ligatures lean sharply to the left. Likewise, the descenders of the final kaph or ~adhe

lean to the right, while those of many nuns lean

to the left. Such an interrupted rhythm of the writing is often found in Oriental cursive manuscripts from the twelfth century, such as T-S NS J 296, written in 1159 in Fust:at.92 Another characteristic feature of this rapid script is its 'airy' aspect. The words and letters are well spaced, and the strokes forming the letters quite often do not meet. Most strokes are quick, straight or slightly rounded. The descender of the qoph ends with a curve to the left. Another form of a qoph is attested, with a ductus resembling the numeral '3', the upper part being much smaller than the lower part. The ductus also of final peh resembles a '3', but here its upper part is much larger than its lower part. Such a ductus of the peh is found in many cursive manuscripts from the twelfth and thirteenth centuries, as well as in our corpus, notably in MS FEA I 2447 written in 1275 C.E. Some elements of the page layout in MS FEA I 2351 and MS FEA I 92

Beit-Arie etal. (1987: no 69); cf. Yardeni(1997: 196).

INTRODUCTION

lxii

2406, and notably an irregular left-hand margin, as well as the contrasting angles of the letters mentioned above seem to indicate an earlier date than that of MS FEA 2447.

, 11.,N~

- l~); ~-?t

};.v~I:P"

'!J~Y

. U ~yJ('

f''''."~.V: ~ "~J:U! YJ" tJi~

,iT,

4.7. Omissions A large number of textual omissions are to be attributed to common copying mistakes, such as the skipping of a sentence that starts or ends in a similar way as another that comes below in the text. This is the case in MSS FEA I 2441 and 4602 [see tables 3 and 4].

INTRODUCTION

lxxiii

Table 3 MS FEA I 4602, fol. 52v (1.27.16)

MS FEA I 2441, fol. 39v

npt" 7nJ ,,, i11"i'n1

npt" 7nJ ", i11"i'n1 cl;! N~J'

I;!N'~tV

'N N:1" u,~"

m:1 ""

Omitted

npt" 7nJ ", 'i"

i11::>, N~

',y

m,::>,

i11::>, N~

'1;!37 m,::>,

Table 4 MS FEA I 2437, fol. 223v (II.5.46)

MS FEA I 4602, fol. 77r

CONI;!N "N ~ON' ~1 'IN:i' N~ 11;!, 1~' CON'N 'I;!N N~O' ~1 'IN:i' N~ 11;!, 1~' l'~ON 1~ ,nN' I;!::> I;!ln'!) 'IN:i~ 1'~06N 1~ ,nN' ,:1 'In'!) 'IN:i~;! 1~ 1" '!) ,:1 NI;!, i1"N 'IN:i~ N!):i~ 1~ 11;!, '!) ,:1 N" i1"N 'IN:i~ N!):i~ 1'~:iN 'I;!N i1!)N:iN'N 1'~:iN 'I;!N i1!)N:iN'N 1'~:iI;!N

'I;!N l'!)N:i~

"N'N!) i1'I;!N N!):i~

lN~O' N~i1n

7':;" 'p!l

Omitted

7':;" ,p,

"NI;!N!) i1"N N!):i~

N~i1n

7':;" ,p' i1,'i'::>

i1"i':1

4.8. Additions Text additions to the main text occur in certain manuscripts. These generally consist of prepositions (see below in the discussion oflinguistic features), some elaborative expressions and, above all, longer Biblical quotations. They rarely modify or add anything to the contents of the main text. Examples of elaborative expressions: MS FEA I 2504, fol. 4r (1.8.18): *[Ni1'l;!y] n':1' N'N!) '!)J,I;! 'i1 'n'N NI;!

•••NnN:1nN mNl Ni1'N *Omitted in MSS FEA I 2437, fol. 419v and 2441, fol. 7v

,m

lxxiv

INTRODUCTION

MS FEA I 2437, fo1. 360v (1.13.10): *[iJY::J'N?N] 17:) iJEl'Y7:) '?N 9N~'

N7:)

iJ""7:)?N CNOi'N *Omitted in MSS FEA I 2441, fo1. Br and 4478, fo1. 78r. MS FEA I 2437, fo1. 224r (II.5.46): ?Nn?N] ,?", CN?N '?N iJElN~7:)

__ :;Jl)in~

n~?N'

ninNl *['El

*Omitted in MS FEA I 4602, fo1. 77r.

The most numerous textual additions consist of extended Biblical quotations. Copyists were prone to add a few more words to the verse quoted in the text: MS FEA I 2441, fo1. 2v (1.5.1.): ___ ?YEl *[,'mmN] C"~7:)J

Ctv ,tvN '?'i'"

*Omitted in MSS 2405, fo1. 21r; 2946, fo1. 7v; 2475, fo1. 10v MS FEA I 2437, fo1. 417v (1.8.3.): 9)NniJ l"iJN::J' C"~7:)J

'n??yniJ

ii" iJ::J

iJ?Nn7:)N' *[;1T7:)] ",'::J "7:)n ':' *Omitted in MSS FEA I 2441, fo1. 6r; 2946, fo1. 13v; 2405, fo1. 3r.

Two Biblical verses that start in the same way can lead to different variants in the manuscripts: MS FEA I 4602, fo1. Br (1.26.42): ", "i"

,m iJUEl? "N 17:) "'?N '~n:m

'i"

*[Y'N ,tv,,, iJ7:)iJ] *MS FEA I 2441,71v has n, 'El'?n' (1s. 20:31) instead ofY'N ,tv,,, iJ7:)iJ (Psa 37:9).

4.9. Copyists' corrections Some wrong readings originate in the copyist's misinterpretation of the text, very often due to the similarity with another expression that is more

lxxv

INTRODUCTION

commonly used. This is the case in MSS FEA I 4478, 2441 and 2702 in the following example [see table 5]: Table 5 MSS FEA I 2437, fo1. 363r MSS FEA I 4478, fo1. 69r MS FEA I 2441, fo1. 28v and 2702, fo1. 20v and 2475, fo1. 2v (1.21.13)

j",.i, T"'3.~

"i"

'lI(1::J3."1( ,~

im,n "I( 1("3.'n~

j",.i, i1n,n

"Ni"

'lI(1::J3."1(

"I(

,~

j",.i,

1("3.'n~

T"'3.~

"'i"

'lI(1::J 3."1(

i

,~

"I( 1("3.'n~

T"'3.~

MSS FEA I 2437 (fo1. 363r) and 2475 (fo1. 2v) preserve the correct

version, which can be translated as 'in Hebrew, it is rare (yaqillu) for it to be found to be transitive with three objects.' In the rest of the manuscripts, however, the copyists have erroneously modified the verb. We read either 7Ni" ')N':l177N 'El 'in Hebrew it is said (yuqiil)' or 'El

7'i" ')N':l177N 'in Hebrew he says (yaqal).' This mistake results from a confusion with a similar phrase often used by >AM al-Faraj when introducing a Hebrew quotation: 7Ni" ':IN':l37'N''£)

'It is said in

Hebrew.' In MS FEA I 4478, Jaleph constitutes a later correction that might be due to the intervention of a different copyist or the fact that the original copyist collated the text with another version. The similarity with a frequently used phrase is another cause of mistakes in reading. In the case below (table 6), the error has arisen by confusion with the phrase m.77N 7ilN ('people of the language'), which is very frequently used by >AM al-Faraj to refer to the group of speakers who established the language. 94 When he uses a similar expression, ,ilN

TNtv7N N1il ('people concerned with this matter', i.e. grammarians), some of the copyists are confused and either add the term ill7 (MS FEA I

94

See Khan (1997: 320, n.29).

INTRODUCTION

lxxvi

2441), resulting in the hybrid sentence '[it is called in the terminology of] the people of this language and matter' or omit the expression ?i1l~

(MS

FEA I 2504) altogether: Table 6 MS FEA I 2504, fol. 4r

MS FEA I 2946, fol. 12r MS FEA I 2441, fol. 7v and MS FEA I 2437, fol. 35lr (1.9.1) '~O

N7 "7N CON7N '~O ~'n

~'n

N7 "7N CON7N nN7~'!)

nN7~'!)

r~"

N7 ~'n

~,:-r

":-r~ Ib~N;'

m"~

CON7N '!) N~O'

"7N

nN7~

r~"

r~"

":-r~

~,:-r

N'~;

~,:-r

N'~;

Another expression that is frequently used in the text is

'1n N?N

('do

you not see?'). This is the origin of a mistaken reading in MS FEA I 2437, whose copyist transformed the noun '1n?N ('the ground') into the above mentioned expression: MS FEA I 2437, fol. 230r (II.8.6): 111pn!)N

*',,n ~,

:IN':JN T~

"J'n!)

*The correct reading is preserved in MS FEA I 4602, fol. 80r: ',n7N (al-tharii). Translation: 'then from the gates of the ground I was absent by the

remainder of my years.'

4.10. The ligature of ~aleph

and lamedh

The use of one graphic sign for the representation of the sequence ~aleph - lamedh is commonly found in medieval Judaeo-Arabic manuscripts. The ligature sign, which is similar to the Hebrew letter lamedh, is systematically used to represent the Arabic definite article al- and is also found in the middle and end of Arabic words without that particular

INTRODUCTION

lxxvii

function. By comparison with the definite article in Standard Arabic, the definite article in ludaeo-Arabic, which is represented by the ligature sign, exhibits a higher degree of autonomy, in that it can be written as an independent word, separated from the word it determines across lines or even across pages. The use of the ligature is less common in Hebrew quotations, but it is, nevertheless, found in a number of cases in this context. The fact that the ligature sign is mostly used to represent the definite article is the cause of some mistaken readings. In several places in MSS FEA 12437 and 2441, the Hebrew preposition 7~

has been written with

the ligature sign and joined to the following word, as if it were the definite article. This is the case in fo1. 365r: J'1:ljf~ The Hebrew preposition 7~

'm~:l1.

is joined to the following word also in the

following passage:

*The correct reading is preserved in MS FEA I 2437, fol. 89v: Translation: 'Lamedh substitutes for 7~,

as in ~'T;l

'#1~?

~l';t,1

,m

7N.

(2 Chron.

20:20).'

The similarity between the letter lamedh and the ligature is the origin of the erroneous substitution of one by the other, as in the following example:

*MS FEA I 4602, fol. 23r preserves the correct reading: 'The nun is not a radical, but rather it is a nun ofthe past.'

lU 7:1.

Translation:

lxxviii

INTRODUCTION

4.11. Numerals Numerals, both cardinals and ordinals, are often substituted by the Hebrew letter that represents their numerical value. There is a high degree of variation in the use of one system or the other among different manuscripts and even within each manuscript. Consider the following examples: MSS FEA I 2475, fo1. 7v; 2406, fo1. 10v; 2441, fo1. 25r (1.21.1): il':J137'l't 'ill't

[...] N:-r,nN Cl'tOpl't ft "l't il'~Op

...

[ ]

MS FEA I 2441, fo1. 90v (1.23.6): MS FEA I 2702, fo1. 2r: il"~'t

il"~'t

~N

:-r'JN1"~

'El,

'El,

MS FEA I 2437, fo1. 417r (1.8.2): ... p' l'tmnl't :J1itl't MS FEA I 2946, fo1. lOr: ..• p' l'tmnl't :J1itl't

:-r1"~

l "37 ~'1nlt "37

~'1nlt

1l't C'37l't' 1l't C'37l't'

The previous examples clearly indicate how scribes felt free to use either Hebrew letters or Arabic words to express numerals. The autograph draft of the work in Arabic script that is preserved in FEA I 4601 has only Arabic words for numerals, which suggests that the use of Hebrew letters was an abbreviation device of later copyists. 4.12. The names of Hebrew letters Letters of the Hebrew alphabet are referred to by both Arabic and Hebrew names. The Arabic names are far more frequent (e.g. /iim instead of lamedh, yiP instead of yodh, etc.). When the names of the

INTRODUCTION

lxxix

letters are in the dual, they occasionally retain their Hebrew form, but in the plural only the Arabic forms are used. Consider the following examples: MS FEA I 4602, fo1. 20v and, with slight orthographic differences, MSS FEA 12437, fo1. 311r; 2441, fo1. 79r; 2447, fo1. 27r (I.26.69): • ,::J,'

iln~

p:;, :J~N;'7

::J'N"77 7::J

N' n7'N "7N 731!l7N::J n7N~

10n' 31~"7N

c7:;,n~1N'

N7 *'N1'1'?N' ",'?N'

,~

IN n'n 1~'

• '::J,n nnN'

MS FEA I 2447, fo1. 25r, and 2437, fo1. 308r; 2441, fo1. 77r with some orthographic differences (I.26.59): 1':;' 7pniioN

N~7!l

"~7

ii'lNn *'Nii '7N Nn'!l lNiinm *'N1'1'?N

Nn7'~

1~

**MSS FEA I 2437,308r and 2441,77r have,n in the place ofNii MS FEA I 4602, fo1. Hr and 2441, fo1. 69r with some orthographic differences (I.26.28): 731N!l7N ,~

'~

N~

Nnn7Nm "31n~

"l *,,':l i1l~

... c'n::JT31 N7' C'n'l1J31 '!l *1'1NN''?N ,nl 7'31!l~N

N~'

'N'::J i1l~

"~:J

7~nN

N~

N,m N'N

MS FEA I 4602, fo1. 9r and with slight orthographic differences 2437, fo1. 381v and 2441, fo1. 68r (I.26.20): 7N::JpnON77 ':;'N7N' '7~N

N~mn

*r"" Nn'!l l"7N 31"" 931" lT1::J

The Hebrew and Arabic names of the Hebrew letters alternate freely in most of the manuscripts, although only Arabic names are used in the plural. The non-systematic use of Arabic or Hebrew names in the singular and dual probably occurred in the earliest manuscripts, as proved by the

INTRODUCTION

lxxx

fact that several manuscripts that differ from each other in other aspects exhibit the same alternation between the Arabic and Hebrew forms (see the first example above with yodh/yiP taw/tiP). The same can be said about the use of Hebrew grammatical terms and their alternation with Arabic synonyms, such as '~N

T'W7 - in.7

('lexical class') and 1:137 -

('past verb form'), which are used in the same context in all the manuscripts. 95 If the term in question is inflected, only Arabic is employed (e.g. i1'~N,

TNm.7).

4.13. The numeration of chapters The numeration of chapters appears only in a few manuscripts and often as a later addition on the margin or above the line. This is no doubt a later addition of some of the copyists. Consider the following examples: MS FEA I 2406, fo1. lOv, 2441, fo1. 25r, and 2702, fo1. 17r (1.21): 'I)

:IN:I

CNOPN 7'1D~N

CNOPN :IN:I

MS FEA I 2475, fo1. 7v: 7'1)~N MS FEA I 4478, fo1. 92r:

CNOPN '!) N~

f"ttV'N' ,nN'N :IN:I'N

7'1)~N

MS FEA I 2447, fo1. lr (1.3): 17'7 ilT"~7N

95

"'"7N 'I) :IN:I

MS FEA I 2946, fo1. 4v: 17'7 ilT"~7N

"'"7N 'I) n'Nn'N :IN:I'N

MS FEA I 2447, fo1. lr: 17'7 ilT"~7N

"'"7N 'I) n,n'N :IN:I'N

There is only one manuscript (MS FEA I 2405), in which the Arabic term ':liN~

is

used where other manuscripts have have ,:l17, e.g. MSS 2475, fo1. 6v; 2437, fo1. 286v (1.22.16): '~1V

717N1)7N CON' '~1V

*':l177N'; *MS FEA I 2405,16v ':liN~7.

INTRODUCTION

lxxxi

4.14. The introduction of Biblical quotations Another element of variation from manuscript to manuscript and even within each individual manuscript is the way that a Hebrew quotation is introduced. The expression that is normally used is

1"i':J

'as you say,'

ii':J, or without the waw p:J. It frequently, a; ;"'i':J 'as he says.' The

but it also occurs in the abbreviated form can also occur, though less expression

O;"'i':J

'as they say,' is mainly used for quoting Arabic

phrases. Consider the following examples: MS FEA I 2437, fo1. 354v (I.12.l): MS FEA I 2946, fo1. 16r: 'J~;N

~,

MS FEA I 4602, fo1. 14v (1.26.45):

'J~;N

~: '~i:l

ii':l tir ~J:

~N

P:l i:J1n i:J1 '~1:J

i:J1

MSS FEA I 2437, fo1. 366r; 2475, fo1. 3v (1.21.17): CNP

~Nn

~3I

jn:J~'

N3IiO~

CNP

f1~'i"

N~:J

;,3IiO

~:Ji3lN

~D

C:1~'il

1~T

MSS FEA I 2702, fo1. 22v; 2437, fo1. 365v; 4478, fo1. 74r; 2405, fo1. 14v

(1.21.16): 1J~

ND':J

l'~N

n~i

~:Ji3lN

~D

C:1~'il

4.15. Orthographic and linguistic variation Many of the differences and variant readings of the manuscripts used for the edition are of an orthographic and linguistic nature. We shall examine here the most common phenomena. The Judaeo-Arabic orthography reflected in these manuscripts can be ascribed to the 'Arabicized' type that prevailed in the medieval period and which is based on the imitation of the spelling of Classical Arabic. 96

96

For the various types of orthography of ludaeo-Arabic see Blau and Hopkins

(1984), Hary (1996: 727-42, esp. p. 730) and Hary (1992: 82-5).

INTRODUCTION

lxxxii

There are differences among the manuscripts, however, regarding the degree to which they adopt the diacritical signs of the Arabic consonants. MS FEA I 2447 uses the full range of diacritical signs with a high degree of consistency whereas some manuscripts, such as MS FEA I 2437, use only a small range of signs and these only sporadically. Consider the following example: MS FEA I 2447, fo1. 22v (1.26.50-51):

'l' N~

[...] ':' n:JN~

Nnl17Nf" :n:J:JN1 N7' n;'7~N

nO'7 NnJN ,m n"J:Jb '7'i' 1'O!:)n

NnJN 7'i' ;1'7N' nhn np', 'P:J ~7N

NmnN ~'1n

:'"1'737 onn1 'P:J, 1'~6N

fi:JNl1~

,n 7'i' fi:JNl1~

MS FEA I 2437, fo1. 382r: n:JNm~

'l' N~

Nnn7Nn1 n:J:JN1 N7' n'7~N

nO'7 Ni1JN ,m n'J:~

,n 7'i' [...],:J n:JNM:J Ni1JN 7'i' 1'7N1 nhn np', 'P:J ~7N '"1'737 onn1 'P:J, 1'~6N

'7'i' 1'o!:)n NmnN ~'1n n:JN~

With the exception of MS FEA I 2447, none of the manuscripts employs any diacritic sign to mark Arabic #1 (i) and only exceptionally tiP (ii), liP (n) and tiP marbu!a (n). The use of diacritics to represent the rest of

the Arabic letters that do not exist in the Hebrew language follows the patterns of Arabicized Judaeo-Arabic orthography, i.e. fjiid,

~

.

for Arabic ?iP,

'J~

.

r /"1 for Arabic

for Arabic jfm, but their use is very irregular,

especially in the case ofl/~.

4.16. Hamza Hamza is rarely marked in the manuscripts. In most of the cases it is only

its support (waw, yodh or :>aleph) that is represented. The support of hamza might reflect in fact the lengthening of the preceding vowel rather

INTRODUCTION

lxxxiii

than the glottal stop, given its disappearence in the pronunciation of Neo-Arabic, which was no doubt the vernacular speech ofthe scribes. 97 The support letter of hamza is occasionally omitted in some manuscripts: MS FEA I 2447, fo1. 20v (Ll.3): Mn'~N

t'iN1i'?N

'NpSN NMN1i' NiN'

MS FEA I 2946, fo1. 3v: '1Ni"N. (Classical Arabic: al-qari)u) MS FEA I 2702, fo1. 19r and 2437, fo1. 392v; 4478, fo1. 93v; 2475, fo1. Iv (1.21.7): '~n1N

:JNl1:J'N

MS FEA I 2441, fo1. 27r:

T~

:j'N

USN m~l1

'i' M:J i"l.'11' N~'

m,'N. (Classical Arabic: al-juz)u)

Conversely, it is noteworthy that the scribes occasionally represented the sequence /tPa/ in word internal position with two )alephs, where Classical Arabic orthography has only one. This is seen in the spelling of the verb jiPa ('to come'). The spelling of the 3rd masculine singular form jiPa is

Ni (= : ~)

and the usual spelling of the 3rd feminine singular jiPat is nNi

(=

In some cases, however, the 3rd feminine singular is spelt with

6: ~).

two )alephs, e.g. nN~

(MS FEA I 4602, fol. 18v, 1.26.55),

nN'ib

(MS

FEA I 2441, fol. 46v, with the )alifmamduda sign).

4.17. >Alif maq~ur

and )alif mamduda

Another source of frequent orthographic variant readings is the interchange oPalif maq~ur

and >alif mamduda. 98

Numerous examples oPaliJ maq~ur

in the place oPalif mamduda are

found in the expression )a-la tara ('Do you not see?'), in which )a-la is often spelt with yodh rather than )aleph: 97

See Fischer and Jastrow (1987: 39) and, for the specific case of Judaeo-Arabic,

Blau (1980: 27-34). 98

See Blau (1980: 24-26).

lxxxiv

INTRODUCTION

MS FEA 12437, fo1. 282v (1.23.9): ••• 1N'~

IN'3.'1) 3.'~o/

i~o/

IN 'in *"N

*MSS FEA I 2702, fo1. 3v; 2405, fo1. 6r: N'N MS FEA I 2447, fo1. lr (1.3.1): ••• 11rN "'i' IN 'in *"N *MS FEA I 2946, fo1. 4v: N'N MS FEA I 2437,284v (1.23.12): ... C:ln IN 'in *"N. *MSS FEA I 2441, fo1. 93r; 2702, fo1. 5v; 2405, fo1. 4v: N'N.

Many examples of this exchange of letters are found

III

the verb

samma/yusamml ('to name'): MS FEA I 2437, fo1. 354r (1.12.1): CN':l'N 'I) jJ"::JO N,jJ N~ Ni::J:l' N'n:J~

" , 'Nn~

*N~C'

*MSS FEA I 2405, fo1. 28r; 2946, fol. 14v: '~O MS FEA I 4478, fo1. 82v (1.14.24): N"::J *'~C Pi::J:l

"'N CN':l'N jJi'~

IN C'3.'N'

iJ1'~:l

*MS FEA I 2788, fol. 2v: N~O'

Other examples: MS FEA I 2702, fo1. 21 v (1.21.15): "3.'n~N jJnjJ::JNl1m, *'1:l7n' N' N~

'3.'I)'N jJ"N "3.'n' C0i"N N,jJl)

p'

*MSS FEA I 2437, fo1. 364v; 2441, fo1. 29v: N'3.'n' MS FEA I 2437, fo1. 415v (1.7.2): ...p 'I) *NY~

N~

::Jon

*MSS FEA I 2441, fo1. 4v; 2946, fo1. 9v: ,~. MS FEA I 2437, fo1. 405v (1.13.10): *Ni'::l1'1 ,::J NI)'i3.'n ",::J ::Jon:ln N" i':lm'N 'I) NjJ'Nn "3.' *MSS FEA I 2441, fo1. 13r; 4478, fo1. 78r'i'::Jn

INTRODUCTION

lxxxv

We should include here also the occasional use of the letter yodh in a manuscript in the environment of a word final hamza where Classical Arabic has

~aleph.

This reflects the weakening of the hamza in

pronunciation and the use of an orthography corresponding to Arabic ~alif maq~r:

MS FEA I 2437, fo1. 384r: '1i' (Classical Arabic: qara'a) MS FEA I 2447, fo1. 20r (I.1.2): MS FEA I 2475, fo1. 9v:

'~"N:J

4.18. TiP marbata and ~alif

N~":J

(Classical Arabic: bi-l-dimiPi)

mamdada

There is a general vacillation with regard to the orthographic representation of the vowel a at the end of a word. This often results in the representation of Classical Arabic tiP marbata with ~aleph

rather than

the expected heh99 in certain manuscripts, as can be seen in the following examples: MSS FEA I 2437, fo1. 292vand 2475, fo1. 8r (I.22.32): IN iT~N'17 1:J17'N' 1~N'

1'"

1:JN'N' *:'Ti':lNUO NiT'17;,n

*MS FEA I 2441, fo1. 35v: Ni':J~ MS FEA I 2437, fo1. 359v (I.13.9): Nn'N iT:J~Nn

l)'lV 31 '!) *:'TY'Oi'O *MS FEA I 2441, fo1. Br: N~'i

99

See Blau (1980: 44-45).

"'N 1:J"N 1'~l

17ln

lxxxvi

INTRODUCTION

4.19. Declension The loss of cases, which is characteristic of Neo-Arabic, is reflected in medieval Judaeo-Arabic writings and Middle Arabic in general by the omission of accusative 'ali.tYJ and the replacement of the nominative by the oblique case in sound masculine plurals. 101 These two linguistic phenomena, especially the latter, are the origin of numerous variant readings in our manuscripts, as in the following examples: MSS FEA I 2441, fol. 34r and 2405, fol. lOv (1.22.28): *N'ON il~

,,,,,

c,

N'l.'N£l N" N'~l.nO

*MS FEA I 2437, fol. 290r:

'~N

MS FEA I 2702, fol. 21r and 2441, fol. 29r; 4478, fol. 69r; 2475, fol. 2v (1.21.14): IN:J~'

lN~T

*tNOOj? ,m i1'£l "l.'£~N

'£l '~£l

*MS FEA I 2437, fol. 363r p~o MS FEA I 2702, fol. 17v and 2441, fol. 25v; 4478, fol. 92r; 2475, 7r (1.21.1): Np'tm

N"l.'£~

*t"'MJ~N

jm~o'

N~

'Nn~

*MS FEA I 4478, fol. 92r: l,',m MS FEA I 2702, fol. 23v (1.22.44): *tN1'1Uj?J i1':JN' IN£l,n i1'~N

'~N

':J

*MS FEA I 2437, fol. 265v: pn"'pl

4.20. The use of prepositions One type of variant that is found across the manuscripts consists in the addition of a preposition or prepositional phrase or the substitution of one preposition by another. This no doubt arose since the presence or

100 101

See Blau (1980: 150-152). See Blau (1980: 107).

INTRODUCTION

lxxxvii

substitution of such phrases make no substantial difference to the sense of the sentence. The prepositions involved are generally min and ft. Some examples are as follows: MS FEA I 2437, fo1. 264v (L22.39): ... ,~

'iI~:1JO

3.':J~

~"n.

*Omitted in MSS FEA I 2441, fo1. 37r and 2702, Io!. 23r

*:1J0 ':J3."~

MS FEA I 2437, fo1. 264v (1.22.39): ... 'iI~

*Omitted in MSS FEA I 2441, fo1. 37r and 2702, fo1. 23r. MS FEA I 2475, fo1. 5r (L22.7): ••• iI~

*:1J0 "3.'D~

*Omitted in MSS FEA I 2437, fo1. 285r; 2441, fo1. 31v MS FEA I 2475, fo1. 6v (L22.26): ... *N:1JO ,~

"~

~,:>

~

0'"

*Omitted in MS FEA I 2437, fo!' 289v MS FEA 14478, fo1. 70v (L23.4): ~'3.D

*:1J0 iI')~n

~,

1':> "'~,

...~':Jino *Omitted in MS FEA I 2437, fo!' 279v MSS FEA I 2946, fo1. 2v and 2475, fo1. 9r (Ll.l.): i"'~

...1'i:J~

nn:JT1 *'£1 '~i"

~:>,

1~

~,

iI"i" ~

')3.~

*Omitted in MS FEA I 2447, fo1. 53v MS FEA I 4602, fo1. 10r (L26.24):

'~:Jino,

"l *10 n:Jn 'i' ~"n' '~:J

1~:>

~,

~"n MSS FEA I 2437, fo1. 372r; 2441, fo1. 68v; 4478, fo1. 3v: 'D

Other linguistic features that are typical of medieval Judaeo-Arabic and Middle Arabic in general are attested in al-Kitab al-Kaft. They exhibit, however, an overall uniformity in all the manuscripts and are no doubt to be attributed to the author's linguistic usages rather than the copyists' intervention.

lxxxviii

INTRODUCTION

4.21. Concluding remarks

In conclusion, a comparison of the manuscripts of al-Kitiib al-Kiifi indicates that the text was transmitted through the centuries with a high degree of accuracy and reliability. The minor changes that the copyists made to the text are mainly of an orthographic and linguistic nature. There is evidence of the introduction of minor textual additions in some manuscripts, but this occurs only in a few isolated cases. In general all manuscripts preserve the same textual tradition of the work. Furthermore, with only a few exceptions,I02 the linguistic register reflected in the different copies can be considered in general terms to be the linguistic register that the author originally used.

5.0. The edition and translation a/the text

Our aim in this edition has been to produce a text that is as clear and readable as possible but still remains close to the philological reality of the manuscripts. This has been achieved by the following method of editing. For each chapter of the work a single manuscript is chosen to act as the basis of the edition. This is a manuscript that contains the chapter in undamaged, consecutive folios. As far as possible, the text is presented in the edition exactly as it appears in this base manuscript, following its orthography and reproducing the diacritical marks and vocalization. The symbol used to represent the tetragrammaton is printed exactly as it appears in the manuscript, e.g. ,"." ':' or "'. Where scribes make corrections or additions to the text, these are incorporated into the edition. No indication is made, however, of deleted text. Similarly, when text is inserted as an afterthought in the margin, it has been included in the main text of the edition. 102

MS FEA I 2437 contains a higher degree of dialectal influence than the rest of the

copies and can be attributed to the copyist rather than the author.

INTRODUCTION

lxxxix

Collations are made with other manuscripts that preserve this section of the text. Where there is a difference in another manuscript, this is indicated in the critical apparatus. These differences include both textual and also orthographic variations. Some variations across the manuscripts, however, are not indicated in the apparatus. These include variations in diacritical marks and vocalization; variations in the use of two yodhs or waws to represent gemination (e.g.

,""n"

vs.

,""n");

the variation

between the use of Hebrew letters and the use of Arabic words to represent numerals (see §4.11.); and the variants in the representation of the tetragrammaton. If the reading in another manuscript is clearly superior to that of the base manuscript, the superior reading is adopted in the edited text and distinguished by enclosing it in angled brackets . Editorial judgements as to superiority in reading do not include cases where another manuscript has a linguistic construction that conforms more closely to the conventions of Classical Arabic than the one found in the base manuscript, so long as the construction in the base manuscript could be interpreted as exhibiting a difference only in linguistic register and is not the result of a scribal error. In a few isolated cases where the reading of the base manuscript makes little sense and no superior reading is available in other manuscripts, the editors have proposed an emended reading, enclosed in angled brackets, which is as close as possible in form to the reading in the manuscript. If small lacunae occur in the base manuscript and the text has been supplied from another manuscript, the supplied text is enclosed in square brackets [•••• ]. Where the complete chapter is not contained in one base manuscript, various base manuscripts are used for different sections of the chapter. As remarked, the diacritical marks of the base manuscript are reproduced in the edition. These include marks on letters, vocalization and signs indicating boundaries of sentences or larger units of text.

xc

INTRODUCTION In most cases diacritical dots on letters are inconsistently marked in

the manuscripts (see §4.1S.) and this inconsistent marking is reproduced in the edition. It was decided, however, to mark a dot consistently over the letters ~adhe

and !eth when they represent Arabic (/iid and 1(P even if

they do not have a diacritical dot in the manuscript. The purpose of this was to make the text more readable. Missing or inconsistently marked diacritics of other letters were judged not to reduce the readability of the text. Indeed, it cannot be excluded that the omission of diacritical marks on the letters daleth and taw representing Arabic giil andliiJ may, in some cases, be a reflection of the pronunciation of these consonants by the scribe as stops rather than fricatives due to the interference of his vernacular dialect. Hebrew Biblical quotations and isolated Hebrew words are distinguished by printing them in bold. Hebrew technical terms, however, are not distinguished from the rest of the text in this way. Hebrew words and Biblical quotations are vocalized in some manuscripts. Ifvocalization appears in the base manuscript, this is reproduced in the edition exactly as it is written by the scribe. The vocalization always consists of Tiberian signs, but in many cases. it deviates from the standard Tiberian Masoretic vocalization. The standard Tiberian vocalization of the Hebrew words is given in the translation on the page facing the edited text. The text of the edition has been divided into numbered paragraphs, which correspond to sense units. In some cases these paragraph divisions are also marked in the base manuscript by various means, such as a blank space or a special symbol. In numerous cases, however, they are not marked in the manuscript. It was decided that the imposition of a system of paragraph division produced a text that was far more readable and also would facilitate reference to specific passages. The numbers of the paragraphs consist of three elements: A roman numeral I or II indicating Part One or Part Two of the work, an Arabic numeral indicating the chapter number and a further Arabic numeral indicating the paragraph number, e.g. 11.14.3 (Part Two, chapter 14, paragraph 3).

INTRODUCTION

XCI

The page divisions of the base manuscript are not shown in the edited text but are marked in the apparatus, in which the classmark of the base manuscript is preceded by a star symbol *, e.g. *FEA 12437, fol. 134r. Some further symbols are used as abbreviations in the apparatus. These include> to denote that a word or phrase is 'omitted in' one or more manuscripts, e.g. ":)1~'

1~

~i1n

> FEA I 4602, fol. 84v,

1~ ~i1n is omitted in which indicates that the phrase ":I~' manuscript FEA I 4602, fol. 8Ir. The symbol + is used to denote that a word or phrase is added in one or more manuscripts, e.g. FEA I 4602, fol. 88r + "~,

which shows that in manuscript FEA I 4602, fol. 88r there is

the additional word "~. The English translation is intended to be read either in conjunction with the original text or independently of it. An attempt has been made to convey to the reader as clearly as possible the sense of the author. The translation is not, therefore, a slavishly literal rendering of the text, since this would often remain obscure for the English reader on account of the predilection of>AM al-Faraj for complex syntax. Biblical quotations are reproduced in the original Hebrew, with standard Masoretic vocalization, as remarked above. They have not been translated into English if an Arabic translation is not offered by the author himself, since there can be no certainty that an English version of the verses corresponds exactly to the way in which 'AM al-Faraj was understanding them. Where he gives an Arabic translation, this indeed often differs from the usual English versions of the text. Annotations are made to the English translation. Some offer further clarification of the argumentation of the author, when this is judged to be necessary. Others draw attention to parallels with the early Karaite grammatical tradition that has been described in Khan (2000a and 2000b) or offer various other kinds of supplementary information. A detailed commentary on the grammatical theory of 'AM al-Faraj and its background is not offered in these annotations, since this will be provided in a separate volume.

TEXT AND TRANSLATION

AL-KITAB AL-KAFl Fl AL-LUGA AL-cIBRANIYYA

BY

)ABU AL-FARAJ HARDN IBN AL-FARAJ

PART I

CHAPTER HEADINGS 1.

On the purpose of the study of grammar and the ways of the Hebrew language

2.

On the components of speech

3.

On the definitions that distinguish the aforementioned components

4.

On the distinctive features of the categories mentioned above

5.

On which of the three parts of speech each linguistic form may be appropriately used to express

6.

On the combination of the three parts of speech into a meaningful utterance

7.

On items from among the three parts of speech that undergo a change in vowels and those that do not

8.

On the function of particles and the nature of their effect on meaning, including a discussion of those whose usage is restricted to specific items and those that are used with all items

9.

On the general category of nouns

10.

On the dual and the plural

11.

On the sound plural and the broken plural

12.

On the initial item and its predicate

13.

On definite and indefinite

a" aOQl.! N4NOQN Q~4N

'6

a" N4UUt"l.! LN4~Q£\

'01

a N4~Q

'Il

a" N4NOC N4QCUlN LC:Cl.l.!

'ZI

a" loU'lcuon.al.! LN4tc:l.l.!

'£1

N40N4c LN4~Q

N4QC:Ol.

LQN "mul.L a" l4L

N4C:4NC LQN 4N "~l. a"QN ,~l.A a"l.!

•L

a" NUC:NC N4Ul.L~

'8

LQN~£\

U'C""l.

UNU"l.l.!N LQN "c:uA Qtl.!N

N4Ul.C:NU

Ql

'C

NaONC

Qa"lN

a" NaONC N4C:4NC

•Z

a" N4UlLl N4QQ ",,!l.! 4l4L

+£

a" lC:l. N4~QU

•.,.

a"QN UA4U 4l.! C:4 4aSl.! Ql U4Ul.! NaONC N4C:4NC

.~

a"QN "UN4~

'9

Ql U4NU NaONC N4C:4NC L"C:Ll C:4NQN

N4QC:UAl.! a" l4L

N4~Cl.t"!

'1

a"

QN

N4~l.

C~4

N4lalLa

LCll.a

N4~l.!

SDNIGV3H "}I3ldVH:J

8

CHAPTER HEADINGS

14.

On appositives of nouns

15.

On the verb and its true definition

16.

On the agent

17.

On a noun that resembles a noun of agent in form

18.

On an attribute that resembles a noun of agent

19.

On a patient whose agent is not specified

20.

On the verb, the agent and the patient

21.

On the categories ofmaFut (verbal complement)

22.

On the categories of nouns of agent and nouns of patient and the verbs derived from them, and also the symbols that have been established for them, namely N~iJ, '~ etc.

23.

On the conditions that must be observed when the patterns of words are formed on the basis of those of others

24.

On the letters of the alphabet

25.

On the three letters that are used exclusively with nouns, namely those that together form the mnemonic word ,::>:1

26.

On the four letters that are used specifically with verbs, namely those that together form the mnemonic word In'N

27.

On the four letters that are used with both nouns and verbs, namely those that together form the mnemonic word i1'tV~,

28.

On the eleven non-functional letters, which together form the mnemonic words n~ 1" p17i 10£)'O

+8Z

'CL. Ji:U a" N'i~

Ul.~

N'i'C"l. ~aN'iL!

N'iU" l.t:NClL!N ClaOl. !~a

aN l.t:NClL! la alL! +

LZ

a" N'il.t:~L!

N'iUl.~

N'iaalul.L a"L!N N'iNOC IN'ia~

l. t:NClL! N"ul +9Z

a"

N'il.t:~L!

N'iUl.~

l. t:NClL! SSC; a" N'iU'iUL!

+~Z +vZ;

G" NUL.~

NUl.~

N'iaC:UJi:L!

t:N'ia~

N'iaaC:UJi:L!

N'i~

t:N'iNoaN

lL!"

lL!"

aN

aN

t:N

t:~J. +£Z

a" N'iall.lCl N'ial.~L! N'i~aU

a" NUNl N'ia~

lL!" weN

tE"

N'iaNC:lL.L! IN'ia~

a" N'iNOC N'iaalt:L! t:NOC N'ia~

+Ll

a" N'iJi:aL! N'iaal t:L!L! t:NOC N'ia~

+81

N'iL." 'iC "OC aN~'iL!

a" N'ia~l

+61

IN'ia~l

a" N'ia~

+OZ

a" NaONC N'ia~l

+1 Z

a"

+Z;Z

NaONC

L.C:l.

IN'ia~

lUa"aUL!

a" N'ia~ +~1

t:~L!N

~'i"

lUaNaL!N aCL!N

a" N'ia~

+91

N'iNoaN

UlNt:~

a"

+Pl 6

laN

l~

'iL!N

N'ia~"l

No.aN

al

IN'ia~l,

a" N'ia~

SDNIGVffiI ~tlLdVHJ

PREFACE Prefatory remarks of the author. Teach me, 0 Lord, the way of thy statutes and I will keep it to the end (Psa. 119:33). Incline not my heart to any evil, to busy myself with wicked deeds in company with men who work iniquity; and let me not eat of their dainties (Psa. 141 :4). And take not the word of truth utterly out of my mouth,for my hope is in thy ordinances (Psa. 119:43). Since The Comprehensive Book of Principles and Rules in the Hebrew Language is so extensive and expansive in scope that a considerable amount of time is required to digest it fully, I have decided to compose a short version of the book. The reader may use this short version without being deprived of any examples in Hebrew and Arabic that are necessary to illustrate an idea or to clarify the purpose of some issue or to distinguish what is correct from what is erroneous and unacceptable. In fact, a number of rare grammatical forms are adduced here that are not contained in The Comprehensive Book. With God's help, therefore, this short version will be self-sufficient in this discipline and will not omit any of its principles. Although previous masters of this discipline have made thorough investigations of the field that comprehend various categories and topics, I have the purpose of embarking upon the same task in conformity with the wish of one who has a right to be shown honour, may God protect him. I shall undertake it according to the best of my ability, although conscious of my shortcomings and request from Him, the Majestic and Exalted One, concerning this and other matters, success and protection from error. He has the power and kindness to answer my prayer.

PREFACE

['~

'!l" '!l' [~.n '!l' l'N "V~

'N] [!l]i'V rrJ['Y]N' 1[']i'" 1" ", 'J"rr C'rJ'N .n[N] VrJ[']!l .n,"'V ",v.nrr' V' 'V .nr.JN '!l' '~r.J 'y.n 'N' c[rr'r.J]VJr.J!l C"'N '.n'"' 1'~rJ.

'N~]

7':!lN7N '737

7~mznN

'737

37NonN7N'

~'):!ln

n'N1

o~n

N~

TN~7

il7n~N

T~

i1)N

i1:I,77N

7'7P7N

il7'Nm~

1':1"

')37~N

37N~'

il£)7n:>~ il~'T37N

ilP£)N'~

:1on il~'1pn

3[NO~n]7

~70

:1'nN1n il1il

N~

T~

07

1':!lP[7N:1 ~N1n37]

il~:!37N'

'737

2

il'£) '£)

ilpn N~P

37~

N~7:>1

Tonno' 1::>N

N'W mN

i1)'N:n~

N)Ni11 'l:1)' T~

il:1;'1

il:1 fu')N il'737 11P]N

p'£),n7N il1'l '£)' il'£) T37' 7l i1)~

1. *FEA I 2946, fo1. Iv. 112. FEA II 281, fo1. 10r. FEA I 2946, 2r i1?~m. 11

T~

1N'W 1:!ln>~7N

il£)~7:1

fo1. 2r begins here.

iln'n:!l

TN::> TN' il7':!lN T~

1)37 171 '£) il77N

,i11 77T7N T~

T~

':11377N'

il:1 0:1n7' N~

01N37 1'l TNW7N N1il '£) N'£)N::> '7N37n ilm'37~:1 1p 07377N N1il 1'NW~

1:!ln>~

'n7N

Ni1)~n'

:1 Nn::>7N

[1]n

il'7N il;'Nn7N

Nil37~

1N1'N' il'737 f1n37"

7~nWN

N7

:11p' 171 '£)

n~'

0737N

'£) 7':!l£)7N' '£)'

1::>1:1 il7':10 N1il N~'£)

mo' ilN037 N~ ';"7

N~7

TN::>

il')N1:1377N

ilN7::>N 1'l T~ f1l7N

N1il

T~

n1w7N

il:1N37'nON:1

')N1:1377N T~

T'~n"

:1N[n::>]77

il:1N;'N7N '7' FEA I 2946,

3. Lacunae restored on the basis ofFEA II 281, fo1. lOr.

PART I: CHAPTER 1 ON THE PURPOSE OF THE STUDY OF GRAMMAR AND THE WAYS OF THE HEBREW LANGUAGE 1.1.1. The purpose of this discipline is multifaceted. One purpose is to act

as an aid to learn the commandments and know their correct meaning in the case of those for which erroneous interpretations have been offered.

i11i1;

Take, for example, the verse ~":p :J~"i Ci~J hNtrtJ "T:l7 1)~

7~:P

1'.¥o/~

~?

hlil; m~ ~?1)

~'n

~lR:P

~r;t,n

(Deut. 12:21). One scholar has

claimed that the act of commanding

(~?1)

'W~

(1P'W) relates to the

rather than to the act of slaughtering (~r;t,n).

act of eating

It is preferable,

however, to interpret it as relating to the act of slaughtering on account of the fact that ~7

is conjoined to it. If it were disjoined from it, as he has

claimed, it would have the form 1?-~"'P7

17· Compare ~,7.

't:1r;tJtp !j7tp N7t1

(Num. 22:37), which is disjoined from the words that follow it

',7~ J;l:>n~7 il~J7, and 'r;~1 !)?~1 ~? 1i?~ (Exod. 34: 15), which is conjoined, as is shown by the words following it rl7:>~' '-T

'n:l1~,

I

:

••

1

:

-

IT

:

and similar examples.

1.1.2. A second purpose of the discipline is to act as an aid to distinguish among the various interpretations that are given for individual words those that are correct from those that are incorrect. This is illustrated by

C,:;>'7.~

C~'J.¥ 'l}1?~

l1J~r

'l}?~

C'~iJ

(Josh. 5 :9), in which the word

has been erroneously interpreted as having the sense of 'I have uncovered', it being construed as analogous to

n t 1 ilPl7J '?¥i? 7J~

(Psa. 119:22). The correct interpretation is 'I have rolled', from 'j~-

C'~iJ

(1 Sam. 14:33). If it meant 'I have uncovered', it would be 'l}?~ like '~!-1

,~

'7:P 7W~-T

'l}J~

1'.7~

'? "?i?

(Jer. 11 :20). Another case is ~;i-mJ

1'.~

(2 Sam. 9:4), which has been

erroneously interpreted by somebody as 'without anything', i.e. without anything that he can bring back for his own benefit. His error arises due to considerations of linguistic structure and also of meaning. There are two issues with regard to linguistic structure. The first is the fact that '7:P 1 The point seems to be that the coreferentiality of the subject of the verb and the pronoun in the prepositional phrase '17 demonstrates the conjunction in meaning

between '17 and what follows it.

Part I: Chapter 1

i"'~

T~

~,

'1t, '" T.MJ '~N ~7

il7':~

7~i

iln':JT7~

17

"l

'7~

'i, T~:l7

i"'~

il" '7~ C37T ~:l

17 N"i't, 1,t,N ,J:1~

'il '17~

.Mt,~N'

m.7~

"0

'1t, N'i" il7'i' 7~' ,t,N .M~t,:1 ,n::nc .Mt,~N' il137:J 'P:l 7~ib '7~

~

0":1

n'~

fi~'37

,m 17;'

~il'O ,~

T~

i1:J~

iln':JT7~ N7~:Jb

T~

';7~

il1n~'7

'~N

'7~ T~:l

J:it,~

'7'

N"t,:1 il7'i'

Nt, :1Ct, il137:J il7'i' 'il '17~ ~;il

6,n:lT1~

17; ~7:'

"i, ~il':Jm

fit,~7

90~'t,VC

~7

':J37~

21'.M',Y

'737 il:J i1:J~37O

il7~:J

~7l

~:l'

T~:l'

',i~7 7~:ln'

,:l; T~

1JNYC' 1'i':lC .Mn:lt, 17~i' 3"~7 Cil~37:J " '17~ '7~

il:J '17 7~i 5'7~ ',ii 4'7~

T~

~

il"i"

15

1.1.2.

,~

8,'0~i7

T~

O',YC .M!),n .MN '~it,

t'!l' :1!),n t,V~ t,~ ,i~' ~il, i~'(1):l i~'(1):l ~il,'o T~:l '7' 0":1 ~, ~tyl ~T iii,n1 ~il,'o N':1 :1J:1 ,m, '!l'"'1 .MN ,~; 1,t,N ,~ 7n~ ,~; i:J~l7 ':J37 ''(1) ~7:J li,6~ T~ ~7l '17~ 1O,t~ t,N'CV T:l ";:'C .M':l il~7

n'~7

T~:l'

T'ill' ~T cmii ~:l

il7~n

n~7

il7~

'737' ,~

T~:l

ilO~:J

'737 il:J 1'37'

':J37~

il7~

i"'~

'7 ili'n T~:l' '~:J

FEA I 2475, [01. 9r + ;ni'. 116. 'n:lT7~

12~il

,t,:l 'i~

1. FEA I 2946, [01. 2v. FEA I 2475, [01. 9r + ,~. 3. FEA I 2946, [01. 2v ",~r.

T~

~7:J

''(1)

il:J ,~

~il1n

11 2. FEA I 2946, [01. 2v + 'nr,:J~.

11

11 4. FEA I 2946, [01. 2v. FEA I 2475, [01. 9r ~r,.

11 5.

nr,:J~'

> FEA 12946, [01. 2v. 11 7. FEA I 2946,

[01. 2v':Jn'. 118. FEA I 2946, [01. 2v. FEA I 2475, [01. 9r 1'o~n.

119. > FEA I 2946,

[01. 2v. 1110. FEA I 2946, [01. 3r + 1::1'. 1111. *FEA I 2447, [01. 20r. 1112. > FEA I

2946, [01. 2v.

Part I: Chapter 1

16

occurs with waw. If the word were what it has been claimed to be, it should have >aleph, like

"D?? Ni?=?' ~9.-Ni'f

(Isa. 55:1). The

second is that, if it were what it has been claimed to be, it would have

N'f

N??

been ,~ 1 with qame~ (on the daleth), like '"~ 1 C'D~o/iJ (Amos 6:13). (The evidence for the error) from the point of view of

"?'??

meaning is the fact that it says after it 'W~-P

'~1

i?~

i'.

n'.~

'nl]i?~1

(2 Sam. 9:5), which indicates that the word is the name of a

place, with the form '~1

To this has been added the letters beth and

nJ??W1

mem in the way illustrated above. Another case is nl?i~

C'P.l=?

(Isa. 9:4), which has been erroneously interpreted as meaning

'and attire stained with blood'. If this were so, it would have been n'Ni"~

with >a/eph, as in the well-known cases of this lexical item, such

TT:

as ct~

'?~1

(Isa. 59:3), ~N?

n?f~

C!;l1~

'~"?

C02

(Mal.

1:7), N,ii 't'''?? 'tT~ T!J?~ C~1?t9 (Mal. 1: 12), ']5~J;l:-N7 'W~ 17.PiJ ",~ -n~f (Dan. 1:8), and similar examples. It is more accurate to render it 'rolled up' or 'rolled together' from Cj~ (2 Sam. 20:12) and '~$

"~1

',7."J;l~

NW?~l

(Isa. 34:4). To these could be added

many similar examples in the interpretation of which the grammarians have been prevented from falling into the error of others. 1.1.3. A third purpose of the discipline is to act as an aid to the knowledge

of correct reading in many places where errors have been made in this •

•

Q.

respect. An example of thIS IS C:·W~-r1.

'i1~J

,:b~ ~adhe

the ~adhe.

C'~fiJ

with the

is in error, since it is not a feminine imperative like

C'tP~D

'~i;l

(Josh. 2:3), in which the accent falls on

Rather, it is an infinitive with a first person pronominal suffix,

and so the accent is on the >aleph, as in rl~

n~.

C'?f

' "

(Jer. 11:4). Anybody who reads the word '~in

accent on the

1:?t'

CD'N-~ry

nJi37 'J.=?1-~

C:J~

ClliN

Ci:f '~in

(Jer. 7:22). Another case is '~=?W

'~.:J,

Part I: Chapter 1

"n~

N~'P

N'?!:l' ~O N'?!:l '!:l' N'?!:l ;'l~

t;,m~

~t;,l'J

')' 11'\ t;,'1'\pt;,1'\ 1'\';' ,t;,,:J 11'\:J ,t;, '):J:J' 11'\:J ':J1'\nt;,1'\' P'1~ 1~' '!:l' N'?'? c'n~tr t;,Tl~

'37:J 1~ ;,t;"p ,;, ':J37~t;,1\ l':J 137 ,t;,'1 1'\:J:J1'\£) '!:l' ,?~ 0'~t;,1\ 1'\:Jt;,1'\ 1'\;"t;,37 :J51£)

~t;,)

'?N~V

r!:l

T

-rnt;,1'\ 't;,37 ;,b, 1'\;,10£) 1~

1'\~,t;:J

;,mt~

t;,n~

Nt~V'

1~

;'1'0£)ii '£) ~t;,)

1'\~

;'l'1~

n'~

1'Tl:J 1~

;i£)137~

CnN '~Yr

3r'?Nl~

'1'\ ;,l 1n'~ 1'\;'1'0£)ii ,t;,'1'\t;,1'\£) ,t;,'1 1') ,t;,1'\ s,!)O~ ,'?lJ' C'!:l i1:J~

;'1'\1Pt;,1'\

~t;,1'\:J

1U'?Nl r~!:l Cn'~N '?Nl~ cn'? l!:ln!)!:l '?Nln' N'? ,ttN N,rr '?NU~ 1'?~r

'?ln~

,rrni'"

m:J' 1':J~t;,\

'P:J ;,)t;,t;,1'\ ;,,;, 1';tZ)~

C'!:l ,'?NUJ ,!, rn'?tt 4C~'N!:l

n'!:l~

001'\ ;,6£)t;,t;,1'\

:

TT:

,~

,m 37~h

'!:l' i'?

"t;,1'\ C'~!:l r'?il~ r'?~t 2p:Jii ii:J1'\:Jt;, ,t;,'1:J 11'\:J ,t;"

,t;,'1 t;,1'\Tl~

17

l'37:J~

p"p,t;,1'\ t;,;,1'\'

6,t;,37 ;,:J i1:J1'\37TlO1'\t;,1'\

1'\;,Tlt;,1'\m

C"!:l

m:J ,t;,'1' 1'\;,~t) 1~ 7~1'\t;,3 t;,37i:J 'N'Y,rr 71'\1P' 1~ 11'\£) '?t,:m ,~C 'N'Y,rr t;,Tl~ l5,~t;T N1~'\ 90,t;, '11'\ ~t;,)' ,1'\~t;8

1~

1.1.3.

1'Tl:J '£)

C"YC r'NC iinii 1nt;,t;,1'\

';, t;,:J 10'\,~t; iinTl 1nt;,t;,1'\ P:J'£) 1''?N C'N!:lrr c'tt JNrr Tlnii 1nt;,t;,1'\ p:J ,t;,'1t;, '):J:J'£) o,:Jiibt;,1'\ 001'\ ;"£) 1'~

rr'?w "!:l' '?V 1. FEA I 2475, fo1. 9v ,~7N:J.

C"Y~

CnN

11

2475, fo1. 9v ,~7N. Cl11N.

11

5. FEA I 2475, fo1. 9v + C'~1Zm.

7. FEA I 2946, fo1. 3v NilN[1P'].

t;,Tl~

~t;,1'\

11

11 6. *FEA I

8. FEA I 2946, fo1. 3v. FEA I

11 9. FEA I 2946, fo1. 3v. FEA I 2475, fo1. 9v 110'7.1110. FEA I

2946, fo1. 3v. FEA I 2475, fo1. 9v ,~7N. 9v + r1N~

C"!:l

11 2. > FEA I 2946, fo1. 3r. 11 3. FEA I 2946, fo1. 3r

il7Nm. 11 4. > FEA I 2475, fo1. 9v. 2447, fo1. 20v.

l1'~Yr

1111. FEA I 2946, fo1. 3v. FEA I 2475, fo1.

18 i~

Part I: Chapter 1 (Gen. 19:34). Anybody who puts the accent at the end of the word

,~

in this verse is in error. If this were the case, the form would be an infinitive with suffixed yodh representing the first person pronoun, as in

0:?1;12$ 'T:n;ti?il 'l,~

-,~

(2 Kings 18:32). The base of this, without the

pronoun, is the infinitive ~,

which has the same form as the imperative.

If the reader reads it correctly and places the accent at the beginning of the word, in accordance with its sense, it has the form of the feminine imperative, like 'f.1in~

i1~f

7r.rl ifl~

h~iJl(Gen.

'~

'~1tP

'~i

(2 Sam. 13:11). The case of

29:6), in which the form i1~f

is a noun on

account of the fact that the accent falls under the Ja/eph, in contrast to

iJ'~t\7

'W~

T~iJ-O

i1t\* I 7lJ11 (Gen. 29:9), in which the form is

a past verb, since the accent falls on the beth, can lead to confusion, in the same way as has just been remarked concerning '~i:l.

Similar confusion

may arise whereby a word may belong to different lexical classes according to whether the stress is in non-final or final position. Consider ~1!'

fr. T -

~:ltz.;

...

T

(Gen. 34:29), which comes from the lexical class of

'capturing', on account of the fact that the accent falls on the beth. If it fell on the sin, it would not be interpreted .as belonging to this lexical class, but rather to the lexical class of 'returning', as in r".li~-7 O~i:J

~:J

tp

(Jer. 11: 10). There are many other cases in which the change in

the position of the accent has the effect of changing the meaning and the lexical class to which a word belongs. This shortened version, however, cannot adduce a large number of examples of this phenomenon. The allusion to a few cases will lay the path to the discovery of many others.

Part I: Chapter 1

19

1,m,

"D Tn"N '1';''' 2T~ ~'" ""N '~V '~fU 'N?' n~t' '~:l il"D ~, iilN:J' "i:J Nil'Nn TN:J ", 'N~ ':IN T~ Nil'~ O~N '~ni" '~ 3,n~ N"'N ,m cS:Jnb'N 4'NV'N NilN'V NiN' '~N 'n~:J ,~ N~ '~:lN T" il"'l.' "il N~ "'1' Nil"N "D Tn"N '1.'l:J iln"~'N ilN'V'N "D CN':>'N' '~nN '~V '~fU 'N~ 'n~ n5,~ N'~ iilN:> I:]'N'N nnn Tn"N T':>' CON 'il ""N rt!~ ;~ 'P1 rt~, ";'~, ,:Jl.' 'il ""N rt'~N 'fUN TNYtr Ol! rt~ 'Jj1' I:]N':J:J "D civii N~ in "'1' ilN:JiitvN'N "D "';''' N:J'N "'1' Tn"N TN:J "';~N Niil "';''' N~"D N:ll"N ilN:JiitvN'N '~n" 'N~ il,5Nii, Tn"N c'vii:J "':>N il", "'N il'" T~ il~D"N ;":Jii T':J' ":JO'N il", T~ 'il ""N 't~" '~fU sil"v "'N ",ii "'N ':J Nil~ 7'OD" C, T"tv'N iinii 6nlN:> ", N:J'N iinii Tn"N T~ "'N O~'N ~'V 'V '~fU 'n~ l.";"'N il", T~ 8N '''ii:>'N ilD'.~ "'N ":JO'N ;'ill' "O"N "N N~'7 Nil~

'v'

"i , , ,

1. > FEA I 2946, fol. 3v. 11 2. FEA I 2475, fol. 9v ",~

O~)'.

3v. FEA I 2475, fol. 9v + '31. 11 4. FEA I 2946, fol. 3v "~i. fol.1r. 116. FEA I 2946, fol. 4r 1~:J. fol. Ir.

11 3. FEA I 2946, fol. 11

5. "'FEA I 2447,

117. FEA I 2946, fol. 4r 'O!ln. 11 8. > FEA I 2447,

PART I: CHAPTER 2 ON THE COMPONENTS OF SPEECH 1.2.1. Natural speech consists of three components, viz. noun, verb and

particle. The latter is referred to by the earlier grammarians as a 'servile' element. A noun is a word that can act as an active or passive participle or a word to which a particle is attached, such as tz)'~,

O~

and 1~

etc. A

verb is a word that expresses time, either past or future, such as illv37 iltp~,

?~ such as n~,

-

'i?o/ ?~N\

?~,

?~,

T~,

T

,~o/

T

'~,

and the like. Particles are elements C~

and the like. Each of these three

categories of components has a definition by which it is distinguished from the others.

PART I: CHAPTER 2

~im

'7~E?

~73tl

'co~

c~op

l':J' T~ i1~:J'!V

~!;,

17'P:J 7:JPI10~ '~in7 1~

'i~7

i111711 7~310

T~i

~

O~01

'CO~7tl

~1:J

~,

,~

171 '~6),i ~1i 'ii' ~, i1:J T'~I1 sin

ip:J

t~,

C~7:J

~in

1.2.1.

l"P'17~

2i1'~O ,~

i1'737 7:J1

l~T

137 3':J)~

~

N7'3tl~

,~

'73tl~

171

,'Or&." ,Or&,t S::lN' S::lN rfr&,tl1' rfr&,tl1

C~, 7C~OP

,~

5r~'

Srn 4,rn S~1

6i17~

i11i1

1~

~

17'P:J cop 7:J7' i:J~7

1. *FEA I 2946, [01. 4r 112. FEA 12447, [01. Ir ;m~o'.

114. FEA I 2447, [01. Ir 7tt' ,~.

113. FEA I 2447, [01. Ir N:JJN.

11 5. > FEA I 2447. 11 6. FEA I 2447, [01. Ir l17n7N.

117. *FEA I 2946, [01. 4v. 11 8. FEA I 2447, [01. Ir N,n.

PART I: CHAPTER 3 ON THE DEFINITIONS THAT DISTINGUISH THE AFOREMENTIONED COMPONENTS 1.3.1. The definition of a noun is something expressing with reference to

itself a specific meaning that is not contingent on time. Surely you see that each of the words 'tV~

and O~

expresses a meaning that is not

expressed by the other one. It is the form by which these two are distinguished. This does not include any expression of time, neither past nor future, as is found in a verb. I have included in the definition the phrase 'with reference to itself since, if I had not done so, it would entail also particles, since they also express a specific meaning that is not contingent on time, but do so with reference to something else and not to themselves. 1.3.2. The definition of a verb is something that expresses a specific

meaning in time, either past or future, for example ,~ ,;~tp:.

Each of the forms ,~

and ,~o/

,~\

expresses a different meaning

and refer specifically to the category of past time. The forms ,~. ';~tp:,

,~o/'

and

on the other hand, although expressing the same difference of

meaning, refer specifically to future time. The same forms are sometimes used to refer to present time rather than future time. This is shown by the

PART I: CHAPTER 3

i'" r'~:> 7:> i~£)

'717 2 ilO£)J '£) 7i ~ 'il 0~7 ip 0'0, r&I'N 17'P 1~ 4'iii 3'7~ '17~ il'~7 ,m i:>~7 ili£)' 07 'J17~ ~7' N'~ ~7 17; '£) 1~T7 ~n ~7' '£) in7~ '£) iiiT ~), 71£)~ '£) s~n il7 '1~ m~7 ~in7 il'£) 7:>i7 6~ 07 '7 'J~ 7~ ili'" '£) i'£)' A):>7 l~T:J l~b 70'7 'J17~

~6

'J17~

l~T:J

8r'~:>

';~tfJ,

'J17~

'~Tf"

i ,,, 'J17~ 17'P'

in~'

'~7:J

~ib

1~T7

"ip i':>~7 1':>' ~

1~

il~n

1~

'in ~7

o~p

'J17~

1~

1O~il,:J

in~'

~il'£)

~pi£)

~:>

N7::Jpiiob l1'n 1~ ilO£)J '717 7i' ~, ilO£)J '£)

im

l'i m~

,~

S;l~

1"P~

i:>~'

17~ i~n7

1.3.2.

~6, fi~£)

"~r&I'

'i' "ip' ':Jpio~,

7:Jpio'~

V~i

~m

~i:>'

~il£)

1.3.1.

l~T:J

'717 7i ~ 'il 71£)~ S;l~ 17'P:> 7:Jpio'~ 7:> i~ ip '~Tf"

S;lN" ~m

9

in

S~N'

1~T7

l~T':J

o~p

1. *FEA I 2447, fo1. lr 1 FEA I 2946, fo1. 4v n7Nn7N :IN:J7N. 112. iTO!:)) '!:) > FEA I

2946, fo1. Sr. 113. FEA I 2946, fo1. 4v N7N.1I4. *FEA I 2447, fo1. Iv. 115. FEA I 2946, fo1. 4v N~n.1I6 4v 1').

FEA 12946, fo1. 4v. FEA I 2447, fo1. Iv iT1~').I7 11

8. FEA I 2946, fo1. 4v

2946, fo1. 4v NiT7nIJ:J.

rn~IJ.

FEA I 2946, fo1.

11 9. FEA I 2946, fo1. 4v + NIJ. 11 10. FEA I

24

Part I: Chapter 3

fact that, if somebody were to say P'Nl i1tp~-?

when asking you

about the situation existing in the present time, it would be appropriate for you to reply to him with the word ?~N'

with the sense of 'Right now

he is eating'. Likewise you say?:;;>N' when you wish to refer to the future. The two forms, therefore, are identical and can only be distinguished by what is linked to them in the context. For the present time this is the word i1~

and for the future the word '1J7? The imperative is closest in sense

to a verb with future time reference, for when an order is given to some other person, as in 1~r;t?

hlJ??Wf ?~

17. (Ecc. 9:7), this is intended to

refer to future time rather than the present. So, the categories of verbs with regard to meaning amount to four, but they amount only to three in form, these being ?:;>~,

?:;;>N' and ?j~.

1.3.3. The definition of a particle is what expresses a meaning with reference to something else, for example 1;'~¥ (Josh. 13:3), in which the word T~

?'~

,~

... ';n~iJ-T

expresses with reference to ';n~iJ,

to which it is attached, the fact that it is the beginning of the span of distance in question. The word

T;'~¥

?'~

,~

likewise, expresses with reference to

that it is its end. There are, in addition, numerous other

senses expressed by particles that are combined with words. 1.3.4. Just as each of the three categories of speech has a definition by which it is distinguished from the others, likewise each one has a distinctive feature that is particular to it.

Part I: Chapter 3

r~v'

iN:J ;"£> ibN ',7N iN~T7 i~ 17NO '7 7'No iN7N ;,:J ')~i t,~-' 7,pii iN:J ;'ii:JNiN 1)~ ion7 7:1,t-t, ,p£> 7N:JpiioN7N ;,:J ')~m t,~-' 7'P11 N~:J 7:JN' N";, iN~T7 rrnv ,m m'1p7N:J NT";~i 17'P7N ,£> N"NOii i~ 47N:Jpio~ ,;,£> 1~N7' 37:Jpiiob77 2,n~ 1~Nn7 t,,:;,t-t ,t, ;'7'P:J ;'1'''7 1~N7 'iN7 ;':J'tVN 7~£>N ONOPN iN~T7 i~ 'iiN' 5N6~ 17i m~ 'N1N ,p ,~nt rn~:1 ''IN ~i 1ii ')~7N ,£> 7~£>N ONOPN i1N~£> m~ 1~n N~ i" 1;:,~ t,~-' t,~ ';' ;'11711 ''IN P~)7N '£>, ;,~:J1N 'n~r

r~

25

ln~p

;"7~

7~

17'P:J ;'1'" ,£> 6'N£>N ~N N;'7,:J,:J "n'~r ,£> ii'N£>N ~7

t,':1l ,£> ii'N£>N ~'1n7N

"N'£> i~

'V'

'1:Ji~7N; 17i "0 N~

,;, ~1n7N -rm 1.3.3. ',7N 7"i'V t,,:U 7,V

i£>No~7

ii'N" N,ii:JN m':J ''IN N;,ii'Nm m':J 7"i'V ~N£>7:J

N,n ;'117117N ON7:J7N ONOPN i~ OOp 7:J7 'iN N~:J' ;,:J rii:Jii i~N7 ;'7 17i:J 1:JN7N i~

;')1ip~7N 1.3.4.

;,:J T';~i

1. FEA I 2946, fo1. 5r 6£l??N. 11 2. *FEA I 2447, fo1. 2r. 11 3. Ni'il TN?N il:J ')37n

?N:JpiiON?N il:J ')37ii, ?:IN' ?,pii

N~:I

?:IN' is repeated by mistake in FEA I

2447, fo1. 2r. > FEA I 2946, fo1. 5r. 114. FEA I 2946, fo1. 5r ?:JpnO~N. 2946, fo1. Sr N~'£l.

116. FEA I 2946, fo1. Sr + ')37~.

11 5. FEA I

117. FEA I 2946, fo1. Sr '37'.

PART I: CHAPTER 4 ON THE DISTINCTIVE FEATURES OF THE AFOREMENTIONED CATEGORIES 1.4.1. One distinctive feature of a noun is that certain particles, called

'servile elements' by the earlier grammarians, are combined with it, such as V~,

1~,

C~,

'~,

~,

~

and the like. A second distinctive feature is that

various letters of the alphabet with a specific function are attached to it, such as beth, the heh of definition, kaph, lamedh and mem, for example

i!iiJ C~'

tV'~f

~'3iJ

iliiJ

(Gen. 26:11),

I '? tV'~iJ

(Jer. 38:4), tV'~:P

(Jer. 14:9), hiiJ tV'~?-n (Jer. 26:16), n~'1-ilt:Jj?, tV'~ '? (Gen. 2:23), and similar cases. A third feature is that it is appropriate to combine it with an attribute, for example l~'

'7?~

nJ~m

7'Q~

~7'

(Prov. 10:1), P'J~

0,6

T? C~t:J,

(Gen. 6:9), 311

tV'~

(1 Sam. 30:22), ilJ;I-tV'~

11:22), T~',

:J,~-ntp;

(2 Sam:. 14:25), m?~

I

ilW~

'(l,;~ (Prov.

(Prov. 21:31), and similar cases. A fourth feature is

that it is appropriate to make a predication concerning it, for example

'~iJ

'1.~f 13:12),:Jy?"

ilW~

tV'~iJ1

':JW; P7.?~

~';1

:JW; T~p-rl.f

(Num. 13:29), T~!

'~f.l

n~')

CJ~

(Gen.

'~tp-n

1')11 (1 Chron. 23:1), ilW~J1 (1 Sam. 25:3), and similar cases.

A fifth feature is that it is possible to make it plural. You make a masculine noun plural by adding yodh and mem and a feminine noun plural by adding waw and taw, for example tV'~ noun and its plural is the form in ~JP similarly T~

'~J

il~

n'~

C'o/~

(1 Kings 3:7) and b'~p

the feminine we have il?'n~

1~,

is a singular masculine

CJ~'7.

h~;r

C'1~

(Prov. 8:4), (2 Kings 2:23). In

'?

(Deut. 2:23), n'·w~

n'7mf (Esther 2:2) and many similar examples. A sixth

PART I: CHAPTER 4

j'J~0

f3.':J ,,::>, ~"n'

~:J

~,

~"n

1~

4j'J~i:>b

i~'3.

,m 1~

SV' SN, ':I, I:IN, 'V,

co~,

"n~

~"n

j'J"3.' C,~:> ,,::>, 3~j'J)m

1.4.1.

l';P"~

')3.' j'J~:(1)

,,;

ip::> C'~, C~, ~:>, ~"3.'i ~il1 ~:J' ,m j'J"3.' rttrr ~'NS l'N I:Irr'J ~'N:I rnrr ~'NtT ':I rttrr ~'N? Vl'Jrr ip::> j'JEl~ 10n ~j'Jn,fi ", '~n ~Nt rrt"i?7 ~'N ':I V' ~'N i",Y ~'N s~l' S'C:I 1!:l' !:IN M~' I:I:lM 1!:l ,,; j'J:(1)~ ~, l:'~ C'C r~! mp~ r~! ~'N SV,S!:l' 1VJ:I r'N!:l !:l~ 1:I'!:lN ip::> m3.' '~:J> 10n ~j'J3.:" ~!:l' r~N' Tt?! "" !:lW" i'S~V ':I:1rr "V!:l !:l~' ~,S j'J3.~i ;in~ ~j'Jo:>, ,,; r~i? ~'Nr 'N~ ~" S:I~

,m,

~i'

'~":J

N'i'N I:'~ rS'~!:l

~j'Jn 1~

n5,~

I:I?"N j'J3.~i, rr,vJ rr'rr' ':I 'n)~ ", "~

C'~,

~":J

rN'~

~'N

j'J3.~i

,5b~

'El ",p::> I:I"VJ, 1Ui? 'v J, ~,S'!:l ~"V J

:J~'.

l'1:J. 11 3. *FEA 12447, fo1. 2v. 114. FEA I 2946, fo1. Sv m';)~.

fo1. Sv + ,~.

':>~El

'n~"

'El, 1:1' ~i? ~'!:lU

1. *FEA I 2447, fo1. 2r. 1 FEA I 2946, fo1. Sr 37:J~"

m~

112. FEA I 2946, fo1. Sr 11

S. FEA I 2946,

Part I: Chapter 4

28

feature is that it is appropriate to conjoin it to another item or to conjoin another item to it, for example CV'~ (Exod. 23:19), n:,~iJ-'

,~

illil;

(Gen. 24:34),

I i~W

(Exod. 22:7), i"~;:r

n",~

(Deut. 22:24), l"J~

f1"*iJ (Exod 10:5), and similar cases. A seventh feature is the fact that it is admissible to make it an exception, for example "? 1~

',~

It;~

TD~i;l-C

f1.~;:r-C

(2 Chron. 21: 17),

(2 Kings 24:14), C~'O/-7

HJ~?

i~lJ-n

"3fJP "P?~ il~?

'~o/: il,1"~

~W"

"P?~T "P?~

C?T:l-'~

'"~,tp:

nJ~T

i~tp

h7?"7tpiJ

~

~?

c"i¥D hi'~·;:r

(Josh. 11:13), iW~

~:p-'

~71

i"~

ilP;:J-~7

(Josh. 11:19), C"[.i'~7

IJ,~T

(Exod. 22: 19), il~tp-n ~ lL;"~ J~1l (Num. 5:20), and similar cases. An eighth feature is the

"j~?i'

C:m,~

n,71

"-i~tp

fact that it is admissible to attach the expression of intensity to it and to qualify it by this, for example ';I"$-n~ 1: 18), :J.7-n~1 14:23), 'J:l~

C"~:;1j-,

ilW~-'1

'tV"~

il1J?~-V

(Exod. 35 :25), il371~

;iJ;1

'tV"~-f

"i~J

,jc (Exod. C~9

(Jud. 13:2, etc.),! "W~

(2 Kings 4:1), i7~

(Josh.

(Mal. 3:9), H7~

n!J~ :J~!

ilW~1 n1i:~

(Zech. 4:2). There are, in addition to these, further features that may be regarded as distinctive features of a noun. 1.4.2. Any form that the people of the language have sanctioned to

possess one of the eight aforementioned features in its basic linguistic structure you know must be a noun. Anything that they have not caused to possess one of these is not a noun. One should, rather, consider a second option, namely whether it is a verb or a particle, and assess it with regard to the features that distinguish a verb from a particle.

!

The numeral 'one' in this and also in the following example is regarded as

expressing some kind of intensity. This was no doubt since the singular of the noun could have been expressed without the numeral.

Part I: Chapter 4 ip:l il'7N il1') i~N

r'~1

1N il1') '7N iln~N

7'V 1"V11 'V~ ~"

ip:l

;')z)1

OV ~" ~"t

~, ,~ Nz)1

T

1~'

il'717

~,

••• T

~M

1~

,~

'U11 6'~J

~M

il717i

tM~'1

O~

M:1,t "M11 '~:1 ~7

71:l'

,~

~

17;

'~"t

7~"

'10

NZ)

'1iz)7N

,~

N'il '1i'

1m il::l ilii17)1

'11" 1V'~ '7N

1~"

,,:1, "" '~:1

~,

~,

J

O~'

'J:1 ~

,~

1'N~)

7:1 " ,~

,~

10n N;')z)Nii1

'M~

17'

J11 20"V11 r'~1

1:1 ~,

1'~

,:1V

,~

,~

~

1~' N~z)

PZ)'

Nil17::1N01

" J:1 tUj?

'~:1

t:m'1~

10n

411':1' "rM ~

"V':1~ ":lNii7N

~':1

O"V11 3,~

"V 1~' TT

~,

10n NilO'N01

,!,

'V:1

NmnON7N

J

'V ~"'V1

O'M' o'rt,~

~':1

il::l

,~

O'[~]

29

0'0 ,~

71'~

:111t ~'U

5:1,

,~

00N77 iiz)N7177N

il'il

',nN

9

il)77N

07 Nz)1 OON Nil)N 071N~

71~N

N1~)

Nil'~

1~).

7ilN

7N:l'N

8

10n

il~7

7:l~

1.4.2.

Np'jmii Nil'717 iiNz)N7177N 1NZ)ii7N

1N ')::1)' 7::1

OON::I

iiO'7 Nil'717 Ni117:l"

il::l T"Z)ii' Nz)::I IONil1::1ii17'1 ~1n

1N 71~

'il 7il N)Nn

~1n7N

1. *FEA I 2447, 2946, [01. 6r +~:J

[01. 2lr .112.

> FEA I 2946, [01. 6r. 11 3. > FEA I 2946, [01. 6r. FEA I

p1. 114. FEA I 2946, [01. 6r + 91W.

11

5. FEA I 2946, [01. 6r + il"':J

"u. 116. FEA I 2946, [01. 6r + 'l:J. 11 7. FEA I 2946, [01. 6r + il~Nn. 2946, [01. 6r. Nil1:Jnl'm.

11

1Z)

9. FEA I 2946, [01. 6r + ~N:J'.

11 8. > FEA I

11 10. FEA I 2946, [01. 6r

Part I: Chapter 4

30

1.4.3. If somebody were to say that Scripture has employed many of the aforementioned eight features with forms that are not nouns, for example

~:JW-'

C"P1'iJ 14:19), ~)",7.¥ 73:17), ,~

(Josh.

nJ.¥~-'

C?7 i'1~

2:22),

(Isa. 32:15), '~-"W1

nJ..i", ~i:J;-'

"~o/

',~ ~i-'

'J~

(1

Sam. (Psa.

(Hos. 10:12), and were to say that

which you stated was used specifically with nouns, is attached to verbs in several places; the particle ,~

of'~,

moreover, which has the meaning

is also attached to verbs, for example Ci~J

27:10),

i7

"l}it:;>r'~

C!;lt?W~-'

(1 Sam.

(1 Chron. 15:12); the particle

'f' by means of

which the expression of a noun is intensified, is attached to verbs, for example Ti¥ ~W1;l-'f

1P'~:J

~i:j-'7

(Hos. 14:2), 'tVi?~

37J.;T'f (Psa. 74:3), :J,.i~

(Psa. 71:18); the conjoined state, which you have

stated is a distinctive feature of nouns, may be used with verbs, for

nitp1;l-'::p (Exod. 4:13), ~i ',¥ '1~ '''7.:p "::P (Isa. 15: 1), 'Jl n}l! 1'1:1i? (Isa. 29: 1); some of the single letter particles that

example

are prefixed specifically to nouns are also attached to verbs, for example

'''rr

mn?

(2 Chron. 1:4), Ti!.~-n CtP (1 Kings 6:19); but how is it possible for these features to occur in association with verbs,

i? T"?i::9

when you have stated that they are distinctive elements of nouns? -

The

response would be that their association with verbs in the cases that you have mentioned is not the true linguistic structure but rather a secondary, metaphorical usage, the origins of which must be elucidated by interpretation, since they are clearly deviant and exceptional forms. 1.4.4. As for the attachment

of'~

to verbs in the five aforementioned

cases, here a defective noun to which it would have been appropriate to attach the particle has been elided from them, namely ,tp~ virtual structures are ~:J'tV

T

'tV~-37,

...

-:

-

,::1'1 'tV~-37, ".".

•..

-:

-

and likewise also

with the remaining examples, so that they would be like p.,~;-t

nJ1n; (Deut. 3:20), 371~ 'W~

'~.(1

Sam. 22:3).

and their

,:;

Part I: Chapter 4

'''11:J "N:J'N :JNib"N "~37ioN ':l~ 'V ip:J CON:J 0"" N~

"P~

31

""NP "NP "i~' ""37 iN~"37

2TN~1"

'~iO

t,N N':lN 'V 'J't,V :1,1" '1' t,'N~ ii':J' "l1"N 'P ii":J' 'P~ O~t, i"~ il""37 11":J" 37~' t,~ 0":1 O~£)

,.,,, ,~. "[37~N t,~ ip:J 'P [")37~]:J

ip:J CON"N Nil:J i:J'" "l1"N t,~ ii":J" " ":l~ ip:J Nil:J ~ON" ":J"

N':l' t,~

", :1~r;t

sN~"

,:l, '1' 0'£)":1 :1,," N':l' '1' t,~

'v. ,~

:IN'O r"N ~N

CON"N l'N:!rii:JN T~

ilii':Ji N~

~ t,~

N~"

t,'~:l

,~

il,~b"N'1n

"37~N

~U':1

rw N~

ii':J' "ii"N il~N"

~"i'

.,~

,t"

il""37 "',:J"

:l"N 1',:1 t,~

CON"N:J Nil"':J' l":!rJ~N iliil ",:J, TNi '1":J~ "ii"N 37~N'"

IT~

"]"37 CON"N:J Nil:!rN:!rii:JN "il "ii"N t,~ 3N~"

~'i:l

'N~)

1.4.3.

il""37

Mt,~

~

'!~

f37:J N~"

O~ 37~

r.t'1~

il""37 ip:J

", ,t, r'~t; "37~N

""37 iN~"37

""37 Nil"':J' TN :IN,i''N TN:J Nil:J

il"'W "iN" il""'Nii ",,:J)" n"ii ":J ilp"pn 0"" Nilii':Ji il~N":J 'NiliiwN' 37~N'

60~:J"N

.,~

"37~N

""37 'P ",:J, N6~

il""37 'P ",:J, Ton" "'''N l'PN)"N CON"N 'TN~ '1' ':l~ '~N '1' ilm:Jl1:J Nil''''pm 7'~N ,m Nm~

'1' '" M'J' '~N

'1' "1~

T':J"" 1"':J Nill1"P:J'

1. FEA I 2946, fo1. 6v + inil. 112. *FEA I 2447, fo1. 21v.

II

1.4.4.

il":J~N '1in~

,:l, '~N 1"N '~N

3. FEA I 2946, fo!' 6v 7N

N:ir'N. 114. FEA I 2946, fo1. 6v 7'::>'. II 5. > FEA I 2946, fo1. 6v. 11 6. FEA I 2946, fo1. 6v ilO1:l::>7N.

117. *FEA II 281, fo1. 8v.

Part I: Chapter 4

32

1.4.5. As for the two cited cases in which

'tt is attached to a verb, here

also a defective noun has been elided and their virtual structures, which contain these, are O.t;l?W~

i7

j'?;TW~

,~-

i~'-t

and 'l)i)':;Jt1 'w~-t,

which is like

(1 Chron. 15:3).

1.4.6. As for the attachment of'~

to a verb in the three aforementioned

cases, in one of these a reordering of the components should be resorted to, namely in would be ~t:l

li¥ ~Wt:l-'f (Hos. 14:2), so j"¥-'f' From the other two 'W~

that its virtual structure has been elided, as in

the previous examples. 1.4.7. As for the conjoining of an item to a verb in

n?lPt:l-':f

(Exod.

4: 13), in reality it is not conjoined to it but rather is conjoined to a defective noun that has been elided, its virtual structure being 'W~-:f

n?lPt:l ' (Gen. 19:34), '7~

O~i';

:J}iN? ,~

9?,~1 'P-~

(Josh. 4: 18), '.?~-n

I t1i7?~

(1 Sam.

'T:l~JO/-i]

(Gen. 31 :29). The construction 7~J;1'

is a future and not a past form, for the past verb with

which it is admissible to combine 7~J;1 this.

t1i7?,~

N#-~7

(Micah 2:8) is not a counter-example to this on the

grounds that O~i': structure is O~i';

'W:-P

for example 7i?T;l-O~

;'~ij,

has been elided, and the virtual

for the construction is not admissible without

Part I: Chapter 4

37 7~

1.4.10.

n'7N n1'" 11:Jtm N7' n1'" '7N n1:J011 TN 73~N

rrrn,' !1i'V' NY" !1i'V' !1~"

'ON' t,N 'J"N 73~N

P'73711 ,n 171 ,~ '7~

73~

37~

73~ ,~

'P:J n:J N~np'731 N7'N 1':J~7N

n71~

CNOPN 1'NO ,~

37''(1)11 '7'N7N n~N73 '~N7

n37:J1N '7N

1.4.11.

73~N

17~

f:J11 n1m 73~N N1N'

1.4.12.

f37:J T~ n~37:J T"~1 1111N' Ol ,~ 7!1 N!1 Nt, p:J ~ON' t"on n:J T1p' IN 10n N~ m~ '!1N nN ~ON 'n!1~ 7rr o,~t t"on~ ,~t" t,'~n !1"Nt, 'OV t"onN' 2 n7,p 171 f11137' N7' ,t,N 'ON ~ON 73~N

IN 11'n 1~ rr'rr n1'1p1'11 ~'1n

n~:J1

1~'

!1i'V" 'P:J n1''':J m37 171 7N1~' rrJV'

1'1 7Nn7N' 7:JP10~N'

TN 'n~

n1~N73

'ON ,'" VO~

n~Nop

'~N7

'P:J

Ton' CON C1p11 1'" ~T 'ON" ,t", 117P '7N 37"N17N t,!1!1 rt,~J rt,~J 'ON" 7V" lNO N~7

o'rrt,N ",rr ~C,"

n1':J~7N

'" '~N"

T~'

1N:JON7N :J37~' n7N1~' 'J'N Ton' N7 '17N n:J np73711 T~:J

1:J:J11 N7' n1'" 137 n:J 1:J511 IN N~'

1~N7

n~N73

N'~

n~N73:J

N7 N7:JP10~

OO'i" 1':J7 OO'i"

n'737 t"onN 7':J1 10n' '17N '~N7 m'1 1~

CN7:J7N Ton' N7 1N OO'i"

1. *FEA II 281, fol. 11r.\l2. *FEA II 281, fol. 11r.

Part I: Chapter 4

38

1.4.13. A verb expressing the present does not differ from the future verb in form, as remarked already. It is possible to distinguish between the two, however, by the elements with which they are collocated. The distinctive feature of a present verb is (its collocation with) ilJ;~,

miJ, for example ~lJ 17'J,~ il~ (2 Sam. 20:6), C:~-'D? Nr'iJ; (1 Kings 22:l3), tV'~7 N'?ril~ 18:4), ~1 9:7), 7'?ip~

i'1~J

Nrnj?~.

17.~

N~

and (Gen.

ilJ~

(1 Sam.

(Isa. 52: l3). Although these actions do not occur at the

same time as the speaker utters the words ilJ;~,

and miJ, but rather in N~

the future, it would be appropriate, nonetheless, for them to occur at the same time. The purpose is to present the action as being near, to the extent that it is treated as if it were happening in the present. This differs from a future action that could not appropriately be presented as occurring at the same time as the utterance of the speaker on account of its combination with a distinctive feature of the future, namely the words 'n~

T

and n'~.

T

TT: T

The word 'n~

action, for example

h7o/~ m~l

I

T

T

17??iJ '~l

(1 Sam. 9:16), ~l'7 C'~ (Isa. 22: l3). The word n'~

T

can be used to refer to close or a distant

ilW~

'D7?~

r'?N~ TT: T

'Q7? I nJ~f 'D7? (Josh. 22:24), 't'7? '? (Esther 5:8),

is used to refer to the day following

the day that is mentioned, for example n~':;ltPiJ

h:~lWiJ

n)D~7:'

(Lev.

)7~lip:-',

23: 16). One should not present as a counter-example to this the verse

~¥,;

nQ$iJ

)D~7:'n (Num. 33:3), which has a past verb rather than a future. This is because the narrator is narrating about a past time to which he has conjoined the word

nlD7?

and this type of

construction is admissible, just as it is admissible in Arabic to say gada al-cldi /saraja Zaydun ('On the day after the festival Zayd left'). If, however, you did not conjoin the word and said (in Arabic) gadan karaja Zaydun (,Tomorrow Zayd left'), you would be making a contradictory statement. The words

ilrl17 and il3il, moreover, are sometimes used with T

-

•••

a past verb, but this does not contradict the fact that they are distinctive features of a present verb or a future verb that is treated like a present in the way discussed above. This is because, when these words are

Part I: Chapter 4

'!)

;l'!);N ;:JpnO~N

N~:J

N~i1.l':J

r~l1

N; ;Nn;; '1;N ;l'!);N' i1.l:J; i1'!) N~ N~ :Jon

~;N:J'

7"~n;N

p~'

'P:J r~,

N~'

39

r~l1

;Nn;N ;l'!) i1~N;l'!)

rro, ,'J rrJrr, ,,:l, N~

'rr' C'~

~1

1.4.13.

p~.l;N

N~i1.l'P

,J, l1'~

NJ ni"

r&I'N'

no'; ;Nl'!)N;N i11i1 n.lN:J T';' "~r&I' rrJrt N':lJ N~ '!) ;:J rrJrr, NJ, r~l1 ;'NP;N ;,p ;Nn '!) i1l'pN'

1"";N' i1;Nn '!) l'pn TN

Ni1.lN!) TN~7; T~ ;:Jpno' ;Nn;N '!) l'pN' i1.lN:J 'nn ;l'!);N :J"pn Ni1:J

~N;:J

i1l'NP'N Ton' N; i1:J :J,P N~;

'n~!)

n'r&lN :JPl" N~;

't't? ~v.

TN,npN i1n~N;l'

't'tr ~':t?

~'no,

n;~

~'J

"~tr 'n~

0';' ~'l1:r& ~:lr& 'J:l 'NY' nO!:lrr ~'n

':l~

'1;N

i1n~N;l"

l'~

;'NP;N ;,p ;Nn '!) rrr&ll1N 'n~ 1,~ U'J:l' C~'J:l

~'n

;:Jpno~N

i1;'P:J 1l':J' "~N' 'n~

;'P:J ":J1~;N 2 i1;,p:J ,;1 r,nl"

O";N TN r,nl'~;

'N'r&I'

':J~;N

TN n'n T~ ,;1' ;:Jpno~ N; rN~ ,i1 '1;N N~ i1'!) Ton!) ~'n i1'7N ~N rN~ TN~7 Tl' ,:J:J' N1'i1 1'7 i':J 1'l';N 1" ;,pn TN ':J'l';N '!) Ton' N~:J i1;':JO N1i1 ;:J1' 1p' N~P.l n.l:J; 1'7 i':J N1" n;p ;:J ~n 0; ,;, N~i1.l':J rPN.l:J ,;1 0';' '~N; ;l'!);N ';l' rrJrr, r~l1 ;Nn;N ',i~ ;:Jpno~N '!) ',i N~;' ;Nn;N ;l'!); T'n~N;l TN:J '~N;

';l' ;:J1 N1N N~i1.l

n'n

1. *FEA I 2405 fo!' 18r. 112. *FEA I 2405 fo!' 18v.

T~

i1'!) ,~

N~

:J on

40

Part I: Chapter 4

combined with a past verb, the purpose of the speaker is to make it close to the present, just as when he combines them with a future verb, his purpose is to make it close to the present, as has been explained above.

"l:lN* -;qry (Num.

The same applies to the past verb. Examples: 1'7~ 22:38),]7

h~iJ

'f\r;t?o/

(1 Kings 15:19), C,~r:-u)'

'?

Chron. 2:12), C'JT~

'T:I~o/

np~l

'T:lr;tjo/

n~l

(2

(1 Sam. 25:7), and similar cases

where the purpose of the speaker is to bring the action closer to the time of speaking. 1.4.14. The Arabs distinguish between the future and the present by

attaching special particles to the future, for example sa-yakunu kayt

wa-kayt (,Such-and-such will be') and sawfa yakunu ('It will be'). Something similar to this in Hebrew that distinguishes the future from the present is the word n~,

'7

for example i~

(Jud. 9:54), '~iJl T~

attachment of

Ni?;-T~

n;lP:-~

(Gen. 3:22), "71N~-n

(Gen. 32: 12), and similar cases. The

to a past verb is irregular and must be explained by

assuming that a future verb is hidden. Examples of this are

C'1¥

(2 Sam. 20:6)

,n1'n; D'l 'No/rT~

i7

N¥?rT~

(2 Kings 2:16), where the

virtual meaning is 'So that he will not have found for himself and 'So that it will not have carried him' respectively. Without such an exegesis, the construction would not be admissible, since

T~

is usually attached to

the future rather than to the past. So, where it is attached to a past verb in some exceptional cases, the construction is future in meaning. Similarly, the expression T~7,

when attached to a verb is attached to a future form

rather than a past one and where it is attached in exceptional cases to a past verb, its meaning is transferred to that of a future form. An example of this is nj;-~

'Nl'T:I,

like l'iJ~

C}.;lNT T~P-7

nj;-~

because in this example T~7

(Josh. 4:24), which has the meaning of

Nl'T:I T~7

(Deut. 6:2) etc. This is

expresses purpose and motive, and this is a

distinctive feature of the future as against the past.

CLCL.! 'CL~N

~a! CdL4L.!

L.N:t~

°A61 O\Oj ~Otz:

LL.4L ~cuA

U' 4L..N NU' 4L4 N~J.:4L ~a!

N4"~

I V3 . h

"tL.!

4NCL.!

".:tCNL.!

Lud.~

a!

CdL4L

N4.:tLC~

,,1 L.L1 N4C4NC c~

.:t4~

I V3.·h °1

N4"L.CLL

NL.N L.C4U .:t4~

u,~!

LC~U

4Nal.UL.!NL L~L.

a~N

~L

4L.!

aL..4C

GL.!L al.NL. ~ct:'C

4NaL..L ~4

a!

41..L C~U

L.4L 4N ~cL1

G.:t4 "N~

4~U

"dNLt:N 4L.4L G~ CdL4L.!C o~cLl

u,~!

G~

N4NOudt:N4 LL.4L LCN1 L.CL4L.!Nl:

'taa!

GNL.N L.C4U al.NL.N .:t4~

".:tc~

a!

G.:t4 "oudt:4 LL.4L CdL4L.!

a! G~ .:t4~L!

LN4.:tLt:

~L.

a!

4CLN

N4"oudt:4 ,,1

LOLk ~cL1

LN4.~

~"d

N4"oudt:4 ,,1 N4UN4 t:NL.CN4 ULLk

N4d~

UdL~t:.!

LaU'J.: ~U'4 LL.4L G~

al.LUL.! G~L.!

N4d~

O\Oj ~OtZ:

~GL.

U' 4L..NL "U4

N4~

N4"oudt:4 L.L1 N4"~

~uo1

U"4L.! LN4N G4N

L..LU 4L4

t:".C~

L.!L

alNL.N ~L.

.:t4~

CN1 ".:tCNL.! N4NOudt:N4 C"N N1

"N~

.:t4~ ~cLl

4N

r ~NL t:N~"L

0z: 11 °161

t:N4"Oudt:4 L.L1 N4"~

L'C~.!

4L..NU'C NU' 4L4 N4L.~

N4"Oudt:4 "CL.! L.Ll N4"~

N4G.:t4 UL.C4 .:t4~

a!

L.CL4

c~

a! UNL~4.!

a!

LJ.:,r4 LNal.t:NL.! L.4L LL.CL4 4G~L.!

N4UN 4 N1 ~'C.:t4

"C~L.! "trJ'"I

tU4C 1 LN"UN4L.! ""N 'CL~ ~U'4

cN1

N4"oudt:4

'CL~

N4~

,,1 Ldu CLCL.!

'4

J.:rJ.: CNU'4 N~4L.

CL.4L

UdL~t:.!

,,1

,,1

LaU'J.: ~aU'4

U'C

N4"~

'CL~.!

UdL~t:.!

N4UN4

J.:rJ.:

.:t4~

N4UN4 C"N

"N

NL.N

udL.C

.:t4~

NL.C4L.!"N

vl FEA I 2475, fol.

10v. 11 11. *FEA I 2441, fol. 2v. 11 12. FEA I 2475, fo1. 10v + "ilN. 11 l3. > FEA I 2405, fo1. 21r, FEA I 2946, fol. 7v, FEA I 2475, fol. 10v. 1114. FEA I 2946, fol. 7v, FEA I 2475, fo1. 10v '''':IN. 1115. > FEA I 2405, fo1. 21r, FEA I 2475, fo1. 1Ov. 1116.

> FEA I 2405, fo1. 21v, FEA I 2475, fol. 1Ov.1I17. FEA I 2437, fo1. 412r.

54

Part I: Chapter 5

of this in a word with another pattern is '1, which may be a noun, as in N~;i

,)-c~q

,~

(Lev. 14:21), and may also be used as a past verb, as in ~71

(lsa. 38: 14), and similar cases. A further example of this in a word with another pattern is li:J~,

'i?

which may be a noun, as in

li~

(Psa. 57:8), and may also be used as past verb, as in C'¥?? ~)i

C';j,~

(Prov. 19:29), and similar cases. A further example of this in a word with another pattern is ji~,

which may be a noun, as in C'i?~

~)r;9

C.:t~

(Ezek. 33:10), and may also be used as a past verb, analogously to 'ry'I.,

N? (Jer. 48:11), as in ~p, ,~

~t';1iJ

(Psa. 38:6).

1.5.2. If you are uncertain concerning the status of a word that is past verb or one that is an inflected noun, and you wish to know whether or not it is possible to use it both as a verb and as a noun, consider it with the yodh and mem of the plural added to it and also with the pronominal suffix waw.! If the form may be combined with both these elements, you know that it may be used for both categories. If it may be combined with only one of them, you see that it has a more restrictive distribution and is a type of form that may not be used for both categories. Examples of three forms whose status may not be immediately obvious are and ,~tz>.

:np, ,~o/

To the first form may be added both the yodh and mem of the

plural and also the pronominal suffix waw, resulting in the forms C':J'tV •

and ~:J

T

0/, and thereby one learns that it may be used for both categories.

To the second form the pronominal suffix waw may be added but not the

!

I.e. the 3rd person plural inflection of past verbs.

Part I: Chapter 5

N,rr t,1 ON' ip:;, N?lON 1':;" 17'P:;"

3

ilN,i?l 2',i' N?l'

4o'rrt,N '!It, r'~J

I,

55

,t"

J'V

1?l N'~?l

p:;" 't?~

il"" 111 '!)

1?l N'~?l

'JMJN O!l' 1?l N?lON 1':;"

'tt'N!lrr

N737!) n7~"

il7'P:;' N?lON 11:;" '17N r'~J

17'P:;" ilN,i?l ',i' N?l' O,yt,t, u,~ 50'ir~J

TT' '!) 17'P:;"

'17N t,1 il""

N737!) n7~"

'17N j?OJ il"" 111 '!)

'737 NON'P N'~?l

Nt, 'M'"

N737!) n7~" 6'j?~

il'~N?7

7N37!)N7N 1?l il~!)7

N737!)' N?lON n7~1

7Nn 1'737 7:;,'tVN IN!)

7il 073711 IN 111'N' il!)'~1?7N

N?lON7N'

Nil'7N 37?li7N O'?l, N' il!)N~:J

'N" n7~1

NmN

0737N!)

Nil,:J1137N!) N7 ON

Nil7~1

N?lil:J

1.5.2.

10n

':;'N7N 1'1 N?lil1nN:J Nil7~1

7"?l~N

IN!)

10n IN' N37'?li l"?lN77

l"?lN77 910n, N7 '17N 00P7N 1?l 8NmN 11?l737' il:J Nil1~:> !l~

l'~N)7

'N"

'737 Nil'?lN lOil:J11'tVN ~N!)7 1537?li7N 140,?l, N'

171:J Nil"~7

r'~N7

Nil'7N "?l~7N

'N' 18

il!)N~

13

n7~

11

11

Cil1'?)~.

11

11

lZiUN~;

FEA I 2946, fo1. 7v

3. FEA I 2406, fo1. 4r

S. FEA I 2437, fa!. 412v illN.

FEA I 2405, fa!. 21v, FEA I 2946, fa!. 7v n7~'.1I0

11

N'"~.

11

11

11

13. FEA I 2437, fa!. 412v Ton.

FEA I 2946, fa!. Sr Nil~'.1I6

lZi'N~

4. > FEA I

5. FEA I 2946, fa!. 7v + 11

7. FEA I

9. FEA I 2437, fa!. 412v,

*FEA I 2441, fa!. 3r.lll1. FEA

12437, fa!. 412v, FEA I 2405, fa!. 21v, FEA I 2946, fa!. Sr + 'm. fa!. Sr '7'N7ND.

T

O'!l~

6. FEA I 2437, fa!. 412v, FEA I 2946, fa!. 7v + 'n1':Jn.

2437, fa!. 412v

-

mon il')N117N' ~!l

2437, fa!. 412r, FEA I 2405, fa!. 21r, FEA I 2946, fa!. 7v. il'Ml 1'N'.

'!ltt

••

NmN C71.'£) Nil"7N 16"'~7N 17

2. FEA I 2475, fo1. 10v + N'il.

'!l~

mon 12 il7 'N7N!)

1. FEA I 2437, fo1. 412r, FEA I 2475, fo1. lOv '37l.

i '!) 171 7N11?l

11

12. FEA I 2946,

14. > FEA I 2946, fa!. Sr.

FEA I 2437, fa!. 412v Cil"~.

Sr Ton. illS. FEA I 2946, fo1. Sr. FEA I 2441, fa!. 3r: ilnDN~.

11

11

15.

17. FEA I 2946, fa!.

56

Part I: Chapter 5

yodh and mem of the plural, the resulting form being ~,o/'

and thereby

one knows that it may be used for only one of the two categories, namely the verb rather than the noun. To the third form the yodh and mem of the plural may be added but not the pronominal element waw, the resulting form being O~,tv

and one thereby learns that it may be used only as

noun and not as a verb, since it cannot have the inflection ~'ilV, the second form cannot have the inflection O~':JlV.

.:

T

just as

The first of the three

aforementioned forms is distinguished from the other two in that it may take both the pronominal suffix waw, i.e. ~:JlV,

andyodh and mem of the

T

plural, i.e. O~:;1o/. 1.5.3. Some proper names have a form like that of a future verb, since

they are derived from the same lexical class (as these verbs), for example, O~"-P

i'r.~:

:J"~,

:Jo/.~1

(Gen. 25:19) (Gen. 37:1) -

(Gen. 37:26) - i17~T;I? 1.5.4.

i1,~

:J.p~

i'1:'o/: :Ji~¥

O:~W

:J~;

(Psa. 2:4),

(Jer. 9:3), i1J~;

'?~1

(Neh. 11: 17) and similar cases.

Some words may be used as a particle and as a noun, for

example, r"J.m~

'J:V

(Lev. 23: 16), which is a particle, alongside 'i?~

~

',:V ,~ (Gen. 49:27), which is a noun meaning 'prey' like '~i Oi~7 ',:V7 (Zeph. 3 :8). Another case is ~i1*'P: ,:v_~ (Hos. 11 :7), which is a noun, alongside D.~Ti?jJ

1~

'J:V

(Lev. 1:11), which is a particle, and

there are similar examples.

1.5.5. No word, however, can be used to express two categories together

on the same occasion but can only do so in separate instances, since the combination of two categories in one instance of a word is impossible.

Part I: Chapter 5

Ni1:IN 17':l ~, i 7N' 00N7N T"

57

~':1tp

iI:l l1'N~ ~i7N O"~' N" T" T~ 7~N ,m T"~OV7N ,nN7 N7N n7~1 N7 l1'N~ '~7N 'N' T" NiI"7N ~i 7N O"~' N" iI~N l1~On T" N~O N7N T':Jl1 TN n7~1 N7 Ni1:IN 07~ C"~i 17':l 3""11 TN 2"~N17 ,~ n:lV N~:J '.:1i~ 1NiI"~ n:lV7 7~ 'N':l NiI'~ TOn7 N~iI"7 '7'N7N iI'~ l1JN:J' C"~ C':1~ ~"7N O"~' 4N '~7N ':l, ~:1 •

7:lV10~N

7~N

71~:l

T

T

:lNV7N7N

N~O

r~:l

5,i"

'v'

Crr':1N 7:1 pMY' 17'v:J ill1"7 T~ Nvm~ rr"rr' '~N" :1i'11! :1,i'l.! :1i'11' :1~" il7'v:J' i'M~ 6:1~"

i1:I':J7 C'~:1

17' ilN:lWN' r7~n, N~O

n7~'"

T':J" TN N~'n

n7~'

N~

1.5.3.

rra:prr'

6N~7

,~

1.5.4.

'11 S:;'N' 'i':1:1 71~:l ~'n 'iI "'7N n'M~ '11 17'v:J Sl1 SN' 17'v:J' 'l1S ~'i C"S 71~ :li1:l7N sOON 'iI "'7N ~'n 'iI "7N n:~r ", Sl.' ~1:l OON 'iI "7N ,rr'N'i" 7

il7N1~'

7:l

lN~i

lOT"~N7

n7~"

N~

1. FEA I 2437, fo1. 413r, FEA I 2946, fo!' 8r~;,n I 2405, fo1. 22r il~)Nn'. 413r N~'.

6N~7

,~

T':J' N7' 1.5.5. 127'n110" ~i 7N 'N N7':l TN.1I2. FEA I 2437, fo1. 413r, FEA

11 3. > FEA I 2946, fo1. 8r ~'n

FEA I 2405, fo1. 22r N~:J.

11

TN.

5. FEA I 2437, fo1. 413r ~;'n.

11

4. FEA I 2437, fo1. 116. > FEA I 2437,

fo1. 413r, FEA I 2405, fo1. 22r, fo1. FEA I 2946, fo!' 8r. 11 7. FEA I 2946, fo!' 8r, FEA 12405, fo!' 22r + n:J1L'il.

11

8. *FEA I 2441, fo!' 3v. 119. FEA I 2351, fo!' 2r 'nlJ. 1110.

FEA I 2946, fo1. 8v T"IJN'. 1111. FEA I 2946, fo!' 8v, FEA I 2405, fo1. 22v NY~lJi 12. FEA I 2946, fo1. 8v 'NnO~.

11

PART I: CHAPTER 6

ON THE COMBINATION OF THE THREE PARTS OF SPEECH INTO A MEANINGFUL UTTERANCE 1.6.1. Three types of combination to form a meaningful utterance are

possible. One is the combination of a noun with a noun, the second is a verb with a noun and the third is a particle with a verb, in certain circumstances. Examples of the first type are: I '!:J~

(Deut. 6:4),

'6 ~p'i

(Gen. 45:26), 1~

,~tp

;'Wb~

,itr>

(Exod. 19:3),

:s7J~

;,j;,;

(1 Sam. 28:3), and

similar cases. Examples of the second type are:

;'J¥

;,j;,; ~)'n

'l?tt

;'1;") (Gen. 13:14),

nl?o/

(lsa. 1:3), O:'J~

(Psa.

105:38), and similar cases. Examples of the third type include combinations of a particle of exclamation with the noun, as in ,~ (lsa. 10:5), 'y*,?

'pN 'ii} (Hab. 2: 19), Pi*-~'?

'1~

jp~

'ii} 'ii} (Jer.

22:13). A particle cannot be combined with a noun in other situations and form an independent meaningful utterance. A verb, moreover, cannot be combined with another verb in a comprehensible utterance. This is because if you said ,~t

,~¥

or

n70/: 'i~tp:,

this would not be

PART I: CHAPTER 6 T'~"

CN;~

CNOPN

nN;n T~

2

N"~ 3

:J"~

i1n,n CO~,

3?~

FEA I 2441, fo1. 3v, > FEA I 2504, fo1. Ir.

l)~

FEA I 2405, fo1. 22v, FEA I 2504, fo1. Ir, FEA I 2351, fo1. 2v. 11 9. ~'n7N N~'

ni' N7'

il"~:

"~,

17' "0 N~'

CON7N l)~

CN~m

> FEA I 2405, fo1. 3v. 11

10. FEA I 2441, fo1. 3v, FEA I 2946, fo!. 8v, FEA I 2351, fo!' 2v cN6mN. \I 11. > FEA I 2441, fo1. 3v. \112. > FEA I 2946, fo1. 8v.\l13. ni' N7' > FEA I 2504, fo1. lr.

\I 14. > FEA I 2946, fo1. 8v, FEA I 2504, fo1. Ir. \I 15. FEA I 2441, fo1. 3v, FEA I 2405, fo1. 22v, FEA I 2946, fo1. 8v, FEA I 2504, fo1. Ir, FEA I 2351, fo1. 2v N"~.

Part I: Chapter 6

60

comprehensible without a noun preceding the two verbs, to which they could refer back in order to make it into a complete understandable utterance, as in, for example, :1,:;;>0/

171f

(Num. 24:9), which can be

understood by referring the two verbs back to Israel. The conjunctive waw has been elided on :1:JW . ,-

T

Part I: Chapter 6

3

p737£)7N 2i1 NiN 'i7N CON7N li~pn'

C'il£)~7N

!l~

!l~

T~

sV'~

47n~

l. FEA I 2946, fo1. 8v 11:;".112." ~,:

~'037N

11

CN7:l7N 'N"

p' Cil£)

il'7N

6?N

mN7 "'''117N i17::l" N7 "'7N ,i1 Ni17~ N7~

CN7::l7N 1~

i1"737 7::l'" N~

.,~

7i'N7N ,~. i1~N0' 3 FEA I 2405, fo1. 23v.

1~

:J'~7N

N'il "l

Part I: Chapter 7

64

vowels as a result of a change in meaning regarding whether the form is singular or plural applies to other types of nouns. Some nouns, however, exhibit no change between the conjoined and disjoined forms, for ilJ~;

example

~;9

(2 Sam. 24:7),

~,

C'i?"~9

(Psa. 126:4), which

are the same in both cases. No reason can be found for this. It has simply been received by oral tradition from the people of the language. 1.7.2 A feminine noun ending in heh exhibits a feature in its change that

is not shared by a masculine noun, since a masculine noun undergoes a change in some of its vowels but not its letters, as is the case with 1~,

mentioned above. A feminine noun, however, undergoes a change in letters as well as in vowels, for example

il'~ ~T

(1 Sam. 26:24) -

(Gen. 42:21), il¥l (Gen. 26:29) - '~ltp:-1

it¥~

1~

1'~

rT

(Jer. 11: 17),

and similar cases where the heh has been changed into taw when the word is conjoined. As for a feminine noun ending in taw (in its basic form), this follows the custom of a masculine noun in the change of its vowel in accordance with its meaning, e.g. '7?il-m::Q3 l1~Wi' l1~Wi'

~'r

1

ilp'n~

(Jud. 4:5),

(Josh. 2:15).1

The difference in meaning lies in the fact that in the first example the word is

conjoined (i.e. contextual) whereas in the second example it is disjoined (i.e. pausal).

Part I: Chapter 7

65

"'~

.

O'i"~N

!llJ!l 1~

~,

!llJ

,:l," 7::l 7731" N7 sN~

71~

27N:!l~)'

7N:!l11N .,~

41"il;"7N ,~

,7"

. "'l" N'O N~il

N31~O

'731 il'''''''11 ,~

10)'~7N

~N'

m"

.n'!l .nX"

il~N7

')31

'''''''11 .,~ N'~

13

m

9r~

'~J

1N 11'n 1~

,~

8N~

.n,y l1~,y

N~

1.7.2

':l~7N

::lOn il~"n iji:l

~'n

'''''l11

'7N Nil7N 11'''''''11 "7N 12,7' ilN::lVJN'

':l~7N

.,;~

~'n!l

CON7N'

7'''''''1111 ':l~7N

il:l,n7N '''''''11 31~

1',7N

3

ill77N 7ilN

'''NT 6n il7 6Nil7N::l m'~7N

il:l,n7N il'~

f31::l 1"

1'''''1111

";~

N117N::l m'~7N

17 .nn.n .n!l~"

iji:l

ilN)31~

14CON7N N~ 16')31

IS

i111:l,n

.n!l~"

1. FEA I 2405, fol. 23v, FEA I 2946, fol. 9r, FEA I 2504, fol. Iv 1'ln'. 11 2. FEA I 2946, fol. 9r 7N~!:lJ1'\

fol. 23v 7N~!:lJ'

7N~n. 7N~n.

11 3. FEA I 2946, fol. 9r ,,7N. 11 4. FEA I 2405, 115. FEA 12441, fol. 4v, FEA I 2405, fol. 23v, FEA I 2946,

fol. 9r, FEA I 2504, fol. 1v N~.

11 6. *FEA I 2437, fol. 415v. 11 7. FEA I 2504, fol. 1v

1"ln'. 11 8. FEA I 2441, fol. 4v, FEA 12946, fol. 9v ,~.

11 10. FEA I 2504, fol. 1v m,~7N.

119. FEA I 2504, fol. Iv 1':J.

11 11. > FEA I 2946, fol. 9v. 11 12. 17' ilN:JlVN':

N~il:JV'.

FEA I 2441, fol. 4v, FEA I 2405, fol. 23v, FEA 12946, fol. 9v, FEA I 2504, fol. Iv 13. FEA I 2946, fol. 9v, FEA I 2504, fo1. 2r, FEA I 2351, fo1. 3r Nn. 11 14. > FEA I 2441, fo1. 4v, FEA I 2405, fo1. 24r, FEA I 2946, fol. 9v, FEA I 2504, fo1. 2r, FEA I 2351, fo1. 3r. 1115. > FEA I 2405, fo1. 24r. 1116. > FEA I 2405, fo1. 24r. FEA I 2441, fol. 4v, FEA I 2504, fol. 2r, FEA I 2351, fo1. 3r + 1"ln. 1117. FEA I 2405, fo1. 24r, FEA I 2504, fo1. 2r + 1~'n.

66

Part I: Chapter 7

1.7.3 The change (in the form ot) a verb is connected with a change in its

meaning, as is the case with nouns. There are two types (of change). The first relates to the verb and the active participle and the second relates only to the verb. An example of the first type is 7~, n7:lN, ~7:lN, :

:

-

T

:

T

~N"7 'f:l7~, Cn7:lN and other forms of the inflection of this lexical ...

--:

:

class. The change in the form of the verb takes place by the addition or omission of a letter or by the exchange of one of its vowels for another. The change in the form of a participle involves a change from the reference to somebody present to the reference to an absent person,z a change from singular to plural, etc. An example of the second type is il,~9?

1'.~

~,

~17f

(Nahum 2:9), where the vowels of the second

verb have been changed from those of the first verb for a specific reason, viz. that the first verb is conjoined in meaning with the second, but the second verb is disjoined in meaning. Similar examples are: p;nl~

il;,-n~

(Jer. 51 :50), ~iT

'D''lf I l'~:t

~"7flP-C

~1R 44:24), N,7.i? l'J.n~ ~:l?V (Hos. 7:11), 7~'P-!.n

~q;iJl

7;1~iJ

(Psa. 132:12), ~ilP:

,~.-n

~lT

'J~;ir7f

(Neh. 4:8), (Ezek.

(Jer. 12:6), N1i?~ C~:W1' (Hos. 7:11), i~tp ~?7;:r (1 Sam. 17:13), and other cases

where vowels are changed for this purpose. This corresponds in some respects to one of the two types of vowel change in Arabic known as A speaker (of Arabic) may make a verb indicative or jussive ~icrb.

2

I.e. a change from a first or second person pronominal suffix to a third person one.

Part I: Chapter 7

,i11 ~,

"~

CO~':l

il~)'

i:l~'

3,t~N

'l~

nt,~N

'nt,~N

i"1'~

il)~ :J'~i

"~

"~1

SyP)' 1~

,"P:l ')~1 1l' ')~1

"~, ')~1:J

"1'~

t,~

':Ji37~ "~P'

~in

'l~

il'~T:J

'l~

i"1'~

l' J~

il1~:n

1~

i"1'~ ~:l

i1"~

il~)'

Isi~

yl':J

i~'

')~1

N'Urr, t,"lrr 1',nN 'N'i' ",~ 'ii' ~, t,'N~ ',nN

~'il 'i"~

"'~1

,~t

Nt,~ 'n~

,~

7'N' y:l'

'l~

ON

'i~,

':Ji~

'n~

,~)

,~

,~

~il':J

12'~

'N'i' O"Y~

T~

"l'

", i'''' 40nt,~N

1~'

,~t

i"1'~ ,~

~,

i"n'~

"~N

14"l' 'i~,

il'~

l,~

'n"~

,~tr ,~tr

1':Ji~

~p

", i'''' 8il'~, il:lin 11i""11 1O",~ rJ~ il~)'

13

'1~

~ ,~

1.7.3

~1'

'~1

,!, nN ,!, nN

2,~

7,l'~

'il

i""111 ~il'n

~i1

6~in

i~n

l'i~

t,~N

il'il il"~

'~1:J

'l~

"~

t,~N'

il"~

1l':J~

i""11'

'l~

67

T~

"" 'n,~ ~:Jil'

~'il 16~O'

1. FEA I 2441, fol. 4v, FEA I 2405, fol. 24r, FEA 12946, fol. 9v, FEA I 2504, fol. 2r, FEA I 2351, fol. 3r 17:JNn!). 11 2. FEA I 2441, fol. 4v, FEA I 2405, fol. 24r, FEA I 2946, fol. 9v, FEA I 2504, fol. 2r, FEA I 2351, fol. 3r + 17,P. 113. ,7:JN n7:JN: FEA 12405, fol. 24r, FEA I 2946, fol. 9v, FEA I 2504, fol. 2r, FEA I 2351, fol. 3r '7:JN n7:JN. 114. *FEA I 2437, fol. 416r. 11 5. FEA I 2441, fol. 24r lN~PJ. fol. 5r, FEA I 2351, fol. 3r ~1n. 2405, fol. 24r i17N~

11 6. FEA I 2441,

11 7. 717N!)7N '!) > FEA I 2946, fol. 9v. 11 8. FEA I

'N. 11 9. FEA I 2405, fol. 24r, FEA I 2351, fol. 3r 7Nn~'.

11

10. FEA I 2504, fol. 2r'n7N.1l11. > FEA I 2405, fol. 24r.1112. FEA I 2441, fol. 5r, FEA I 2946, fol. 9v, FEA I 2405, fol. 24r, FEA I 2504, fol. 2r i17n~'.

11 13. > FEA I

2504, fol. 2r. 1114. *FEA I 2437, fol. 416v. 11 15. FEA I 2405, fol. 24v, FEA I 2351, '~O7N.

fol. 3v'1Nl. 11 16. FEA I 2405, fol. 24v, FEA I 2946, fol. lOr, FEA I 2351, fol. 3v

68

Part I: Chapter 7

according to the vowels he uses. In a similar way, when a speaker of Hebrew uses one of the two forms (of verb), he expresses a completion in meaning or the lack of completion, as is explained above.

Part I: Chapter 7

~Tl

,~ 1n~

'7l' 2~

~

1i17 ~l'

i1~7:J

1~:J

:Jon

c~n

1"~

7l'~ ~1

,~

"l

69 n~:J'7

,~

':I~Jl7

fl':J

i1~Jl'7

,~

~n

7~l'nO

C7:Jn~

171 :J 1~:J

1. > FEA I 2405, fo1. 24v.[[2. FEA I 2946, fo1. lOr, FEA I 2351, fo1. 3v ':iI-~.

1'i7~

PART I: CHAPTER 8

ON THE FUNCTION OF PARTICLES AND THE NATURE OF THEIR EFFECT ON MEANING, INCLUDING A DISCUSSION OF THOSE WHOSE USAGE IS RESTRICTED TO SPECIFIC ITEMS AND THOSE THAT ARE USED WITH ALL ITEMS 1.8.1. A full treatment of this topic will be very extensive, so it must be postponed to its appropriate place. My intention here is to discuss only those aspects of the topic that must be mentioned in the context of the related issues that are dealt with in the preceding and following chapters. 1.8.2. Take note that particles are of three types. One type is used specifically with nouns rather than verbs. A second type is used specifically with verbs rather than nouns. A third is used with both parts of speech. The particles that are used specifically with nouns include the letters of the alphabet beth, kaph and lamedh, and the so-called 'subordinate particles' V~,

,~

,~

and ,~.

The particles that are used

specifically with verbs include the four letters of the alphabet that are attached to the future form of the verb, which are called T~

subordinate words

and

ru'~,

and the

':;>, which have the meaning of the Arabic

particles Jigii or Jan. The particles that are used with both parts of speech include the letters of the alphabet heh, waw, mem and shin, and the subordinate words separate chapter.

O~,

O~

etc. All of these will be dealt with fully in a

PART I: CHAPTER 8

rr1:J' N~'

Ni11'l1Nl1 37~N' 17'

,~

I:p1n7N CN~n 1111W' N~'

'£)

Ni1)~

1" i'=>~n ''':J)'' ~,i l'on' iTi"l'n, iT,£) m~ ,:J ~, ~

~:J

l::JN::J

'£)

:J~'

~'iT ,~

3

niW

1~'

1.8.1.

2,~i'

iTl'~

m,n', co~,

~iT'n

f=>'

~iTn'm

CO~' ~:J'

:IN ~in ~'in

1~

'n~

~:J

7!)

iT'£)

1~'

T'W~

l"~i

'~n C'~

~i'no

5~'in

1~

fn=>~'£)

~'in

1~

C'~=> ",~ ,~

,i'o

'~:Jpno, ')l~:J

~,

~,

~iT'

1. *FEA I 2437, [01. 416v. 1 FEA I 2946, [01. lOr T~Nn7 11

,~

10~:J 'i£)~

')l~:J ~'in

1~

ON C'~=>

Ol,

iT,

[01. Sv '~npN.

'11' fn=>~'

1~ ~iT'

~

C~"'

nl:'N iT~O'

iT£)'=>~

1" 71inWn ~=>, 6

1~0i"

'l£)~:J

1~'

1.8.2.

'l£)~

iT'£) 1~' ~'in

~,

C'l~

~iT')m

f=>'

iT~O'

,~

91~inW

'l£)~

CO~':J

8C'~=>

iTl':J~

'iT

i "l'

11'

t,N, t,11' 7~

~

:Ji~

4iT~'n

:J~

'£) c'i'n

:IN:J7N. 11 2. FEA I 2441,

3. > FEA I 240S, [01. 24v. 11 4. FEA I 2946, [01. 10r jJ~'pn.

11

S. *FEA 12437, [01. 417r. 116. 73.'!l7N T" > FEA I 2946, [01. 10r. 11 7. FEA I 2441, [01. Sv, FEA I 2946, [01. 10r, FEA I 2S04, [01. 2v l1n1Zr. 11 8. FEA I 2946, [01. 10r

C'N':J:J. FEA I 2441, [01. Sv C'N':J7N:J. 11 9. FEA I 2441, [01. Sv, FEA I 2946, [01. l3v lN1mVN7N.1I10. FEA I 2441, [01. Sv n':J.

Part I: Chapter 8

72

The effect of attaching beth to a noun may be to make it a

1.8.3.

complement of a verb, for example C:1¥~f

il.1il; ,~

~#J;li

'T:l7?~J;i

(Exod. 10:2),

T';tn~1

(Deut. 9:20), ~! 'r:~ i1!~ ,.t~ 9'?D (Exod. 17: 12), and similar cases. It may be attached to the noun,

since the noun expresses the circumstances of some other item, the meaning of the expression being 'in something' rather than 'by or with something', for example nlJ!,~

r1.~7

nlJ'p~

C:P-~

'W~l

rl~

'W~l

7~

(Deut. 5:8), i~7Pf

b:~o/ 7!?1~'

'W~

(2 Kings 4:42),

and similar cases. 1.8.4. The effect of attaching kaph to a noun is to express a comparison,

for example "7-~i;T

Ti~,?W

(Psa. 113:5), 'T:l1~f

l~N C:~

(Gen. 48:5), ~)"Ji7

ilr"~

.,~

(Psa. 22:15), and other cases.

1.8.5. The effect of attaching lamedh to a noun is to express possession,

for example

ilJn"7 '~WiJ-l,!

(Psa. 118 :20), Ti~l

ilJn"? ::J 1P 7~

(Jud. 7:20), to express purpose, for example ~rn? 10:14),

i7?t97 'D~

~N?1

'1:lN~

(Dan.

(1 Chron. 7:20), and also to express other

senses, which I have omitted to mention here, just as I have omitted to mention many of the senses of other particles, due to the fact that these will be dealt with later. 1.8.6. The effect of combining

T~

and

,~

with a noun is to express the

beginning and the end of something, in accordance with what has been stated previously in the definition of a particle. l A single letter mem is used in the same way as T~, 5:4). The particles example

717

7:~ij-V

T~

i7?t;T~

(Lev. 9:19).

1

See §1.3.3.

and

m~-"?

~

for example ilt~-'

hQ~T:l

(1 Kings

may also express a partitive relation, for (Prov. 22:9), 'itpjT~

C"~7tm-n,

Part I: Chapter 8

l'37~N

PN~'

il:J

",':l '~N

CON'N "37 N:J'N ,,:>,

'~J"1

,~

1':>" il"'" t,1'~

m,:>,

N~,6

C'~:l

'~N

,~t

"i "", 'J"1~£)

"n~

"nN~

1.8.3.

J"1t,t,1' J"1rt ip:>

il"37 ,:>,n 'p' il'Nn~ ip:> 'W,N:J N, 'W,N ,~

3r'Nt, J"1n~

",p:>

O"Y~:l'

'1JNJ"1rt 7"rtN:l'

u,t,j?Y:l t,~

7:l'N~

73

O'~:l

'~N

J"1n~

Nil.37~

,,:>, ,'nNm s'J'rtt,N ,~ ,t, ,'rt' 7W~'

O'~

'1~rt

r'N:l

4", ilN:JWN'

~N:>'

il"37

2rt~

1.8.4.

rtt ip:> "~, il"'37 CN"N ,,:>, ,'nNm 1.8.5. ,'nN 'N':l" 1J':lrtt" J"1N:l' ip:> 7'1"lt" ,~t :l,n Nil'~ 1N'N Niln'~ 'n'N N'~" 1~ ", """ '~nJt,

y,,,",

'nN' il'N"'N N,n:JN' 6il"37 '1" 7,,;'n il"~'N C'~N il,n ,~ ip:> y'37:Jn", rtW '1" nO£)J"1~

t,'Nrt r~'

,~rt

r~

"37 N'N:>nN Nil"" N~

7~ ,~

N~

,~

,,:>, ,'nNm 1.8.6. N~ :Jon NilNiln.lN' ip:> ", ,~ r~ ,;.~

O':lt,nrt J"1N' t"t, '~nt,

rJ"1J

1. *FEA I 2437, fo!' 417v. 112. > FEA I 2441, fo!' 6r, FEA I 2946, fo!' 13v, FEA I

f1N7 nnn7:) > FEA I 2441, fo!' 6r, FEA I 2946, fo!' 13v, FEA I 2405, fo!' 3r. 11 4. 17' nN:J1VN': FEA I 2441, fo!' 6r, FEA I 2946, fo!' 13v, FEA I 2405, fo!' 3r nnN:J1VN'. 5. > FEA I 2441, fo!' 6r: u'n7N ,>:>. 11 6. > FEA I 2946, fo!'

2405, fo!' 3r. 11 3.

13v. 117. *FEA I 2437, fo!' 418r.

74

Part I: Chapter 8

I.S.7. The effect of combining the particle ?~

with a noun is similar, in

some cases, to the effect of the particle 1~,

for example ?:P~

?:D-~

~:l7,

(Psa. 84:8). It may also express the transfer of the action of a

njn;

verb onto the object of the action, for example nwb-?~ (Exod. 6: 10), ~?-

~?-

~jl

1J~;

(Ezek. 21: 19).

I.S.S. The effect of combining the particle ?~

with a noun is to give the

sense of 'upon something', which may be 'upon something else',z and so forth, for example 1:9), ~:ltP.

nll1;

rl~iJ-?

?J~'i

l'1PT7?-~

N$.~iJ-?

~;,

(1 Sam.

(Ezek. 26:16).

I.S.9. The effect of attaching the letters n)'N to a verb is to transform the imperative into the present or future tense, for example,

1~,

1~,

1::11' 1::11) 1::1111. "-:' "-:' .. -: I.S.10. The effect of combining T~

with a verb is to (express a desire) to

guard against harm and (in so doing) to reveal one's purpose, for example

'~i)1

i:t~-TN (Gen. 32:12), 1}:lh~ C37n (Exod. 13: 17). ..

~t;l-T

T

I.S.11. The effect of the particle apodosis, for example ,~i? (Deut. 22:8), 1~

2

(Prov. 22:25), CP~-T

C',~tp

ni?~

tVy? ';9~

'~

is to express a condition and its

l)'Y.7¥1 tVll! n:? h~1} 'i' 1~,¥ h~1} 'i' (Exod. 21 :2).

This seems to be referring to the occurrence of a second phrase with 7~

qualifies a preceding phrase with 7~.

This is found in the cited verse 1 Sam. 1:9.

that

Part I: Chapter 8

r~:J

.,~ ~il:J

'31 i"n~ ,~

T~ 1",~n

"1~t,N

~:Jn"

~,

"1~

~in

il'~;

::Jii''' il"'~

t,N ,,:J, i"n~m

'i" t,," t,N t,'"~

,~t"

,11'

.,~

ili""

1.8.7.

i'~

~,

t,N ,!, ,:l," ii':J 1r&~

.,~

2,~

.,~

t,31 ,,:J, i"n~m 1.8.8. ,:lr&l' r'N11 t,31 NO~1 t,31 :lr&l,' ii':J ",

,~

.,'tV~

.,~

il"'~

li);N'~

,:l,' ':l'N ,:l, ':l~

75

,,:J, 3~'in

,m

m':J ~i

i"n~m

'~:J

1.8.9.

~':Jino

,~

':l~ ~'tV:J"

il~

O"~,

T~

4r~

il"'~

"~'N

Tinn"

"1t,N~

r~

r~

'~1

,,:J, i"n~m N':l' r~

1.8.10.

ii':J ri"'~

03111 r&I," ~':l

1~:l

,~

s'::l31' O'~r&I

r&Ir&I

s,m "::l31 ':l31~j? ~T;"'

Ui'tV"

'~i"nm

7,llt, 61j?3~

1.8.11.

~'r&l31

1. FEA I 2441, fo1. 6r, FEA I 2504, fo1. 3r '11". 11 2. FEA I 2441, fo1. 6r, FEA I 2504,

fo1. 3r "1'!)?J~. 2504, fo1. 3v

113. FEA I 2441, fo1. 6v ~'n.

,m,.

114. *FEA I 2437, fo1. 41Sv. 11 5. FEA I

11 6. > FEA I 2441, fo1. 6v. 11 7. > FEA I 2441, fo1. 6v, FEA I

2504, fo1. 3v. 11 S. > FEA I 2441, fo1. 6v, FEA I 2504, fo1. 3v.

76

Part I: Chapter 8

1.8.12. The effect of combining the letter heh with either a verb or a noun

is to express a question, for example (Deut. 4:33), 0J~

i?-ltp~n

i7 Oi?o/n (Gen. 29:6),O¥

37p-wn

(Jer. 16:20). The use of heh in the sense of

the Arabic definite article Jal- is restricted to nouns. 1.8.13. The effect of attaching waw to nouns and verbs is to express

coordination, for example ~tp¥ i~

~lfO/

T'in~1

ilWb~

(Exod. 11: 10), l)o/~

(Gen. 43:34). When it is used to open (a sentence or

passage), it is only combined with nouns, for example 37j~ i~o/

ilJ-n~

(Gen. 4: 1), il.~·'

ilJ~

il'.pb~

0i~J:I1

(Exod. 3: 1). Its usage to

bring about a change from the past to the future or from the future to the past is restricted to verbs, since this is not possible in nouns, e.g.

'9ry7~

il1;'~

(Deut. 7:12), :fp~,

Q

'~O/1

•

:np}l (Gen. 37:1), and similar cases.

1.8.14. As for the effect of combining the letter mem with nouns and

verbs, this has already been described sufficiently with regard to nouns. With regard to verbs, the effect is to transform an imperative form into a noun of agent. When, for example, mem is attached to the noun of agent ,~

1??

'~1,

this becomes

77

Part I: Chapter 8

Nil7N 11':) 737£)7N' CON7N lil"£) 1,nw" NI':) ,"nNm

CV V~r&J

2,t, c,t,r&Jrr ,m

~"'37nN

CN7'

~7N

1.8.12.

CNil£)nON77 Nl':)il"737 il7:JN'7N

C'N't, rrr&Jv'rr

":J37I':):J Nil7N mN:J N'N'

CON7N Nil:J ''£):IN ":J '377N .,£)

rrr&Jo,

17'P:J ~37

N,n:JN77

rrr&Jo, 11':) .,£)

'N

Nl':)il"737 'N'7N 7':J' ,"nNm

3,OV "!)r&J" ,nr&J" ,r&JV f"rrN' 4,nr&JN rr," nN V" C'Nrr, ip:J CON7N Nil:J ''£):IN N7 :JpnOI':) "7N ":!rNI':) 11':) mN :J N'N' rrv" rr'rr n:JN:J

N'N'

5

6

17 '

i1:J1':)

737£)7N

Nil:J

1'rrt,N

'"

"37n7

:li'V' :lr&J"

.,£)

1.8.13.

ION~1':)

'p

8,,£)n

'0r&J,

T

Nl':)il"737

":!rNI':)

"7N

N7 :J pnol':)

CON7N 17 " 9 Nl':)il7Nn1':)N'

17 'P:J

C"1':)7N 7':J'

7

,"nNm

CON il"737 Nil7':J':J il''':!rl':) 'il 737£)7N "£)' li~:!rpJ 'N:!r il"737 C"7:)7N 7':J':J

,:l,

FEA I 2504, fo1. 3v. 114. 'n1V~

CON7N

17'P:J N'7:)N i1:J,:J '37:J 737N£) 737N£) CON

1. FEA I 2441, fa!. 6v + iI'~.

1.8.14.

,:l'0

112. FEA I 2441, fo1. 6v ". 11 3. > FEA I 2441, fo1. 6v,

mn n~

> FEA I 2441, fo1. 6v, FEA I 2504, fo1. 3v. 11

5. FEA I 2441, fo1. 6v, FEA I 2504, fo1. 3v + 'i')77. 116. FEA I 2441, fo1. 6v, FEA I 2504, fo1. 3v ':Jino~.

117. FEA I 2441, fo1. 6v ':Jino~.

FEA I 2441, fo1. 6v "~)'. 7r, FEA I 2504, fo1. 3v 'i~.

118. *FEA I 2437, fo1. 419r I

119. FEA I 2504, fo1. 3v ~iI'n. 1111. FEA I 2441, fo1. 7r ilU0i':J.

1110. FEA I 2441, fo1.

78

Part I: Chapter 8

1.8.15. The effect of attaching shin to nouns and verbs is to express an attribute, since it has the meaning of iW~, (Jud. 6:17), iT,¥t;rliTTi? ~?W

for example iJ~17?

(Cant. 4:2), r$~l

1.8.16. The effect of combining C~

T6N'~W

rl~i!

(Psa. 137:9).

with nouns and verbs is to express a

N7

condition and apodosis, for example i1~t;r (Exod. 19:13), ~7?Nn

iTl1~W

:m?

tr>.,~-C

CD~i?tp

iT!?iJ:P -C~

~Nn-C

(lsa. 1:19),

and also to divide something into various possibilities, for example,

iTtl-c~

N,;j ~i1¥,

N7-C~1

iT~?o/J

(Num. 13 :20), iT,~

P~Nl-"1

~}'7?-C

(Eec. 5: 11),

~i1¥-C

(Num. 32:29-30).

1.8.17. The effect of combining the particle C~

with nouns and verbs is to

...

3'r",~1

liJ-C~

express a special type of conjoining, which has the meaning of coordination. These, however, are not real forms of conjoining and coordination, for example, Ni!?9-C~ (Jer. 51:12), "J:l??i?iJ C~1

p.-C~

(Gen. 24:25), iTtp~-C

(Exod. 6:4).

1.8.18. One particle may be combined with another with the result that their original meaning changes. The particle

N7, for example, expresses

negation, but when it is combined with heh it turns into an assertion, as in

C"W"7o/ 18:17).

'97. 'T:11T-9

N7t1 (Prov. 22:20), '9"7~

"T:l~

~7t1

(2 Chron.

Part I: Chapter 8

79

"l37t.l:J NmN7 n37l77 Nt.li1"737 T"W7N 7':J' ,"nNm 'r&I~

I.S.15.

r!)J' 2tM"r&I rtYM,rt rc ,t,31r&1 1,!:I.'C rtn~&I C~

r'~t

!:I.'~

rtt, C~

~t,

C~

i17'P:J NT.i7N' 'O'W77 Nt.li1"737

C~,

~'rt

cn310r&l' 3'!:I.,n C~

7':J' ,"nNm

rt'M' ~t,

r&I'~

I.S.16.

C~

rtCrt!:l.

ip:J i17t.lnn" Nt.l "7N "W7N iit.l0p7, 4,t~n

rtJOr&lM 'l 'J!:I.'

,7'P:J

r!:l.'~

'J!:I. "!:I.31'

C~

M!:I.'M C~,

~31C

5C~ "!:I.31'

,i1 "'7N i1£lN~7 Tt.l r'~:Jt.l Cl ip:J ,7" T""p"pn ~'O37

:J '~7

N7'

i1£lN~:J

Nt.li1"737 Cl 7':J' ,"nNm I.S.17. 0"7 TN:J TN' ~'037N "l37t.l:J

'n'C'i'M Cl' Mr&l31 Cl ~'!)O

Cl r!:l.n

nlN:J Nt.l37 Ni1Nl37t.l ,""n"£l f37:J "737 ~"n7N f37:J 67:J," 'p' I.S.lS. NnN:JnN n'N~ Ni17N 9n7:J, N'N£l "£l)77 "i1 "n7N ~t, ,m 8i1"737 l"t,~ 'no~ ~t,M IOC'r&I,t,r&I,t" n!:l.~ ~t,M ip:J

7

1. FEA I 2504, fo1. 3v + '~l).

\I 2. FEA I 2441, fo1. 7r, FEA I 2504, fo1. 4r

3. > FEA I 2441, fo1. 7r. \14. > FEA I 2441, fo1. 7r, FEA I 2504, fo1. 4r.

11

Tn~'1Z7.

\I

5. FEA I

2437, fo1. 419v. \16. FEA I 2946, fo1. 12r, FEA I 2504, fo1. 4r 7:1,n \I 7. FEA I 2441, fo1. 7r, FEA I 2504, fo1. 4r C:l'7~.

9. FEA I 2504, fo1. 4r + ~il'71.

l~:I.

\I 8. > FEA I 2441, fo1. 7r, FEA I 2504, fo1. 4r. \I \110. > FEA I 2441, fo1. 7v. \Ill. FEA I 2441, fo1. 7v

PART I: CHAPTER 9

ON THE GENERAL CATEGORY OF NOUNS 1.9.1. Nouns can be divided into two types. One of these is 'defective' in

that such nouns do not express complete sense without a context, for example '~,

;,?? itp~,

The other type is 'complete', since somebody who

hears it is able to understand it without a context. This type is divided into two classes: 'indefinite' and 'definite'. The indefinite class is divided further into the two sub-classes of 'motionless' and 'inflectable'. The term 'motionless noun' does not refer to inanimate entities such as ('earth'),

T~t\

f1.t\

(,stone') and the like. Rather, in the terminology of

grammarians who have addressed this issue a noun that is not inflected is called 'motionless'. They may be living creatures or may be inanimate entities and dead creatures. They may also be abstractions, such as and i~! etc. Such a noun is called 'motionless' since it cannot undergo any inflection, which is analogous to

milj?, miQW,

;,~n'9tp

f~lJ

an inanimate entity that cannot undergo decay.

PART I: CHAPTER 9

3'~N

'0 ml fi'Nl N~i1n

4

T'~0i

CNn 1:JN7N' i1l'1i' 1'l T~

i1~37'

i11:Jl T':J1~

i1:J i1'N~7

'1i' N~'

12N1i1 7i1N

l1nN7~

13 FEA I 2504, fol. 5v f37::J "N ilnm~'N N~O'.

11 5. *FEA I 2437, fol. 353v. 11 6. FEA I 2584, fol. Iv C'l1J'37'. 11 7. FEA I 2584, fol. Iv N~iI'n.

118. FEA I 2441, fol. 9r, FEA I 2405, fol. 27r, FEA I 2504,

fol. 5v, FEA 12584, fol. Iv. FEA I 2437, fol. 353v N~il'O. repeats by mistake 9"n'N l~

NilN'O N~

119. FEA I 2405, fol. 27r

'N iln!'N' 'N,n37N'N 'El. 1110. FEA I

2441, fol. 9r, FEA I 2405, fol. 27r, FEA I 2946, fol. 14v, FEA I 2504, fol. 5v, FEA I 2584, fol. Iv '::IN'N. 1111. FEA I 2504, fol. 5v nNN). 1112. FEA I 2504, fol. 5v'rn. 11 13. > FEA I 2946, fol. 14v. 1114. *FEA I 2437, fol. 354r. illS. FEA I 2584, fol. Iv N"N. 1116. FEA I 2405, fol. 27r n::Jnn. 1117. FEA I 2441, fol. 9v, FEA I 2504, fol. 6r N~iI'El.

PART I: CHAPTER 12

ON THE INITIAL ITEM AND ITS PREDICATE 1.12.1. If two items are combined, one being definite and the other indefinite, it is usual for the definite item to be placed first as 'the initial item' and for the indefinite item to be placed after it as a predicate, for (Num. 13 :29), TP.! CJ:l1~ (Gen. 24: 1), illl1; example :Jy?i' P7.?~ fJ)Q (lsa. 42:21), and similar cases. Such elements of speech are called 'initial item' and 'predicate'. Neither one of these can express meaning without the other. To be more precise, the meaning of the construction is expressed by the predicate, but you begin with a definite noun in initial position to alert the hearer as to the item about which you wish to inform him, then you present its predicate after it. The predicate is the item expressing propositional information since it can be judged to be true or false, which is not the case with the initial item. You present the initial item in order to connect its predicate to it. The predicate may acquire definiteness by being conjoined to a first or second person pronoun, for

~),7

'?n~

~i}

example 'l:~

I iljil; illl1; ~)i?;l7t

(lsa. 41:8), ~7 27:19) .

~)'[.i!$

iljil;

(Deut. 6:4),

(Isa. 33:22), 'i~

illl1; 1J7ttv illl1;

il}l1; ~)tp

11111;

')1 (2 Sam. 3:18), C!'1~ (Psa. 121:5), 1~:P 'W¥ (Gen.

PART I: CHAPTER 12

n1:J) 1:JN7N1 n:l137~

N~n1

21N~

m37 n1:J)7N 1':JNm N1:J~

r~n

,~

N1:J~

!l~"

ON7:J7N

'n n1'N:l7N 7::J n::J)117

8

,~

,~

'!lr~

1::J:J7N::J '737 37~N0 1n 1::J:J7N:l

11'11N N~)1

N1:J~7

~'137N

14",

"!l11

13~'r

'J:;S~

"':;'!l '~1

,~

,Sy ~N7.

2405, fol. 27v, FEA 12946, fol. 14v, FEA I 2504, fol. 6r TN~O.

i17.

T~.

,~

'Ji"n~ ,~ 11 2. FEA I

11 3. FEA 12405, fol.

114. FEA I 2441, fol. 9v, FEA I 2405, fol. 28r, FEA I

2946, fol. 14v, FEA I 2504, fol. 6r 14v, FEA I 2504, fol. 6r

:J~N'

"'i':J

1. *FEA I 2437, fol. 354r. 1FEA I 2946, fol. 14v ['1L'l' ~)N]n7 7v, FEA I 2504, fol. 6r +

111

111::J:J7N::J ::J011:J'

12,nN ,!, U':-rSN ,!,

Or'!l~

N~)1

'111::J11

'7N n:lN~7J

,!, 'J~

1':l' N71 N1::J:J1

1N7 1N:l0~7

n1::J:J n'7N 1)0117 9N1:J~7

11:J'7

171 7N1~

N~n1

IO

1'~

3

n::J n1::J:J11 1'111 N~

::J'1:J117N1 i"1~7N

1N 07:J1~N

N1::J:J

n71i':J

00N7N::J

n137::J n1::J:J::J '11N11 011 n':l 1N7~n'

i'S~l1

1:JN7N 111 71~

1.12.1.

0'1i'11 ni17N:l

5':l n7'::J0 N1n 4N~

n:l137~N

N71N

N1N

11:J'7 n:l137~N

7i't t:m'!l~ 6N~0'

37~1"N

N~!).

11 5. FEA I 2405, fol. 27v, FEA 12946, fol.

11 6. FEA I 2405, fol. 28r, FEA I 2946, fol. 14v '~O.

11

7. *FEA I 2437, fol. 354v. 11 8. > FEA I 2504, fol. 6r. 11 9. FEA I 2405, fol. 28r ~'n7N.

11 10. FEA I 2504, fol. 6r +

'V,. 11 11. FEA I 2441, fol. 9v, FEA I 2405,

fol. 28r, FEA I 2946, fol. 16r, FEA I 2504, fol. 6r '~:l7N. FEA I 2946, fol. 16r, FEA 12504, fol. 6r ,nN ~\.

1112. > FEA I 2405, fol. 28r, 1113. > FEA I 2405, fol. 28r, FEA I

2946, fol. 16r, FEA I 2504, fol. 6r. 1114. FEA I 2504, fol. 6r "".

94

Part I: Chapter 12

1.12.2. One of the distinctive features of this construction is that the particle ':;> or the verb i~J (Psa. 75:8), 17P?

~l:?tv

may be used in it, for example C,~-?

ii}ii; i,~Jl

(Zech. 14:9) and similar cases.

1.12.3. Since no meaning is conveyed by making a completely indefinite element the initial item, this is not permitted. This is because if you were to say

:npi' tV'~

and then broke off, you would not convey any

meaning to the hearer, since '~i371

:J~itV

tV'~

etc. could (be a noun

and) its attributive adjectives. If, however, the indefinite noun is brought near to the recognition of the hearer by some kind of link, this! is permitted, for example ,~¥ 21:8), C~1-ijJ

N,iijJ Ci~

"Ntp

';7.

"~9

tv'~

(1 Sam.

it. tV'~ (Jud. 19:1), and similar cases. The aim of the construction is to achieve the conveyance of a message. If

'Pfl:f

the hearer is familiar with some part of the 'initial item and predicate' construction that somebody else utters, it is permissible, for example

,)'ii'N iiiii', which is used in two circumstances. One of these is to •• ',": T: criticize those who give up (the worship of the Lord), as in the words of Abijah to Jeroboam and his companions ')n~

ii}ii; ')r;9~l

(2 Chron.

13: 10). This is like somebody who informs somebody of something that he considers to be meaningful on account of his failure to do it. 2 The other circumstance is where it is used to draw close to the Lord when it is recited, as we say, for example, '!J~

I iijii; U'n~

iijii; (Deut. 6:4).

!

I.e. the occurrence of an indefinite noun as the initial item.

2

The meaning of this statement is not completely clear. It may refer to the fact that an

utterance has a purpose and conveys meaning when it defeats the expectations of the hearer.

Part I: Chapter 12

,= 17'P:J 2i1"7~

m"i11,w7 'N

,= 7':J1 l i1n~N7

"0'

N~i17n' 07 i11"N!J 4i1~n7N n1!JN N~7

,~

n:JO~N'

:l~"

1~

6~'N

171 i"'" 7'0'11' ~=,

."s,., N~'

O"DN ,rr

~N07

IN:J 91N7, i11"N!J7N 7'~n

,~=

i17'P:J i1i:J:J' N1n:J~7

1~tJ7N

O'rr'N

N~

N~'

i17~"

'MN ,~ U'rr'N ,~

1.12.3.

10n" l':J TN,s'7 ~N07

0i1!J 1~

~'N

'l ",

'Yl1J

i1i:J:l7N n:J ip

~'N

":l1~

,i1 171 "!J 8N~i7' 1~

N~i1s'

i1i"" i1:J "nN" N~:J

N!Ji~

1"i1s', 111nN7 171 10n N~:l!J

'J'rr'N ,~ 'JMJN' i1:JNn~'

P"itJ "7~

rr'rr, 3UD'~

~'N

100NOPN r~:J

12"7~

171!J

1.12.2.

n7p '7 1N sNi17~nO

17'P:J 171 10n m"ip:J ~N07

"7~

1~'

i1i:J:l7N:J N1n:JN7N "!J P" 07 N~7'

N1N!J i1!JN~' ~'N

95

N7 N~

0~:Ji"7 i11"!Jno" N~:J

'Jr~N

,~

i1":JN 7'P:J 1"7tJ:~N i:J:J' 1~

'is~

13"Ns'

N:l7'P:J 171 fhN7n:J Is:i?li i1'7N 14:J",pn7N

1. FEA I 2405, fo1. 28r, FEA I 2946, fo1. 16r. FEA I 2437, fo1. 254v. Ton

l't~.

11

2. > FEA I 2946, fo1. 16r. 113. *FEA I 2437, fo1. 355r. 11 4. FEA I 2504, fo1. 6v jmn~7l't.

115. FEA I 2441, fo1. lOr, FEA 12405, fo1. 28r, FEA I 2946, fo1. 16r, FEA I 2504, fo1. 6v 17' 7l't~31nO.

116. > FEA I 2441, fo1. 10r. 117. Different word order in

FEA I 2441, fo1. 10r, FEA I 2405, fo1. 28r, FEA I 2946, fo1. 16r, FEA I 2504, fo1. 6v :I:)11l" l't31~7D.I9

'~31.

11 8. FEA I 2441, fo1. 10r, FEA I 2405, fo1. 28v, FEA I 2504, fo1. 6v FEA I 2441, fo1. 10r, FEA I 2946, fo1. 16v 1'71.1110. FEA I 2504, fo1.

6v bl'ti'l't. 1111. *FEA I 2437, fo1. 355v. 1112. FEA I 2441, fo1. 10r, FEA I 2405, fo1. 28v, FEA I 2504, fo1. 6v + i"'~,

1113. FEA I 2946, fo1. 16v ,l't). 1114. FEA I 2405,

fo1. 28v, FEA I 2946, fo1. 16v :I'i'n7l't.1115. FEA I 2441, fo1. 10r '731n.

96

Part I: Chapter 12

1.12.4. In an utterance it is necessary to attain a purpose, since this makes

it successful. Any utterance that lacks purpose is not appropriate, even when it consists of an initial item and predicate that are definite and indefinite. Examples of this are when somebody says 'Snow is cold' or 'Fire is hot'.

Part I: Chapter 12

Ton' ~, ~"1:

i17~

0~7:J

Ton'

i1J,:J 17~

'~)7

"'~:1

'£)

i71~

7'~P

07 0~7:J

f'"

97

7'~n T~

i1':J7~£) f'7~

7'P:J i1,:J), i1£)'7~

1.12.4.

i1J17 17£)'~

17~ i1'~n

,:1:J,

PART I: CHAPTER 13

ON DEFINITE AND INDEFINITE Section on indefinite 1.13.1. Every noun is a general term that may refer to two or more

specific items. It is indefinite when one member of a class is not distinguished from the class as a whole, as is the case with the words tz)'~ and O~,

etc. This is because if you say tz)'~

'J:)~l

and O~

'T:l1~,

it is

not specifically indicated to the hearer who from the class of 'men' you saw, nor which horse from the class of 'horses' you mounted. So, when, as here, the speaker does not intend to refer to one specific member of a class by the indefinite form, he refers to the class as a whole, or at least to a certain subclass of this, as in r'l~-;n!J1

rl.*iJ-'~

~p';l

~;l'1(Gen.

1:20), ,; i6

tv~:n

ilp,iJ:P

(Gen. 1:24),

m';0/ '7-'iJ;l (Gen. 32:6).

1.13.2. An indefinite noun falls into two types. The first is where the

noun is indefinite in all circumstances and does not entail a specific reference to any particular item in such a way that it is distinguished from

PART I: CHAPTER 13

il1:J.:17N '£l 7~£l T"7Jn' N7 1N il1:J.:1 3'il 2N137~' '1i' C7

N7J'

0'0, ~'N

l'mN C37 CON 7:J

17'P:J

0'0 , f1!l!)', ~'N

O.:1i7N

N1il N7J il7'P:J C7:Jn7J7N 1~P' 1':J.:1n7N

P'1~

,t,

'rf',

i1.l'37:J

:J1~7

1nN'

il:J

17J 17J 377JN077 l"37n'

0.li7N 'N

t,V ~'V

r'Nrf

5

C7 N1N

'737

rfOrf!l ip:J i1.l7J r'~:J7

,~

O.:1i7N

, f1'N' n7p N1N 1.lN7 4N7JilN1i7J

O.li 17J 01£l 'N N7' n'N1 7Ni17N

IN:J

17J

1.13.1.

~W'

1717£l n:J:J1 7':J7N

6

17J

0.l,,7N

N1nN' 37'7Ji7

8r'N

il7':J0

N7'Nm7J

,f1'", 70~" 9,~"

37'7Ji ll'£l il1:J.l CON7N l':J N7Jil1nN lOl'7JOP il1:J.l7N' :IN:JON 1nN 17J il:J

12 tt137,

N7J il'£l 1'137' C7

1. *FEA I 2437, fo1. 355v. 11 FEA I 2946, fo1. 16v'~ ~jTim.

2. FEA I 2946, fo1. 16v ~'3.

ilV3.' n'~

1.13.2.

N7J il7N1nN

:J~'.

11

11 3. *FEA I 2437, fo1. 356r. 114. FEA 12504, fo1. 7r

115. FEA I 2441, fo1. lOr, FEA I 2946, fo1. 16v, FEA I 2504, fo1. 7r + "::Jji. 11 6. FEA I 2441, fo1. 10r, FEA I 2504, fo1. 7r + N~.

11 7. FEA I 2504, fo1. 7r

lV~i'.

11

8. > FEA I 2441, fo1. 10v, FEA I 4478, fo1. 76r, FEA I 2504, fo1. 7r. 119. FEA I 2441, fo1. 10v, FEA I 2504, fo1. 7r + jT~Nm. 2504, fo1. 7r 1~.

1110. FEA I 2504, fo1. 7r l~t:ji.

1112. *FEA I 2437, fo1. 356v.

11 11. FEA I

Part I: Chapter 13

100

similar items of the class, e.g. tV'~,

0'0, etc. The second type is where a

noun is at first definite, on account of the fact that it has one specific referent that can be identified from others, but when one or more other referents come to share with it the same distinctive features, the noun becomes indefinite and needs some other item (combined with it) to make it definite. An example of this is when a man is called Reuben and this is a proper noun that has definite status among his people without the need to combine it with any other item, since there is nobody else who shares this name with him. If, however, there were many people who had this name, it would be indefinite, on account of the fact that (the referent of the noun) could not be identified without having something combined with the noun, as in, for example, ::fp?,':-p T~'2\l

or '~it;)J

P'2'\l, etc.

1.13.3. One of the characteristic features of an indefinite item is that the

word kam ('How many?') may be combined with it in Arabic and the word

in Hebrew, for example kam sana cumruka? ('How old are iJ7f~

yoU?'),l kam walad laka? ('How many children do you have?) and

C'~W

iJp,~

(Zech. 7:3), C'~

iJp,~-'

(1 Kings 22:16), ni~

'7~

iF

iJ~

ni2'\wm (Job 13:23), and similar cases. fI

T

-

:

1.13.4.

(An indefinite expression) logically precedes a definite

expression, since a person can legitimately be referred to by the designation 'a person' on account of his appearance, by which he differs from other species, before he can be given the designation of Reuben or some other proper name. It follows from this and other reasons, that indefinite nouns would naturally be more numerous than definite nouns. Indefinite nouns, moreover, differ from one another in their degree of indefiniteness. The more general a noun is in reference, the more indefinite and less specific it is. Surely you see that what may be referred to by the noun 'something' is more indefinite than what may be referred 1 Literally:

How many years is your age?

Part I: Chapter 13

101

TX ')Xn7X' X~i1"l' 0'0, ~'N 17n~ i17Xn~ T~ ~":sm7X i1:J'X'!1J i1'X~ i1X'O T~ i1T"~n7 i1~'37 X7'X 00X7X 11:J' 3i1,:J) ,')'n 'X~ 'XT X~, ,::>X i1"l T~ TX~ 2i1~ X~, TXO)X 4i1'~on:> 17" ,::>x ,~x '7X i1~"37n ,~ l'nnx, T'~ X~"37 X~73 x~o p:>'~ P'X~ m',i' "l T~ i1~' T~ OX)7X ,~ ,n::> x'~ OOX7X X,i1 ,~ si1::>'X'!1J' T~ 0'377 TX~ m"i'~ X7X i1~ i1~'37X 0'377 i1,::» 7~n 17'::> i1~OX ',i~ ',i' X~ 'x '~O:T T:l'N' 'x :li'1" T:l T:l'N' 7'i'n T"i1 '~37X

,~

Xi1'737 0::> 7'::>' Ton 6i1'::»7X 17'i'::>' 17 '7' 0::> 1'~37 mo 0::> 17'i'::> J1'N~n

J1,J'1'

,t,

:TO!)

C'01~

i1~X73

T~'

')X~37

:TO!)'1'

1.13.3.

,~

C' J~

17'

:TO!), :TO!) :Tt i1X~'!J

i1'~On7X

i'nno' TXO)X7X 'x i1~'37X T~ i'~oxm 1.13.4. T~ i1"l TXO)X7X i"x~ Xi1~ 'n7x i1"~7X 7ix7 TXO.l~ T~ i1"l 'x T:l'N~ i1'~On7X i1i'xi'nnox 7~i' OX.liX7X nX'::»7X X~O7 mx::> i1X'O X~7' 17'~ 70X737X7X X~O r37~ '737 nX'::>.l7X r37~ 7~" ~'X37 X~O7 T~ ,n:Jx T~ ,::»X TX::> X7'~!1J "TX OOX7X TX::> X~ 7:>~ ,'::>m7X ,~ T~ ,::»X '!1J~ i1'~On7 i'nO~7x TX 9',n 8'7X f::>X7X

l~

1. 7m~

il7Nn~ il7Nn~.

l~:

FEA I 2441, fo1. 10v, FEA I 2504, fo1. 7r c'i'n N~

::lon

11 2. > FEA I 2504, fo1. 7r. 11 3. FEA I 2504, fo1. 7r + "J'M1. 11 4. FEA I

2504, fo1. 7r iln'~o.15

FEA I 2504, fo1. 7v il'i1V'. 116. *FEA 12437, fo1. 357r. 11

7. FEA I 2441, fo1. llr + 7Ni" 'i'!).118. *FEA I 2437, fo1. 357v.1I9. FEA I 2504, fo1. 7v+'7N.

102

Part I: Chapter 13

to as 'something present', since the designation 'something' subsumes both 'something present' and also 'something absent'. The designation 'something present' is more indefinite than 'something newly created', since this subsumes both 'something newly created' and 'something old'. You may continue this onwards with an analogous type of argument. The fewer are the items that a noun can refer to, the greater is its degree of definiteness. The more numerous are the items to which it refers, the greater is its degree of indefiniteness.

Section concerning definiteness 1.13.5. Definite items fall into five categories. These are as follows:

Nouns referring to well-known people, i.e. nouns that are proper names, items that are made definite by the prefixing of the heh of definition to them, demonstrative nouns, pronominalized forms and conjoined items. 1.13.6. As for proper names, these are like CiJ1~'

vlJ~:'

:l'v~,

ilW~,

P'Nl, Ti37 i?W

T"n~,

and similar forms. Such a noun is one of three types. It may be a transferred form, either transferred from the category of a noun referring to a class, for example C,~tp '~iD

WlJ~ for example

,i7?O (Gen. 33:19), '~

(1 Sam. 11: 1), or transferred from the category of attribute,

111-P l17.iJP

(Ecc. 1:1), il?~-P

may be a derived form/ for example vlJ~:'

:Jp~,

,;~ ilW~.

(Prov. 30:1). It It may be a

foreign noun, which has been borrowed from one language to another, for example ::J"t::9tt, '~Nn:J1

etc.

1.13.7. As for nouns that are made definite by the particle heh, these are

cases such as lV'~iJ,

17.~iJ,

'~iJ

and the like, in which the heh of

definition is attached to an indefinite noun and it becomes thereby

2

I.e. an inflected fonn of a verb.

Part I: Chapter 13

103

"i,m C"37~N "737' il"737 il37'P'7 "i '~:l il"~on7 pno~7N 17' "737 2 0 "p, "7N37n C"'P7N "737' lil"737 il37'P'7 n'~ ~1 ':J:JN 7:J' :l'PN ~"'37nN "7N 1N:J CON7N il"737 37p" N~ 7P N~ 7:J~ N7TN:J ''':J:Jn7N ,~ l7:lN 1N:J il"737 37p" N~ ,n:J N~ il~'37N

N~O7

7NP" 'p' CN737N7N N~O7' il"737 ~"'37nN

ilO~:J

"m CNOPN Nil 7':J':l ~'37n

,~

m:l'37~N

N~'

7~ 1.13.5.

N~O7

:lNP7N7N

nN~7'il:

7'rTN, rTl/~'

1':J" 1N N~ rl/MJ C~rl/

1N N~' N"~i37 'YJ~:l

:li'V" i'MY', CrT':lN ip:J 3CN7~

1.13.6.

mi, i ,nN 137 i':J" N7' 17' ilN:lWN' 7'V~rl/ 47:l'N' ':IN "~M 6ip:J o:Ji CON 1~ 51,:J" 17" N7'p:J~ CON7N rTi" 7:l ''IN ", 7:l n'rTi' 7n~ il~ 1~ 1':J'" 7, J'~VrT N~O P:J" 1N N~' rTl/~' :li'V" i'MY' 7n~ NpnW~ l':J" :l"MJO 7n~ ''':IN ill7 "7N ill77N 137 i':J N~ ,m N~il'

"~rT

rl/'NrT 'm~

8

Nil7N:l

il,:J:J7N CON7N "737

1. il'73.' il3."in7 mn~

1~

~"'37nN

,:mt ,;~

il~'37N

N~O7

Nil "in

N~

N~'

17'

7Nn~'

1.13.7.

'V JrT

> FEA I 2504, fol. 7v. 112. FEA I 2441, fol. Ilv

0i".113. *FEA I 2437, fol. 358r.114. FEA I 2441, fol. Ilv, FEA I 2504, fol. 8r l::1'N". 11 5. 11::1' ,7": FEA I 4478, fol. 76v N7'i)~

1'::1' 'i'El. 11'::1' > FEA I 2504, fol. 8r. 11

6. FEA I 2441, fol. llv, FEA I 4478, fol. 76v, FEA I 2504, fol. 8r 7n~. 4478, fol. 76v + 'i". 11 8. > FEA I 4478, fol. 76v.

117. FEA I

Part I: Chapter 13

104

definite. These are of two types. One type refers to something that is mentioned previously or subsequently or refers to something that is well known. The other type refers to a class. The type that refers to something

IilJ~ry1

that is mentioned previously or subsequently is a case like tV"~ry

'W~l

OD

N~iJ

(Job 1: 1), which refers to f~rl. •

1:1), or like ~3:-'W

ilJil;

••

'P~:-W

'tV"~ry

ilJ~ry

(Num. 16:7) and 'tV"~ry

tV"~ •

(Job

)

p

il~ry

(1 Sam. 17:25). Examples of (definite nouns that) refer to

something that is familiar and fully in the mind are O:~iJ, and ilo/f~J.

fl.~ry,

O~iJ

(Definite nouns) referring to a class are cases such as

:l})!iJ "71

~9,fiJ

(Haggai 2:8), flJ$f

:l ')}

~iry1

"7

(Gen. 1:22), for here

the heh of definition has not specified one item of the class but has encompassed (the entire class). 1.13.8.

As for the demonstrative nouns, they are eight in number,

il!, nNT, il!~J,

namely:

~T7.iJ,

T~iJ,

masculine singular, namely (Psa. 25:12), h!~iJ

tV"~ry

singular, namely, 'T~iJ

il!

nN·T

iT, ~T, and il!~J,

il~.

Two of these express the

il,!

as in, for example, tV"~ry,

(Gen. 24:65). Two express the feminine

nN·riJ

and ~T7.iJ:

ilO/~D

(2 Kings 8:5), f'J~ry

(Ezek. 36:35). The remainder, which are four in number, express

'~iJq~¥7

T,~iJ

both the masculine and feminine. These are

T

-

,.:;t! (Zech. 2:8), T?iJ n"~o/iJ (Hos. 7:16), il~o/7J

43:21), ~)ti n·i¥~J

T'il, iT, ~T

~T-nW1.f

(Lev. 27:34).

ilT

'o'

••

as in

(2 Kings 4:25), iT

(Ezek. 40:45),"7 "1:l~

(Psa. 9:16), O"W~D

il'N,

and

il~

'T-O~ (Ezek. 11:2), il~

(Isa.

Part I: Chapter 13

105

"N> 37)" N~il'n IT'il)' "37 1'" il~'37 Nil:J ,~ O)),N ',N 37)" ':IN'N' 3"il7~'N ',N 37"" 'N ':JNn~ 'N c'pn~ N,rrrr ~'Nr rr'rr, 1"P:J 4':JNn~ c'pn~ ":J'~ ',N 37)N"~ '~N ~'Nr 6P :J, r'N:1 rr'rr ~'N ',N 37)N"N s,~" O~ 'N~:J "il37~'N ',N 37)N"N' U~, '~N ~'Nr rr'rr, ,!, '":1' O)),N 7 FEA I 2437, fo1. 358v. 11 8. FEA I 2441, fo1. 12r 'm. FEA I 2504, fol. 8v

'T7il.

il')~n.

11

11

9. FEA I 4478, fo1. 77r,

10. *FEA I 2437, fol. 359r. 11 11. FEA I 4478, fo1. 77r

FEA I 2441, fol. 12v, FEA I 4478, fol. 77r, FEA I 2504, fol. 8r +

12. FEA I 2441, fo1. 12v, FEA I 4478, fol. 77r + i!)il.

17'P:l·

11

106

Part I: Chapter 13

1.13.9. As for pronouns, these may be affixed or independent, and may be pronouns expressing the agent or pronouns expressing the patient. These amount to ten in number. Here is not the place to give a full exposition and classification of these. I shall, rather, restrict myself to mentioning a few of them, on the grounds that a full exposition will be given later in its appropriate place, with His help, may He be exalted. The independent agent pronouns are '~

and ~)t;J,

irrespective as to whether

il1;125 for a male who is addressed (2ms.), T;l25 for a female who is addressed (2fs.), Ot;l25 for the masculine plural is a reference to an (2mpl.), 1t;125 for the feminine plural (2fpl.), N~il the speaker is male or female,

absent male (3ms.), N';:t to an absent female (3fs.), Oij to absent males (3mpl.),

1ij to absent females (3fpl.). As for the affixed pronouns, these

include the form that is used by somebody speaking about himself (1s.),

'J:'I'W¥, the pronoun here being the taw and the yodh, whether the speaker is male or female; the form that is used by a group of two (or more) people (lpl.), ~)'W¥,

the pronoun being the nun and the waw; the

pronoun referring to male whom you are addressing (2ms.) is expressed in tl'W¥, the feminine singular expressed by taw

by the taw with qame~ without qame~ 0tl'W~,

.t;1'W¥,

in

and the nun in 1tl'W~

the masculine plural pronoun is the mem in expresses the feminine plural. When you

talk about an absent masculine or feminine agent (3ms, 3fs.), (you use the forms) ilWl7 and ilnWl7, in which there is no visible pronoun, but rather, T

TT:

T

in both cases, it is hidden in the verb, and it is known by the intention (of the speaker). The pronoun expressing the masculine and feminine plural is the waw in ~Wl7,

T

without any distinction (between the two genders).

So, the ten items in the set of independent pronouns are reduced to a set of nine affixed ones, as you see. The object pronouns, both independent and affixed, are inflected in a similar way, for example

')Wl7 and ~)Wl7, •

T

T

T

all the forms.

T

'J:'IiN, ~)tliN,

but this is not the place to give a complete exposition of

'SLvv I VHd 'vI 'NLU~

LNLllC L&dit~

'A09£ 'l oJ 'L£vl I VH..h '!;1 I'~C

lSL 'I 0 J

L&dic l£1 '1 01'lvvl I VHd '£I 11 'LNLun lSL 'l oJ

'SLvv I VHd 'lI 11 'l.CLL ALL '1 0J 'SLvv I VHd 'Il 11 'Nc;~ait 11 'NC;UL

ALL 'l oJ 'SLvv I VHd '01

l£1 'l oJ 'Ivvl I VHd '611 'l09£ 'l oJ 'L£vl I VHd* 'S 11 'adaLAN l£1 'l oJ 'Ivvl

I VHd 'L

I1

'NC;l.~

UCNClt:L! NC;UN Slll::ld;u l£1 'I 0 J 'Ivvl I VHd '911 'G~

I VHd 'ALL '1 0J 'SLvv I VHd 'All 'I 0J 'Ivvl I VHd '!; 11 'Nc;~aitL!

'lll

I VHd*

'NC;~

VHd 'v

11

:A6!;£ 'l oJ 'L£vl

All 'I 0J 'Ivvl I

LNC;UN lLL 'I 0J 'SLvv I VHd 'All 'l oJ 'Ivvl I VHd '£ 11 'A6!;£ 'I 0J 'L£vl

La~£J

'L!NL!tN lS 'l oJ 'vO!;l I VHd 'lLL 'I 0J 'SLvv I VHd 'All '1 0 J 'Ivvl I VHd 'I

LU~Ne

~N

LN~UA!

a4't~" N~UA

~U

~L.

a~L

~1

,,'CL."1'1

~lL.

L.~ C~N

U~L."

L,4't~e

~4't1

~NSl

~"O caL~

N~'C4tOl

~"O

~1

a"L!~N

~NL!.

N~L.C

C~ aN4't~

U04'tL! a"

L!L ~OUL.

LN~t1

LN~CU"

N~U6

N~cd

LN~

L~".

L.CL.N CN1 Ne NCU"

N~UAL!

caL~ C Ll.:,N 4't1

~NCU"

N~ClL!

LN~Un

OLN CN1 N~uce

a" ~L4't!

~1

~a4'tLJ

C4'tL. C~4'tLU! NaUAL. 4't~"l

L"L. 'C4't L.~

N~L.U

a"

~N"cl

a" a~,LlC

a~,LJ

L~".!e

N~(lL.U

C~

L~N".

a"

LaN4't~!

N~"e a"s

it~'k

LN~"£

N~,

UAL~

(llL.UL!N LUaO,~!N

aN4't~"l N~O

L.CL.L!

N~CaAL!

N~"

UL.C"L. ll LUNC"U N~L

~"L.

UCCL. 4'tCL! ~1

'C~4t ~aLA!

S N~aL."l

N~U

L~N".!e LNLl

N~CaAL! 4't~"

L!L!CN 1 ~L4't

L~N".

L!L.N ~L4't

NLLl, NLLln n La~,

N~a4'tL"l a" N~caA

L~".

a~Ll.:

UNC"U L~l

L~".

UCNClCL! N~U9

N~

L~".!

Ll.:l 4't1 ~N"CU

UNC"U Ll.:LN CCL. 4't1 ~N" N~Cl

N~a4't"l NUC~

N~

~N"L.

N~4't(lL.!

CN~"L!

a~l.: ~4't

a" a~,LJ

N~L."

Lca~

a~N"L. C4't~

N,~

UL." aN~

'C"L. aL.a aL.~4'tU

N~a4't"l

caL~ a" a~'Ll 'C"L. ~aLA!

N~L.C

4't1 caOL! a~,Ll

N~uce

'CN"CL! Ll.:C 4't1 ~N"cl

UL.C"L. LNLl l ~ ~4't

LNLlC ~ ~4't

~L.C

L.CL.N NL NCU" LNLll.:

U4'tN~"

4'tal.L.L! ~"O

N~"

LN~caA LN~

"6"£1'1

LOT

L.CL.

a" N~4'tL.

aaL. UCL1 ~4't

N~UA

£I J;)lduq;) :PJUd

Part I: Chapter 13

108 1.13.10.

As for the conjoined nouns, not every noun that has been

conjoined to another is called definite. For, anything that is conjoined to an indefinite noun is not definite. You need to make it a condition that the item is conjoined to a definite noun belonging to one of the aforementioned four categories (in order for the conjoined noun to be definite), for example 0i:l'1~-P 11 :2),

i1o!

1'!:'7? (1

(Gen. 25:12), 17.~jTn'

Kings 21 :2), ,;n~

lJ;7?~

(2 Sam.

and the like. It should be

noted that, in some exceptional cases, indefinite items are conjoined to definite ones, but they do not gain definiteness in this way, but rather retain their indefinite status. This applies to the forms 1;~f'

lJ;7~T.

lJ;~1

and

These differ from other indefinite items on account of their

meaning, for when somebody says to another l;~f

tr>,~

'J:1~

('I saw

a man like you'), it may be that he intended somebody similar in height, or in age, or in his profession, or in other respects, (but only in isolated features), because it is virtually impossible that the two men could correspond to each other in all respects, to the extent that the term l;~f would be definite, just as when you say 1~:;

or 1~

status. The same applies to the expression somebody says 1~7T,

1~.

these are definite in Similarly, when

it is not definite, although it is conjoined to a

definite item, because the expression does not refer to one specific item among all items that are 'other than you'. Rather all other items, whether these be humans, animals, inanimate objects etc, are included in the expression lJ;7~T.

The same applies also to

of these are expressions of' othemess' .

1'''!¥?:;1 and If;1?:;1, since all

Part I: Chapter 13

'7N ~'N

CON 7:J O'7!) l1N!)~7

7:J ~'l71

N7 i1':J)7N '7N ~N

3

i1l7:J'N7N 1~

i1!)'l7~

N~O7

N~1

N~

or':1~

7:1

171p:J

N'N1W 4 C7l7N1 17' 7Nl1~

NP:J11 7:J

N!)"l7l1 17':J :JOl1:Jl1 N71 ~'Nl7

,.n'-"t, ,.n,o"

,'0:1

l1'n T~

7iN7

')l7

T~

Ni1')l7~ Bp:J'

'~N

11:J' 'l1n

,':111 T~

7:J

,J:1

1N

~NP

i1N10

'w

,.n'-"t T~

l1nl1

7:J7N 'N

")~7N

,':111 ,.no~

~Nl1

'7N

N,i1 '!) l1N':J)7N i1'P:J l1P'N!) N~)1

,'0:1

,.n'~

~,

i1,')7

'!) N~i1P!)l7n:J

7'NP7N

mN7

17':J

i1!)'l7~

TN

,.n,o,

i1!)N~7

l7~

~'l71

7:J"

17'

7Np N'N

'!) 7Nn7N1 i1!)'l7~

TN:J

C7

,.n'-,,, N~)!

N") f:J' N7 17' TN l1'n

")1

N'i1 ")'

i1:JN:JON

,'0:1 7~n

7:J!) ,') p' i1'N')N T~

ip

CNOPN

6

7NP N'N N~:J

u'7N

i1':J~7N

'!) 1N mo '!) 1N i171'O '!) i17~

N'N1 N~'

12i!)'l7~N

i1,')

1m 17'1 ":Jm7N '!) Ni17Nn '7l7

,') '!) 1N i1l7)~

17'

lON~'

7P~N

TN

IN~O'

17' '!) 'O'Wl1 TN '):J)'

l1N':J)7N T~ 5

1.13.10.

27:J TN7 i1!)'l7~

'7N ~N'

rrt ,'no ,'-,orr .n':1

109

'N~i1

TN1'm

,.n'-,:1 ,"11'-,:1

TNO)N

T~

'!) CN7:J7N1

i1',')7N ~N!)7

1. FEA I 2441, fo1. l3r, FEA I 4478, fo1. 78r

1':1'.

11 2. > FEA I 2441, fo1. l3r. 11

3. > FEA I 2441, fo1. l3r, FEA I 4478, fo1. 78r. 114. FEA I 2441, fo1. l3v, FEA I 4478, fo1. 78r. > FEA I 2437, fo1. 360v. 5. FEA I 2441, fo1. l3r, FEA I 4478, fo1. 78r 'i':JM. 11 6. FEA I 2441, fo1. l3r, FEA I 4478, fo1. 78r + :Jl'\:J7l'\. 11 7. FEA I 2441, fo1.

l3v p~'.

[[8. *FEA I 2437, fo1. 406r. 119. FEA I 2441, fo1. l3r, FEA I 4478, fo1. 78r,

FEA I 2405, fo1. lr + i17. [[10. > FEA I 2405, fo1. lr. 1111. > FEA I 4478, fo1. 78v. 11 12. FEA I 2405, fo1. lr m'~.

PART I: CHAPTER 14

ON APPOSITIVES OF NOUNS 1.14.1. Four things follow the noun as appositives. These are an attribute (naCt), a connective (Ca!/), an emphatic element (tawkld) and a

permutative element (badal). The Arabic grammarians called them 'following items' (appositives) since they follow the noun with regard to its case inflection. Although nouns in Hebrew do not have case inflection, items that act as their appositives agree with them with regard to features such as the marking of definiteness or indefiniteness etc. A separate section is devoted to each of these items. Section concerning the attribute

1.14.2. The terms naCt (,attribute') and wa~f('descripton)

have the same

meaning. When the noun is definite, its attribute is likewise definite. Similarly, when it is indefinite, it is given an indefinite attribute. It is not admissible for one to be given the form of attribute that is given to the other. An indefinite noun requires an attribute more than a definite one, since an indefinite noun needs some description of it in order to approximate to a definite status. I A definite item is not like this. When, however, it has some degree of indefiniteness, it requires an attribute.

I

The literal, non-technical sense of taCrif is 'making known, making familiar'.

PART I: CHAPTER 14

'1~l7N

nl')7N 'in N''tVN ill':l1N 00N7N l':ln' "7N NmN n'n T~

')N1:ll'7N ,~ 'il il'il

'n7N

T~

l':lN,n il':l1l'7N 7ilN Nin~O'

p'

07 N~7'

Nil7

il:J1Ntv~

N~O7

'1~7N

,~

,nN'

7:J7'

7':l7N' ":J,n7N'

il:lN1l'N ,~

00N7N l':lnn

Nill':lN,n

17'

1'l'

1':J)n1

n)N:J :lN1l'N

'1'1l'n il~:J'

7~

4

il~1'

00N7N TN:J N'~ N~'

,nN' ')l~:

'1~7N

'il il1:J)7N TN7 il~1'7N

il~1'7N

T"

'1'1l'n7N T~ nlNnnN 1':J)n7N T~

7n~:J

3

N~il'n

n l')7N ,~

7~

1.14.2

il11l') TN:J nl') T1l' N7'

il1:J)7N 'il nl')7N:J

Nil7 f1l' N~7

il'7l'

ill':l1N7N

il71~

:l1pn7 il:l '1~n

:l1~

T~

nl')7N

il1:J):J nl') il1:J) TN:J N'N' i1£)l'~

TN:J 'p' 1:JN7N il:l 11l')' N~

1.14.1

N~

pnN7N

'7N il1P~7N sm:J7 17':J nO'7 nl')7N '7N 17'7

1. *FEA I 4478, fol. 78v. N~O7

II 2. FEA I 2437, fol. 406v, FEA I 2441, fol. Bv

17:JN,n. FEA 12405, fol. lr N~O7

14r Ni1~7.

114. FEA I 2437, fol. 406v + ~'7N.

17:JN,n ~D

:at:J

:IN:J. 113. FEA I 2441, fo1.

115. *FEA I 4478, fol. 79r.

Part I: Chapter 14

112

1.14.3. The description of an indefinite noun is of five types. The

fir~t

type is when you describe it by referring to one of its physical features such as beauty, blindness, lameness etc., for example il.~-W" 14:25), il~

t~7

ilW~

(Prov. 11:22), IJ~

;~

(2 Sam.

W"r.t (Lev. 21:18), ',~W 'l~

'T!o/

(Lev. 13:10), ',~Wl (Lev. 13:31), B'~ l;1p~ (lsa. 2:15) and similar cases. The second type is when you describe the noun with a

nominal form that refers to its activity, for example ,~'37 (Josh. 5:13), il?~

'~-miJl

(Exod. 2:6), ~J:5

il~

W"~-m (Psa. 22:14), and

similar cases. The third type is when you describe it not by referring to something that is one of its physical features or to an activity that is visibly performed by it, but rather to (something resulting from) the act of 'a verb of the heart'/ for example C,~'!l

ilp.~n

1;~

W"~

(Gen. 41:33), ilW~

(2 Sam. 14:2), n7;?O/~ ilW~ il';~ (Prav. 19:14), lJi?o/, ::17(Prov. 15: 13), and similar cases. The fourth type is where you describe it

with a gentilic term referring to a tribe, a country, or a profession, for example

";7. W"~

(Jud. 19:1), "'1~

W"~

(Gen. 39:1), l;1~Q

W"~

(2

Chron. 2: 1), '1:9 :I~n W"~ (2 Chron. 2: 1). The fifth type is where you describe it with something that in Arabic has the meaning 'possessor of such-and-such', for example ,~tp :I;N-n7~#

l;1~

'tL;"~

(2 Kings 1:8) and nw~

(1 Sam. 28:7), which mean 'a man possessing hair', 'a

woman possessing a pursuing (spirit)'. The word l;1~ omitted, but it must be retained in sense, for example il~ Sam. 23:1) and 11), nw~

is sometimes W"~

(2

(Prav. 11:16), which mean 'a man possessing

looks' and 'a woman possessing good fortune'. 1.14.4. Take note that just as you can describe the modified item by means of a noun that expresses its attribute, you may also describe it by means of a verb that you connect to it. This is because you do not describe it with a noun that is derived from the verb until verbal activity has issued from it. So you say '?~ you said '~37 2

W"~-miJl

I.e. a verb of perception.

,~

(Josh. 5:13).

W"~l

(2 Sam. 2:11), just as

'loJ 'IWZ: I V3d '£ lI'A6L 'loJ '8Lvv I V3d*

GuaL4

LN,~

/tal.. a~'L

c:aN a4u

'z: 11

C:1.4L

,,'CL!

L~G!

CG£t4

UOt1.L!

ul a£ttNL!aN l.'C4 1.L at~l. "u1.k

t:a~

t:a~U'

LN4a£tt"z

'ClLL! AvI 'AI 'loJ 'SOVZ: I V3d < NalL! 4GL! 'I

Ll.:n:

N,~

aLCll..

CN4NOC N4aalua al N4G£t4 N4N C£t1. Nl ~1.l 4L!

LN£t4C NtL! c:aN ,,'CL! Nl U~k

tOtrI

N~U' La1.

N~U'

N4"L!

4NtL

N4aL~k

an.! N4G£t4 aN

L~GU!

CNOC L!L t~U

Nal.NL!( 1.NU u~

"au~

N,~

UCLUL! c:aL4L

ClL.NJ.:

NLt: a£tt" 1.4L l.'C4 1.L al£tl. al.L! 1.NU UNC£t

a~tNL!

G" N4~l.C"

a~t"

N,~

ClJtL.,

ct:~

N,~

1." C:"U LC:"U c:aL4L N,~

~t:

t:a~

~aL.

ULJtt: t:J.:L. LC:NaOL!N Nl U~GL!

CN4tOC N4" aC"4 NL C41. NL ~t£L!

a~c:U' N4a 4 LC

caN

c:aL4L N,~

~L'

N,~

hlau LaN "'Cl.,, a'Cl.NL! Ll.NC£tL!N Nl U~GL!

c: aL 4L

N,~

N~J.:

rt:Ll LUC:C

4,,0 L!L U4"L! 4L! L4N G£t4 ~NL!l.

La", N~J.:

ucaJ.:

~tL!

C4 CG~4

al NG£tN4

r aLe t:LC:J.: NL.,J.: QLL.l: LNaUN4 1.4L LUN4UL!N Nl U~GL! U~GL!

CNOC ~N,1.

~/tL.

~cl

N4" G£t4L! c:aL4L! LJ.:rJ.: N,~

~aL.

~UL.

CltL~ N,~

L'C"l. 1.4L c: aL 4L! NU1.L!N

U~GL!

Nl

caN

aLCll..

LJ.:rJ.:

tt:LJ.: LNalCNL! 1.4L LUNt"L!N Nl

~dJ.:

NhlJ.: ~GJ.:I

N,~

caN L!L U4"L! 4L!

GNaN L~k

£OtrI

aLL. NL acu L~aN

al uol

L!aNtL!

N4NOC N4tC:l.L! GNtL! "'Cl.,, ~4"

vI l~dqJ

£11

c:aOL! L'CLL!

:Pllld

Part I: Chapter 14

114

1.14.5. You may also describe it by conjoining it to a verbal noun, which

is similar to an infinitive, for example

m'?"l;lf, (Prov. 9: 13), i1?Wl i1P.l?-t,~'

,??w tl.,~

(Ezra 8:18), mp~

(Psa. 43: 1) and similar cases.

1.14.6. As for the description of a definite noun, four types of these are

described, but the fifth type, namely the pronoun, is not described, for a noun is not pronominalized until after it is (fully) definite and does not, therefore, require a description, for the function of a description is to distinguish (the referent of the noun from others). Definite nouns, other than pronouns, are described when there are circumstances that prevent (the referent of the noun) from being distinguished. 3 (This is seen), for example, in j11 NP':;>-?~

ItPi~J: 17.~iJ (Jer. 29: 16), in which the noun 17.~iJ may be used to refer to other people who do not share this description (i.e. 'who sits on the throne ofDavid'), so it was necessary to distinguish the king in question by this description. 1.14.7. A proper name may be described in three ways. One way is to

conjoin it to a definite item, for example 0D1~-P PV1: (Gen. 25: 19), 1~f 'W~ (Gen. 27:19), i1j;-~¥ i1Wb (Deut. 34:5) and similar cases. The second way is by means of a demonstrative pronoun, for example i1!iJ

37'Jv lP-v (Esther 7:6). The third way is by means of an

item that is made definite by the particle he, for example m:'iJ t'XI~ (Exod. 38:21), N"?~iJ

~i1J?T

(Jer. 20:2).

1.14.8. A conjoined noun may, likewise, be described in three ways,

irrespective as to whether it is conjoined to a pronoun or to a full noun. One way is by means of an item that is made definite by the particle heh, for example "W~:;'iJ 7.~-j¥1 (Jer. 38:7), '?"i~J i~f (Gen. 27:1), '''r.n;t lbj?iJ (Gen. 49: 19). The second way is by means of a demonstrative pronoun, for example h! ~f

(Deut. 21:20),

i1! ]tf~

(Jud. 6:14). The

third way is by means of a conjoined item, for example ntp~ i1.~'?o/

(1 Kings 9:16). 3

With the result that it is not clear what referent it is referring to.

i~:;17

N4Qt::1.!0

t::N4NOO

ca~41.!

t:N4Q~ ca~41.!

at!..

cNi N4t, ~Qt,l.

°l08 °loJ '8L1717 I V3d*

O{

,tU'L NmU' m,Cl~

Cl,1..

ca~41.! ~C:Lm4

tr 4rL ~ trL ~r!.L'

tc:u1.. ~

~UN4I.!

NU4L ~dClL!

~UNt,I.!

NO N4t, NOO CfNI.!l. NUL.I.!N t::QN t,~l.:

~At:

8'trl

4L.Cl~

N4NOO N4Q~t:

t,c~i

t::N4I.!N

t::U4UI.! Nalt,N N"AN QANaN

~rt4N

~L.a

~ Clm~

~UN4I.!

t::QNJ

at!.. 444

t:N~aUI.!

~NQU41.!

t::N4I.!N ca~41.! t::NOO

ca~41.!

N~L.! ~c:! ca~4L

Qt::I.!O

4Jtud tl NtL.~C N4~0

N4NOO

UQ",~I.!

t,c~i

~Cl!

amL tc:L.1..

t::u4ul.!

Nalt,N

NU L.I.! N

Qtl.! t::1.!

alNl.CI.!

"au~

t,~l.: ~UNt,I.!

N4" Q~l.a!

a~At:

L'trl

aNUUt,'C N4t,

N4L.t, ot::t::

at,

l.a~

N4~At:

I.!L.N oN4NOO

N4UQ"t,~

N4UQt,"~

,~Ql.

40

"alNl.CI.!

~Cl,1.

~At:

O~NI.!

N4Q~l.a!

~4Lmt

Qi N4Q~l.t:

4N "~At:

N4~At:

a"

~Aal.!

~I.!

N4NOO N4Q~l.a!

~Nalt:I.!

a,

C:ON l:o

4QN ~l.

at,Ou'CtN 4L.4L ~i

~N4CQO ~At:

La,~

Qi

ca~41.!

~NtQ

N4N t:~L. Qi 'CQ4UI.!N U~At:

~NQ

9'trl

ClL.~

N4Qalt::1.!

at,1.!

4Ni QL~

N4~Q"l.

4Ntl.! 4N

aNi N4l.t:~1!

N4NaONO

L.4L

ca~4L

44QAL.l.

~,'CU

S'trl

Ni

N4m ~e,

NmU' C:04,LU'

N,~

UAal.!

vI ~I

t:N~aUI.!

l;}ld13q;)

N4t,

N4m N4a~

NOO

:Illl3d

Part I: Chapter 14

116

1.14.9. A noun that is made definite by the particle heh may be described in two ways. One way is by means of an item similar to it (which likewise has heh), for example 3 :25), il~'WJ

r1~iJ

'!i37iJ lL;'~iJ

'DiJ

(Zech. 1: 10), :J '~iJ

(Deut.

(Deut. 1:35). The other way is by means of an item

that is conjoined to an item with the heh of definition or conjoined to a definite noun that has a pronominal suffix, for example ,~?

1~ FEA I 2504, fol. 9r. 11 2. r"y~

~,

Ol)

n1"pn ,~

C'37~ n137.)'~

'::>:J

1':J~

1.14.11

~n

~,

> FEA I 2504, fol. 9r. 11

3. *FEA I 4478, fol. 80v. 114. FEA I 2441, fol. 16r, FEA I 2504, fol. 9v W'Nn 11 5. > FEA I 2504, fol. 9v. 11 6. FEA I 2504, fol. 9v + Ni"pn.

n',p:J.

118

Part I: Chapter 14

For this reason constructions such as ~W"

TR!

and

CD1~'

17.~tq

(Jer. 36:22)

(Gen. 24:1) and the like are not descriptions of a

definite noun but rather are assertions, since (the second item) occurs in an indefinite form. For the same reason the constructions

'1~iJ

(Jer. 52:13) and C?O/~T

C'~fiJ

b':;>~7

'1~f

n':!I-,:;,-run ')"

T

','

:

(Jer. 27:3) are

not descriptions of an indefinite noun. The meaning of '1~iJ

n'J~

is

rather 'the house of every great person', in that (the first item) is conjoined to a noun referring to a class, like CJ~D

::17 (Gen. 8:21). (In

the second construction, on the other hand,) the heh of definition has been elided from b':JN~

'T:-

and its virtual form is C'N' :!Iil C':JN~il T-

'T:--

":!I, for the -:

construction would not be correct unless we interpret it in this way. Section concerning the connective 1.14.12.

A connective may be one of two types, namely either a

connective introducing a different item or a connective introducing a clarification. 1.14.13. When the connective introduces a clarification, the item that is connected is the same as the item that it is connected to in meaning but not in form. Consider, for example, '37:~r

n3i f 'Q 'Ptp~

and the

remainder of the verse (Exod. 25:12). Here, the phrase

'n'tZh is not J"

:

intended to refer to other rings in addition to the four that are mentioned earlier in the verse,4 so that the total number would come to eight. Rather, it is an elaboration concerning these four and the connective waw is used for clarification by indicating the place in which they should be made. A similar case is '1~ 'i37:1~

".

ilP.1~

~ilJ.P1

(1 Sam. 28:3). Here the waw in

is used for the sake of clarification to indicate that Ramah is his

:

village, since it is implausible that he was buried in two places and it is not possible for something to be connected to itself in a literal sense.

4

n'~WjJ

The full verse is: 'PO/~

'¥?~-

n·37f~

'lJo/~

"F,lb~ n~t;:r

37~1 '37~-

',~

il~1J} n·17f~

:J~!

n¥~

Y~l

" J;l~

Part I: Chapter 14

119

ii't t:I:-r':1N' :1~" ,t~:-r i1,'P T~:l ""tl .MN' i1,'P T~:l ~'i1" i1,:l) i1"~' ,:J:l ':J i1tl'7~" ~':J ~':J 0'" t:l,~" t,N t:I'N:1:-r t:I'lN,~ ":1 t,"l:-r 1.M':1 t,::l p."t3 "'l7 ,."" T~O) ':l n":J t,"l:-r .M':1 ")l7~ ':J i1,:l)" i1'~n:l "'l7n~ ~i1 t:I'N:-r:1 t, 'n~ O)"'~ .,~ i1tl~, ~'i1 ~", ,~ t:I'N:1:-r t:I'lN,~-r ":1 i1''''pm t:I'lN,~ T~ 2C~':l c~pno ~, ", .,tl '~n

0'"

~i1'U

.,tl ~t3l7'

T~":J ~,t3l7'

O~)

i1~m "n~

~., ~t3l7

l7~m'

~i1'n

'n~

i1"~

"'V:1, 6.,~

'~:J

T"l7~'

1. FEA I 2441, fo1. 16r m':J.

1I:J1N7N.

114.

"n~ .,~

11

T~t3l7

~t3l7'

i1)~'

11

1.14.12

~t3l7

1.14.13

~,

")l7~

i1",l7 i1"P

'.M~ ,.~

T~

~i1':l

T"":J'" ~t3l7 "'V:1, :-r~'1 ,:-r,,:1i'" ,l7:J, i1n",p "i1 :-r~, ~p"n i1O~) "'l7 .,tv'~

2. *FEA I 4478, fo1. 81r.

FEA I 2441, fo1. 16v 'M.

2441, fo1. 16v.

~t3l7

P:l" T~ ,i1 T~":J' ,.M~' i1"P:l 6~, ,.,,, i1:J ,."., 0'" 4,i1 ':J i1")~n ':l~ 5'l7"" .",~ l7~'

~,t3l7'

~),

", P":J", T~

i1",""

'Vt,y t,V .M'V:1~ P'" 3i1l7:J'~ c,p~

'~:J

~t3l7'

,~tl

11

3. FEA I 2441, fo1. 16v

5. FEA I 2441, fo1. 16v 711:in.

11

6. > FEA I

Part I: Chapter 14

120

1.14.14. The connective that introduces a different item is expressed by

various particles. One of these is waw, which is the most common connective particle and the most widely used. It does not denote the precedence of one item in relation to another or that the two items act together in concert in a particular situation, but rather the fact that the connected item and the item to which this is connected both share in some aspect of meaning (without necessarily acting in concert), since it is O~,!1

a connection of individuals (acting independently), for example

~Wil"J

ilWb

(Exod. 24: 13),

9:23), T·1n~ ilWb lZ~1 17: 15), and similar cases.

n~1

il?7tWiJ-nt'

(Exod. 4:29),

Ott? hj?~l

N!!iJ1 N'\.l '~NT;l

(Gen. (1 Kings

1.14.15. As for the connection of sentences, I mean (the connection) of

one complete sentence of speech to another, this (by contrast) does not express a common participation in one particular activity, as you can see in O~. il1~"

N~

1111

"~iJ

(1 Sam. 20:41),

~i71

r'l~iJ-

N~

tV~WiJ

NJ~

(Gen. 19:23). This is not the place, however, to discuss the different categories of the connective waw, since this will be dealt with in

the appropriate section of the discussion of the letters of the alphabet, with God's help. 1.14.16. The second connective particle is iN, which expresses one of

o";h

two items without further specification, for example i~

il~"

~:p

"PO/~

,~o/

(Lev. 14:22), '~9 i~ h;'i7~ o.~r:V (Ecc. 2: 19), 37) :Jit?-iN (Gen. 24:50), and so on. In some cases iN has the meaning ofthe connective waw, for example il~

",~37T

i~

:Ji~

Oj~

ilW-iN (Lev. 22:28).

il~7-"

i1lp~-

il!p~P

tV"~1

)':~7

i~

(Num. 15:6),

(Lev. 20:27), i~1

Part I: Chapter 14

121

'N"N Nj"nN t'J"n il':17 il' il"''''''N t'J~:I7 1.14.14 '~m N" N'~:I7nO Nil,n:JN' t'J~:I7N t'J"n "n :I,"N,N ,"nn ,:1 ,Nn "n N~il:7n" 'N ':IN,N ",:17 N~il'n c'i'n n:JN:J N'N ,nN' ":JI7~ "n il"':17 t'J~:I7N t'J~:I7N 1N,ntvN n~" Ctt Mi'" l1tt,rr', rrtto Ci'" 1"i':J 'NnN,N t'J~:17 1~ 1" 'Nn~ ~'r ~'r S~n' 1"r~' rrtto ,S" 'i"'I1

il'~"

1",:17 CN,:J,N 1~ il'~" ":J:I7N '~N t'J~:17 N~n 1.14.15 "", ~!l '11Jrr 1"i':J ,nN' '~N "n 1N,nWN'N ,"n" N,n N:JilNil 0"" rr'l1Y ~!l ~,S '~r Sl1 ~Y' ttottrr ci' ",:17 CN,:J,N 1~ il:7~' "n ,:1 t'J~:I7N 'N' CNOi'N ,:J, :17~' il"N i1:J'I7~ t'J"n'N 2

1~

,.,,, ,~

rr'rr' ,~

t'~

:I7~N'

l"'~N

,nN ,"nm

t'J"n ":JNm 1.14.16 c~Mr rr J,' 'J!l 'Jtt ,~ c'"n 'ntt, il"i':J l"":I7n f:l7:1 "n i~ ""n 'i" 1" 'Nn~ !l'~ 11' S~o rrMJO rrttl1n S'~ ,~ il"i':J t'J~:I7N 'N' ":JI7~ i~

t'J~:I7N

rrtt ,~ "tt, 3, J'l1" ,~

!l'~

crr!l rr'rr' ,~ rt~

1. *FEA I 4478, fo!' 81v.1I2. FEAl 2441, fo!' 17rlmm.1I3.> FEAl 2441, fo!' 17r'N

')'37" .

Part I: Chapter 14

122

1.14.17. The third connective is

N'.

This expresses the exclusion of th~

second item from the situation that applies to the first, which is the opposite to the meaning of the particle waw. An example of this

rajulan la ~imratn

construction in Arabic is ra~ytu

woman'). Examples in Hebrew are

tz)'~-Nl

rnd-N'

('I saw a man not a

1~r

(Ezek. 21:31), 1~7i

(Psa. 22:7). 1.14.18. The fourth connective is the Hebrew particle that expresses the meaning of bal in Arabic, namely':;>, which expresses the rejection of the first item and the assertion of the second. An example in Arabic is ma

bal saribtu ('I did not eat, but rather I drank'). Examples in ~akltu

Hebrew: 11p,-':;>

~Q

'!.l~-:;>

'0

1i~

(1 Sam. 8:7), C~lJ:T;

T'~

(1 Kings 21:15), ~O*?

bi.i! '? CD'tp~:P

i1~p

~J;l

N7

N?l

(Exod.23:24). 1.14.19. Hebrew does not have equivalents to other Arabic particles such as fa, jumma etc., for example, ja~nl

Zayd fa-cAmru, (' Zayd came to me

then

N£l'N

:J'i'l'n'N' :J'n1n'N " , '£l ":J,n,N '£l '~£l

n')Nn'N '£l il:JOn:J il'~ N"

n')Nn:J

N1:J'~

'l' ,nN"N ":J,n£l il'nN~

'£l ':J~"

l':JNn ":J,n,N

,:J,' N'£l "1£ln,N' l'~N

N~:J

1.14.20

1':J,n'N'

,nN' ':J ':J "1£ln:J Nl'~ 1'ill' "l'

1. *FEA I 4478, fol. 82r.1I2. FEA I 2441, fol. 17r, > FEA I 4478, fol. 82r.

Part I: Chapter 14

124

1.14.21. One of way is to repeat reference to the item by using the same word, for example 'tLh~

tV"~

(Exod. 36:4), "~7?

"~7?

(Gen. 7:19),

i~ :Jit?O (Jud. 11:27), i1~'J j~N' 371, 37) (Prov. 20:14), and similar cases that involve nouns. Examples with verbs are: h7~, il?N 'n iTon) 'm mN:>n

n?p ,? 1?1:>' 1NiNn "1' T':1 i~n ':1i37?N:> ')37~?N

1.15.5.

l' J~ 'J~

N? 1iTi, 'iN N? iT?'P:1

rfN'N Nt, ')Ni:137?N 'n 1i'''?

rfN'~

Nt, i):1N? 1"1

1. FEA I 2441, fol. 19v 0"'.112. *FEA I 4478, fol. 84v.

?'p

0:>37

PART I: CHAPTER 16 ON THE AGENT 1.16.1. The agent is an item that you structurally code in a verb that is linked structurally to it. The verb tells us something about it and is placed before it, whether it is a real agent or not. The structural linking of a verb to an agent consists in the placement of the verb before it. If the verb were placed after it, the agent would have the status of 'an initial item' standing before the verb. The structural linking of a verb to an agent differs from its structural linking to a patient in the pattern of the verb. An example of a verb that is structurally linked to an agent is C~1 'f.np~

il1o/-n~

(Gen. 23:19). One that is structurally linked to a patient,

on the other hand, has an u vowel on the first letter, for example

i1;O/~

il1o/1

b~':f

T

,~

CD1~

(Gen. 25:10), n':t~

'i?.~

'J~R

(1 Kings 21:14), 1~tr?

(Zeph. 1: 17), etc.

T

1.16.2. According to them (i.e. the Arabic grammarians) it is preferable to place the verb before the agent, though it is permissible to place it after it. In Hebrew both orders are found. Examples of the placement of the verb first are

C~!

'w~

C'V?t$

~ql

(1 Sam. 4:7),

iltil; (Lam. 2:17), q?~

1)'6?t$

il1;-tv~,:

of its placement after the agent are 'P-~

'J~

I c'iJ?t$ (Psa. 60:8), 1~,:

C'V?t$l:'1 '~1;

N~
':l:>7N :l~n'" Nil:l Nil~O 37~n' "l'~N Nn'tV7N 1N:> N'N Cil7'P:> m,n7N "l37~: ""n 'p' 1N:> ,'r Cil7'P:> Nil7 "l37~ N7 N,":>,n "in Ni1:JN 7"P 'p' ~"rt P'tV7 ''IN':l377N .,~ P7~l ,'r "l37~: 'il "'7N P7~l '" 'rt' 7"S ," rt'rt, 17'P:> 7'N~ mi, i7N "737 N~" 'i" 17' ilN:l'tVN' l1'i" 'rt' "N 'rt' 4"lNn7N' ",:1 "rtSN "SN "ON' ':I rt'rt, ,J:1 ,SNrtJ' ':I rt'rt, 5il7,p:> n7Nn7N' 'p' C:I,SN "ON' ':I, rttrt Cl1rt ,SNrtJ' ':I, "l37~: 'il "'7N 'o~., N~ 7n~ ,:l:>, CON Nil7' '~7N 1~ ~"rt 1''tV7 'O~., ~rtJ' ~,S ,':1, !:l"N:I '" :1':1 il7'P:> 17" 1':>7N T~ i1l~ "rt" mm77N 137 il7'P:> Np:l7N 1~ 'o~., 'p' N~il7n' rttrt C,'rt '11 CrtJ "rt" P'''7N il'Nin 137' ,'" J,Y 'rtJN:I CrtJ 'p:l N~il37

l. NON N~n" il~n".

••• il1VYn1 Cpn1: FEA I 2405, fo!' 2r, FEA I 2504, fo!' lOv Cp',

FEA I 2702, fo!' 12v ~YN!) FEA I 2405 il"il.

113. FEA I 2702, fo!'

l~t)

N~n"

Cp".

2. FEA I 2702, fo!' 12v,

12v, FEA I 2405, fo!' 2r, FEA I 2504, fo!' 10v.

> FEA I 2441, fo!' 21v, fo!.1I4. FEA I 2702, fo!' 13r + 1~'P:.5

22r.

11

*FEA I 2441, fo!'

PART I: CHAPTER 18 ON AN ATTRIBUTE THAT RESEMBLES THE NOUN OF AGENT 1.18.1. Examples of these in Arabic are I:zasan and sadfd. Examples in

mpi?

Hebrew are il~, pr'! and These nominals function as attributes, just as nouns of agent function as attributes, since the construction '(Z,;~

mp;37 is like il~ '(Z,;~

with regard to attributive function. One of them is

a noun of agent that is derived by inflection according to the pattern that is required by analogy whereas the other (must be termed) an attribute, on account of the difference between it and between a noun of agent in this respect, for if it were given a pattern that was formed by analogy (with the inflection of other verbs) it would have the same form as a noun of agent, and it would be il~;'

like the noun of agent

ilo/·37. Take note that

as in 1~P-¥ '~-il? (Cant. 7:2), the plural of the past verbal form is 'n~, which has the pattern of ,tv¥. But the form (of the attribute) il~ is different from that of derived from

'J¥

il';Pil; 'tV~-:;.Jl

ilo/37.

Furthermore, the noun of agent that is

Wi?~1

(2 Sam. 19:44) is

mpp not mpi?,

and from 'i?HJ (Mal. 3:13) is derived pr.;" not pr'!. For this reason, it is said concerning (words like il~) that they are not nouns of agent but attributes that resemble nouns of agent. 1.18.2. (Another reason for distinguishing them) is that a noun of agent cannot be conjoined to a part of the item that it qualifies, in the way that ~1-iltP.?

an attribute can in constructions such as

C~'

ilJ~

(1 Sam. 16:12) and

(Exod. 32:9). 1.18.3. (A further reason for distinguishing them) is that a noun of agent can appropriately be used to express the present, the past and what is to

PART I: CHAPTER 18

')N1:J317N '0' ~" N~np

'731 '1n F':J ~i'"

Nn:J ~"

T~

N7

Ton cn7'p::> ':J1317N '0 2'm

1.18.1.

n1no r~i" i'tn, r~' 3ip::> '0 r~' ~, ip::> r~'l1 ~, ,7'P 1N T'731N07N N~O:J '731 ~'1n7N T~ Ni 731NO CON N~n1' ~'7N Ni '7' ,71 '0 N~np1o' no~ 1::>N7N' ON'P7N N7N 731NO CON r~l1 7n~ r~' T'::>' n7~ TN::>7 ON'P7N "~1 ,~ r~ ,7'P 7n~ ,~ 31~i7 '~N7 73107N TN N~:>

:IN:J

1'1'IV'

N~O7

i'f,n

'i' 731N07N 4CON ,71::>' r~l1

5n:Jt'IV~

'l' no~

'Sl1 'i'tn T~'

r~i?

7:J '37NO CON:J

0"

~N7:>

r~!

NlO '~1

N7 r~i' rr"rr' ~, l't)N n'o "P ,'1'0

'!l' i'tn n:J

N~:>

~'7N

f31:J '7N

'1'11 'nN' N~7'

i10~7N'

7'~N

oS~,'

r~i'

~N'

N, 737N07N CON TN7' 1.18.2. 0' J'l1 r~' ip::> nO~7N n'7N ~N)'6

7Nn77 n7~'

rrJ'!l O'~!l

731N07N CON TN7'

f"Y rrJ'!l tM'!l rrJ'!l ',rr ip::>

1. *FEA I 2441, fo1. 22r. 11 2. FEA 12702, fo1. 13v ,il1.

11

3. > FEA I 2405, fo1. 2v.

4. *FEA I 2441, fo1. 22v. 115. FEA I 4478, fo1. 75r i1i1:J1lm. FEA I 2702, fo1. 13v 9lot~n. ,~lot.

1.18.3.

11

11

6. FEA I 4478, fo1. 75r,

11 7. > FEA I 2702, fo1. 13v. FEA I 4478, fo1. 75r: lot~"

Part I: Chapter 18

144

come, for example ';n~ iH!:l 'iry (Jer. 22:13), C'P.1f li~ ~!:l (Micah 3: 10), C7O/~T ilJ~: (Psa. 147:2), but an attribute can only be appropriately used to express the present and not the past and future, for somebody who utters the phrase il~;

ilo/~

cannot appropriately use this

when intending to refer to past time or future time. 1.18.4. So, an attribute differs from a noun of agent in these respects. An attribute resembles a noun of agent, on the other hand, in that both can function as an adjective. An attribute, furthermore, may have a masculine or feminine form as is the case with a noun of agent. It can be given the heh of definition as is the case also with a noun of agent. It can be made

plural by adding yodh and mem in the masculine and waw and taw in the feminine. Examples: ilJ~;-tz)' (Exod. 18:26),

C'W~

il,~J 41:2),

ilWi? ilJ~

'~p

C'Wi? C;:T~

(2 Sam. 14:25),

(Exod. 6:9),

(Cant. 1:8), il~

3nt~-1

RT'!

il,;i!-N7 ilW~

ilWi?iJ il)~'f

:J7.-'i?TlJl b'~ C'j?Tn (Ezek.

' '17N£>,N CON il£>~'N

"£> Nill1P£>N" il'1~

l1PiN£>£>

l1),m i:J,l1 NmN "£>, il:J 1117)" N~:J

C"~'N

N' ",

N"'N:J 17~"

tI'J~

'~i

Nil:J 1117)" mN

NmN "£>, 'il:J Nil'N:J ~i17l

r~i'

r':l1~

'J~

"i' r~'

':l,rr r~i'

tI'~i

rN'~

i'tn ,nY~

N, il£>~

~,

4~N'

r~'

tlr'J~

NmN 'NP" N~

NmN "£>,

r~'

r~N

~1'

ili"'"

,~

'1~

mN i"" il'"

n" ~i'

'N~

"

T~

NmN'

il~NP

r'~N

l1':JN N'N

r~'N

mNnN' TN'''£>''

""N

'N17£>N'N T~ C,P" 'Nl1~

U"~'

l"~1Pi N~ i'-:PY' il"'N:J~

TNnN'N

":JN~'

:J "i'J)

u,'~ ",17

1.18.5.

mNnN ON"P

'17N£>'N CON' ";''' 'p'

i"'Y ip:J ON"P'N N~l1P ",17 0'" i"'Y mN:J' ON"P'N ",17 l1N;' 'Y~N 'i'tn tI'Nrr ~, "n' 'i"Y T~ l1N;' r'~N U"~, i"'Y P'

''':IN

":J i17'N

.,£>

:JiNW' ':J~

1. FEA I 2702, fo1. 14r N~'.

~,

'17N£> CON

'17N£>,N CON TN C,17N'

Nm~

T~

r~'

tI'i'tn :l' 'i'tn,

" , 'Nl1~

",17 ";''' TN il'J)~

rr'rr ~'N

tI'~J:l

mN":J C'Pl1 N~'

N~l1P

1.18.4.

"£> "Pl1£> l1")Nl1,N "£> 3'Nl1'N' 2'N"N' i":J'l1,N "£>

,n":l

r~i'

'N

Cil"P:J

",:J

0'"

"'17 il"'N:J~

112. FEA I 4478, fo1. 75v, FEA I 2702, fo1. 14r 'N"N:n. 11

3. FEA I 4478, fo1. 75v, FEA I 2702, fo1. 14r Nn'N'.1I4. *FEA I 2441, fo1. 23r.

PART I: CHAPTER 19 ON A PATIENT WHOSE AGENT IS NOT SPECIFIED 1.19.1. A verb that takes the patient of an action as its subject has a different form from a verb that takes the agent of an action as its subject, for (the former) always has a u vowel under its first letter, for example,

Cij?

'P-~7

'W~

(Isa. 52:15), ',trNi 'J~

(Psa. 22:31) and similar

cases. There is no difference, in this respect, between verbs with one root letter and those with more than that. Examples of verbs with one root

il?iJ (Hos. 9:16), '1.t?i?>

letter are: C:1~ words C:1~

and

'1.t?i?>

':il~.1

(Exod. 5:14). Here the

are patients of an action whose agent is not

specified. Examples of verbs with two root letters are: il1'~

il~

(Num.

i7?lP

'W~ (Exod. 34:34), C'1iJiJ '~1 (Gen. 7:20), il~ 36:2), il~. (Ecc. 6:4). Examples of verbs with three root letters are: CV1~

(Gen. 25:10), ni~

'j,~-C7o/;

'i?.~

(1 Kings 21:14), l·w-n~

W~

',~R

(Jer. 50:20),

(Psa. 65:2). Examples of verbs with four root letters are '~lf and '~l,

which are derived from '~l

"111 (1 Chron. 15:27).

1.19.2. When a verb takes an agent as its subject, it is not appropriate for it to have a patient (immediately) following it, just as it is not appropriate for an agent to follow a verb that takes a patient as its subject, as shown

Ci?.'il

by the preceding examples and cases such as l~o/iJ

:JW'il

40: 17) and '$9~

(Exod.

(Gen. 42:28), for these differ from the verbal

forms derived from the same two lexical classes that take an agent as subject, which are

il~

).

Q,

C'j?ij1

(1 Kings 14:14) and il~

1.

Q,

•

:J'Wm

(1

Kings 2:32). The nominal (participle) forms of the preceding verbs are

C~'

and :JW'~

for example il,1il'i :JW'~i

(Num. 5:8).

PART I: CHAPTER 19

73~N

il"":!l ~N7:J1 iln"":!l 7'3~ "):1~7N 73~N 1.19.1. Nt, 't&lN ip:J N~"1 2 il7'N ,~e "i" mN7 73N~ "):1~7N N~ T":1 ,71 .,~ '~P N7' N~il7n' tttt, '£)~t orrt, '£)~ ,71 T~ 1"NT:1 T':J" N~ T":1' "7:!lN 1nN' 3~'n:1 m~ T':J" t'U,t&I ':I!.~ Ot'£)N r~t! 1nN' ~'n il7:!lN N~" il7'P:J il7:!lN N~" ip:J' N~il73 CO" e7 T"7'3~ t'U,t&I, Ot'£)N~ ~

rro:l t ,~t&I o',rrrr 'O,:lt, rrw t 't&lN ,t'!l nN t&lP'::lt n'::lJ t,po tm'::lN ,::lj?.. ~"n i t,::l,,:l t, t,:l'~ 5~,'n i il7:!lN N~"' "J t,:I,:lO "" T~ ~

il137:1 .,,,., TN Ton" N7 73N~

"i~

7'3~

"):1~7N

::It&l,rr 7:1t&1orr op,rr

,m,

,m T"n"77N T"nNil T~ 73N~ ip:J ::It&l'O op,o e1pn

1. *FEA I 2441,

73N~

N~

"):1~7N

73~N

Ton" N7 il7n~N

"):1 N~7 N~ilnp'7 eON7N' ttt ::ltt&lrr,

[01. 23r. 1FEA I 2702, [01. 14v:

rr,y 4T"~'n

il7:!lN N~"' ot,~

7'~ ~

6T"1':JN~7

73~N

.,~

il~1pn7N

~

1.19.2.

N~:J

7'3~

,m il137:1

t£)O:l ttt Otptr' tttt, ::It&l,orr

'El 6;7N :IN:J7N. 112. FEA I 2702,

iI'7N. 11 3. *FEA I 2441, [01. 23v. 114. FEA I 4478, [01. 68r, FEA I 2702, [01. 15r lNEl,n. 115. FEA I 4478, [01. 68r, FEA I 2702, [01. 15r ~'nN. 116. FEA I 4478, [01.

[01. 14v

68r, FEA I 2702, [01. 15r IN'':JN/:)7N.

148

Part I: Chapter 19

1.19.3. On some occasions niphcai verb forms are used where it would also be appropriate to use the construction with a patient whose agent is not specified, l for example ,~

C1~tp:

~7'

(Deut. 19: 10), which is

close in meaning to C7?l ';J~ (Zeph. 1: 17), and 't9~ 2:8), which has the same meaning as i1:V~ n'J~ i1~l:J 12:15). Verb forms such as 1~tp:

and

ni??t:l1

ni??t:l1 (Esther nj?.ry1 (Gen.

and others of the same

pattern, however, were not given the form of verbs whose agent is not and njl'ry etc., but were given specified, i.e. patterns such as those of';J~ the form of the niphcai. They are exceptional cases of the niphcai, however, in that they express a meaning that is not the regular usage of the form. It should be noted that other instances of verbs with this pattern express the meaning that the form is intended to express, for example 'D7.~:

and ~t

etc., which express the meaning of the niphcai. There are

also verbs containing short qame~

(hophcal) that are used with the

meaning of a verb whose agent is not specified, for example

11:;Jj?i? '~ip?

(lsa. 14:19), which has the meaning of the verb

"7f

.t;l1,7lP;:r

l'?i? 1.7Wry1

(Dan. 8:11), and j~p.t;l (Lev. 6:15), which is' clos~ i~ meaning to tV.~ j!tP~ (Mal. 1: 11). These cases arise since the short

qame~

in them is equivalent to qibu~,

'J¥

as seen, for example, in n1~

(Exod. 15:2) and '.H!(?' 'J~ i1111; (Jer. 16:19). They, therefore, function as a verb that takes the patient as subject. Verbs that take the

j:J~

agent as subject do not have one particular form, as is the case with verbs that take the patient as subject, which usually contain a u vowel. 1.19.4. Just as the meaning of a verb that takes the agent as subject is not complete without the mention of the agent, so the meaning of a verb that takes the patient as subject is not complete unless the patient is mentioned. When, therefore, it is a verb that has two patients, it is not appropriate to refer to only one of them, for example "W':;J~-n

'i1~

n'~WiJ the second is 'i1~,

1 I.e.

(1 Kings 2:21), in which the first patient is "W':;J~ despite the fact that lamedh is attached to it.

a passive verb of the pu CO" C' ""N MP.n, "l3?~: ,n ""N ,.nO~ MPt,.n, ip:J' O~, 'tl~, 3?~'n C' N~iln' MPt,.n, 'tl~ lp, rtl1'tl .n':l rt~ ':l N~iln' MP~' 'tl~ 0. 'm~ n'3?N£> CO" C' N~ '3?£>' ". N' "l3?~'N N~np, ill3? ni':J N~l' 'N3?£>lN" n3?~' 'p N~iln 1~ l"'Nn~ l",n ,.,,, IN ",n 2"'N 3?'~" ", "l3?~ ""N 4Nn'~ 3'1lJ" Ut,7?~ ,m 3?~' N~ "'31 ",i ,n N~ n~Np' n£>"£>:>'N 'N3?£>N'N 1~ N~" .,,,., 'p' '3?£>l" ,n ""N ,,:lptJ .n:lt,~r ,m n'3?N£> CO" C' N~ '3?£> "l3?~:J ""N 'Up.n t"t,:l '~P 60'p~ ,t~l'T S'3?£> "l3?~: ",:> n'~N n,n nlN:> N~l' 'Up~ ~l "l3?~ :J'NP" 'tf; 'n~ "t, n:JN~ Nn"£> n£>"£>:>'N n~Np' IN n"n 1~ "l:J~'N '3?£>'N ",i~ "" n"'''N£> 'tl1~ 'W ", l'T' .n,~t' .,,31 .,i., N' illN£> '3?N£>" "l:J~'N '3?£>'N N~£> "3?£>~ .,,31 C~'N:J "3?£>~ "l:J~'N '3?£>'N "i" N~:J n,nN' np"'~

,m,

'jnVN~

N'N '3?N£>" "l:~'N '3?£>'N n'''N£> '~:Jn N' N~:J' 1.19.4. '~:>n N' "3?£>~ "l:J~'N '3?£>'N ",:J '3?N£>'N ,:J,:l "'3?n" N~ :IN:J 1~ IN:J N'N ",,£> 8n,:>,:J N'N 7nn'' N£> .n~ 7.n' ip:> Nn,nN "'31 'N~np 10n" c' l"'3?£>~N "'N "lNn'N' l~':N "N'N "l'£>~N l'T' J'Nt, .n'~J,rt lt':~ n",l' CN"N :J ,:>, l'~ ,rt'J'~ 1. *FEA I 2441, [01. 24r. 11 2. FEA I 4478, [01. 68v N7N. 11 3. FEA I 2702, [01. ISv + 1'l)'. 11 4. FEA I 4478, [01. 68r N?liJ7Nn?lN'.

11

S. > FEA I 2702, [01. 2Sv. 11 6. FEA I

2702, [01. ISv l':::l?l. 117. *FEA I 2441, [01. 24v. 11 8. iJ':::l1:J N7N iJn1'Nl) 7?l:::ln N7: > FEA I 4478, [01. 91r, FEA 12702, [01. 16r.

PART I: CHAPTER 20

ON THE VERB, THE A GENT AND THE PATIENT 1.20.1. When these are combined in the speech of a speaker, the most appropriate arrangement is to place the verb before the agent and the patient, although it is permissible to place the verb after them. The agent is distinguished from the patient in Arabic by the fact that the agent has nominative inflection whereas the patient has accusative inflection, irrespective as to whether one precedes or follows the other. An example where the agent precedes is cjaraba Zaydun CAmran and an example where it follows the patient is cjaraba CAmran Zaydun. Since Hebrew does not possess case inflection, the distinction is made between them instead by the insertion of the particle

N:'.?~D

'il,~T before

n,~"tp;>

'il,~1:

n~

before the patient, as in

(Jer. 20:2). If n~

il,f~1

had not been placed

the 'beater' would not have been distinguished from the

ti?p~

'beaten', since it is permissible to put the agent after the patient, as in

CW N:o/~-n1

(2 Sam. 17:25). Therefore, when one could be

confused with the other with the removal of the

n~,

something in the

external context is required in order to distinguish them. This applies, for example, to

ilp'W 'W:

20: 10), and similar cases.

'J~,1

(1 Sam. 16:9),

C'j1 '¥1~

"~,

(Job

PART I: CHAPTER 20

0'1P11 T'~

'7~!J

07:m~

'17~

":J~17

:J~)'

7l?~!J

1'T

:J'~

7l?~!J

')~:Jl?7

'7l?

.M~

.M~

7':J1

':J~1

'!J 171 0~7:J

T~';

l?~

T~';7

~'!lJr

.M~

~1

.M~'

~il71'

,~

T~

O~

il":J~1 7~!J'

':J~7

7C't"

~'l? :J~'l?

r~"

~7

47'l?!J~

s'r~"

'7l? Tl? 7l?~!J 0::J117'

~il1n

'7~

7'l?!J~

'!J' il::J

':J~7

7l?~!J

C1p11

,m 7'l?!J~

1)l? T~

7'l?!J~

T'~1

7l?!J~

'7l?

"n~!)

:J'~7

1717!J 6C,t~!l C~ '!J "~1n' .M~ l?~!J1' '!l11" ip:J 171' ;, '~:J

1.20.1.

7l?~!J

'r~"

:J"~7 T~

~1

7'l?!J~

l?!J' 'il ':Jl?7~ '!J 0'1P11 '!J Oil7'P:J ':J~1 3p ' 07 ~7' 2 1'T ~'l? :J'~ 7~:J1 il'!J il~'? T~:J ~m':J ~7'!J

l?~1;'

T~

~il1n

,y,' "J!l r~

~

T"~1

,~

1. *FEA I 2441, fo1. 24v.1 FEA I 4478, fo1. 91r:' l"1l)317N :IN:l7N (added in the left margin). FEA I 2702, fo1. 16r'!) :'7N :IN:l7N. 112. FEA I 2702, fo1. 16r, FEA I 2475, fo1. 7r N"T. 11 3. FEA I 4478, fo1. 91r 11:::l'. 11 4. FEA I 2702, fo1. 16r + 17'i':::l. 11 5. ,i1'1J,' '731 nN 7':::l' N7'7!) > FEA I 2702, fo1. 16v. 11 6. FEA I 2702, fo1. 16v + N:lli1 731 :IN"

nnn. 11 7. FEA I 2475, fo1. 7r has different examples: ':131' :I"

"31l (Gen. 25:23), C'1J 'i'n1l) C'J:lN (Job 14: 19).

Part I: Chapter 20

152

1.20.2. Take note that when one item from among the verb, the agent and the patient is placed before the other, six different combinations are possible. 1.20.3. The first is the placement of the verb before the agent and the patient, as has been exemplified above. This is the most common order. 1.20.4. The second is the next most common order, namely the placement of the agent before the verb and its patient, for example 'i?-~

il'Jo/-n~

(Gen. 21: 1),

il"f'l!1l Ci?tp-n~

jp~

C";J~

iljil",

(Gen. 41: 16),

and other cases. 1.20.5. The third is the placement of the patient before the verb and the agent, as in lV1IJ 19~

)~9$iJ

(lsa. 40:19),

iltil;

il~

'~·-n

(Num.

36:2), and other cases.

1.20.6. The fourth is the placement of the agent before the object and the

C"~l verb, as in ~"J:l il.!=ilT:l (Psa. 73 :20).

r1~

(lsa. 26:19), C~?

I

'}7f~

1.20.7. The fifth is the placement of the patient before the agent and the verb, as in i7J~;

i7J"P~O/

~P-

",fQ7?

lV~1

(Psa. 140: 10).

1.20.8. The sixth is the placement of the verb before the patient and the agent, as in lV~

litp?

lV~

~Sf

(lsa. 5:24), if~S9

have the virtual meaning of a verb, and in ,~ 17:18).

bJ;l~

is considered to ~1

(2 Sam.

Part I: Chapter 20

Oij711 l'\il'\ "37~'l\

'37l\~

153

'37~l\

0'37l'\'

7l'\

1.20.2.

1

3;,,;', i "'37 2";'11 f37:J "'37 0i1~37:J

l'\~

:Jon "37~'l\

'37l\~

'37l\~

"'37 '37~l\

Oij711 ,;" 1l'\i111'(1)l'\'l'\ .,~

Oij711 "l'\'l'\

.MN 11Jl1' O'11t,N

1'~.MN

l'\i11i1'(1)l'\ ,;" i1'l\~

.,~

i1' 37:Jl'\11 ")l'\11'l'\'

1.20.4.

i1"37~'

'i'!) ,'" ij7::J

i1'37~

l'\~i1" t,O!)11

,m '37l\~

'37~l\

"'37

r'N'

,m i1'37~

i1"37~

Oij711 ;"l'\'

11t!:l.M

,m ~N'

'37~l\

'37l\~

O~t,Y

N'"

,m

'37l\~

,m, '37~l\

10J

Oij711 ;'l'\'

1.20.6.

"11!:l '" t,'!).M O'N!)'

"'37 "37~'l\

Oij711 ii,l'\'

'~O!l t,!lN!I

"37~'l\

"'37

1.20.5.

~'n

'" 11'Y 'J'N.MN

"'37 '37l\~

"'37

1111'!) o,t~

"37~'l\

l'\~i1"

1.20.3.

'37~l\

,~

.M!)~

t,~1

'!:lO~

Oij711 i,l'\'

1"ij711:J t,'!lN '37" 4Nil'\

~N

1.20.7.

r'~t,

1.20.S.

~i'

'l1J O.M'N 1. *FEA I 2441, fo1. 25r.1I2. FEA I 4478, fo1. 91v, FEA I 2702, fo1. 16v, FEA I 2475, fo1. 7r'i'. 113. FEA I 4478, fo1. 91v, FEA I 2702, fo1. 16v iTi'N. 114. FEA I 2475, fo1. 7r N'iT.

PART I: CHAPTER 21

ON THE CATEGORIES OF MAFcOL (VERBAL COMPLEMENT) 1.21.1. The Arabic grammarians divide it into five categories. The first is

a maFill mu!/aq. The second is a ma/cill bihi. The third is a maFill fihi. The fourth is a maFilllahu. The fifth is a maFill macahu. The ma/cill in each of these categories is given an accusative inflection, as is the usual requirement for a maFill. Since the accusative and other case inflections have been lost in Hebrew, it is only possible to adduce examples of these categories in Hebrew in the form that they have come down to us (without inflectional endings), in order to indicate to the reader of this abbreviated work the forms in Hebrew that correspond to the ma/cill mutlaq and its other categories according to the terminology of the Arabic

grammarians. A separate section is devote to each category. Section concerning the mafcul mu~laq 1.21.2. By this term they mean the infinitive, which is the real result of

the action that is performed, for if you have hit Zayd, an action has been performed and there is somebody upon whom the action has been performed. The result of the action that has been performed by you is in reality (expressed by) the infinitive, for if somebody were to ask you 'Who performed this beating?', your answer to him would be 'Me'. It is the result of an action performed by you, in an absolute (mu!/aq) sense (without reference to a patient). 'Zayd' is the object upon which you have performed the action (ma/cill bihi), since you caused the beating to come upon him. In reality he is the result of an action performed by God, the

PART I: CHAPTER 21

7'l!:~

~

CNOPN i10~:J Ni1l':JN" :i1"!:l 7'l!:~ "7l' Nm~ COp 7:J ':J~)"T nN~7l' T~ i1,"'"

"7N m'~op" Ni1n7Nm

:iP

:i1l'~ :J~)7N

7'l!:~

i1":J'l'7N 7i1N 1.21.1. 7'l!:~ Ni1")Nm :P7~ Ni10~:J' :i17 'l!:~7

N~7'

'p!:l

i1:J~)

"~np

N~

CNOPN7N i1,i1 i7n~Nf 'N'''N ~"p C7 ")N':Jl'7N "!:l :IN'l'N7N N~ ,jn:J~7N N'i1 "!:l 3'~N)7 C7l'''7 n", N~ "7l' N7N i1"!:l sNi1~OP fi"p:J' NP7~ N7'l!:~ 4 p ",m7N m'~o" N~ 7Nn~ "!:l~

7~!:l

Nm~

COp 7:J7' ")N':Jl'7N "!:l P7~N

7'l!:~N

"!:l 7~!:l

1)N7 "p"pn7N 7'l!:~N mN7 "~7N 17':J T')l''' 1.21.2. 17 7'l!:~N i1:J 7'l!:~ 7'l!:~ cn!:l i\,"r n:J'~ N'N 7l'!:l T~ 7NP!:l 17NO '7 N7"NO TN7 6 FEA I 2437, fo1. 391r, FEA I 2441, fo1. 26r. 11 5. FEA I 2441, fo1. 26r l'1mn. 11 6. > FEA I 2437, fo1. 391r, FEA I 2441, fo1. 26r. 117. > FEA I 2441, fo1. 26r. 11 8. > FEA I 2441, fo1. 26r. 119. FEA I 2441, fo1. 26r, 1110. > FEA I 2475, fo1. 1r. 1111. FEA I 4478, fo1. 93r, FEA FEA I 4478, fo1. 93r '~O. I 2475, fo1. FEA I 2702, fo1. 17v: TN'. 11 12. FEA I 2437, fo1. 391r '£l. 11 13. *FEA I 2702, fo1. 18v.

158

Part I: Chapter 21

1.21.4.

When the infinitive is used together with a verb, it express

various meanings. 1.21.5. The first meaning is one of simple emphasis, as in ~i

(Gen. 8:78), ~inp

~·tp1

(Gen. 19:9),

i7i?T:l i7??t1

N2$ C})7:;>~l

;:'f (Lam. 1:2), and similar cases.!

1.21.7. The third is where the verb takes the infinitive as a complement

and its action is carried over and linked to it, with the result that the infinitive completes the meaning of the verb, as in 11:15), ~inp

~tp1

, ·,V ~

'~V

(Num.

(Gen. 19:9). In these examples the action of the

verb has been linked to an infinitive complement, just as it is linked to an object complement in i~-n

7~,tp:-n

"JI.~1

(2 Chron. 24:22), ~tp1

(Jud. 3: 10). Just as the action of the verb linked to these two

!

Manuscript FEA I 2475 has the following text: 'Examples in Arabic are sariba

Zaydun sarban kalfran and rjaraba CAmran rjarban sadfdan. In Hebrew it is not

possible to use the infinitive in this way and a verbal noun takes its place, as in

'~-i17"

i1~f

CJ;li:::liJ7 (Josh. 10:20), 7i'~-W¥

"W~

(Dan. 11 :2) and similar cases

where a verbal noun has an attribute.' This seems prima facie to supply clearer examples of 'repetition and intensification' than those given by the other manuscripts. Since the reading is restricted to this manuscript, however, it is likely to be a change introduced by a later scribe.

Part I: Chapter 21

:~'£)

~'£)"

,m 1':>N117N 1'.l~

:N'Y' NY"

N'~

1':>Nll ,'.l

159

N~

1'£l' N7

171

it

7Nl~'

1.21.5.

,~on

,~r il:J 737£l7N

1~

IN'37' iN:>' N7' illl-rtv, 737£l7N 'l1N:>l1 Nil')N111

1.21.6.

l1:J:h ':J'377N '£l 17'P:> :2 il'£l 171 '737 7111 i1)"P 'N 'm£l il7:>N

1~07N

1~

:"lYi' tI~'

n'!:lN ~1

:4171 il7'~:>1

7Nl~'

illl'137111

5

737£l7N 6'1~

", "lYi'

ip:> ')N':J377N '£l' :171 ilN:JtvN'

r~!:ln il:J

1p£l ~'£)

nN l,rr', 9'137n'

N1:>N

3r~'!:l

'£l 7'3£l~N

r~!:l

737£l7N

U£)~"

:1'!l~

1'T

~'N

7N.ltvN

l''1il '7N 8''13711'

Cil'1)37 l1'1n' N7 737£l7N 1N7 10N~T7

N~:>

it' nN ,m N~'

1.21.7.

ip:> ilN)37~

l'1il '£l '1~7N

N~:>'

'737

tln~N'

Nil117N111

:l,rr NJ 'Jl,rr

'7N 7'1~

l':J~7N

illl1:>N£l

il:J~.

N)7:>N'

'7N

U£)~"

:U!:l 117Nll '7N

1. FEA 12441, fo!. 26v "37'.112. " , "37 "n iTl"i' 'N n~" l~ N'37' 'N:l' N" iT'~ > FEA I 2475, fo!' lr. 11 3. > FEA I 2437, fo!' 391 v. 11 4. Different text in FEA I

'37~N

2475, fo1. lr: N:l'~

"~37

:l'~

N,'n:l N::l'1l.' N"T ::l,1l.' '::l'37'N ,~

"'i':l

CON '::l ",:l iT::l 37'Ui~N "~'N "", "37n' 'IN'::l37'N ,~ N"'1l.' ~iT'Nn ",,, '1l.'37 "1l.'37' 'N~ iT",,, iT:l~ Cn1:liT, P:l iTN,m "N"'N iT::l '37~N CON n37l' N~. 11 5. FEA I 2437, fo!' 392r, FEA I 2441, fo1. 26v, FEA I 2475, fo!' lr + iT"N. 116. FEA I 2437, fo!' 392r N'37. 117. FEA I 2437, fo!' 392r N'37. 11 8. FEA I 2437, fo1. 392r N'37n'. 119. FEA I 2437, fo1. 392r N'37n'. 1110. *FEA I 2702, fo1. 19r.

160

Part I: Chapter 21

types of complement, it may also be linked to a third, namely a temporal (adverbial) complement, since the action of the verb is always performed in time, according to the grammarians. An example of this is ~:J7!j'

c'~;-nW7O/

(Exod. 15:22), C'~;

s :."-

~i :Jw.~1 (Gen. 29:14). It may also be linked to a fourth type of complement, namely a spatial

tVli}

(adverbial) complement, since the action takes place in space, for ~tT V)P~ft "J.;:r-C~ (Lam. 2:20). Although the example, N'?~l1P": verb may be linked to all of these types of complement, its most natural

complement is the infinitive, since the verb is derived from it and the verb implies its existence. Further discussion concerning infinitives and their various categories and related matters is contained in part two of The Comprehensive Book. Section concerning the mafCiil bihi 1.21.8. It has been stated previously that the ma/cui bihi is the person

upon whom the agent transmits and performs his action. An action expressed by a verb is of two types. One of these types encounters some item (as an object complement) whereas the other does not encounter an item. The first is called transitive and the other intransitive, as, for example, Cj? and

:JW;

and other movements of the body, which do not

encounter an object complement. Verbs expressing the actions of the five senses are all transitive and take an object. 'Seeing', for example, takes as its complement 'something that is seen', as in "t:T~

'~;:l-ntT Nl~1 (Gen. 43 :29). 'Hearing' takes as its complement 'something that is heard', as in ~7.j?

1.'~tP

(Num. 20:16). 'Smelling' takes as its

complement 'something that is smelt', as in

lJ'J.-nt' "j~f

n':1~

(Gen.

27:27). 'Tasting' takes as its complement 'something that is tasted', as in )7:;>~

'w~-nt

7iJ~;:r-nt'

complement

~.p

C(~tr-

'something

(2 Sam. 19:36). 'Touching' takes as its that

(Gen. 31 :34).

is

touched',

as

in

Ti? tVW~;1

Part I: Chapter 21

~'M

3'~1

2:l~"

,,,,., n"!) '37!)~

:O'~

m~'

i~:J'

i~:J m~

~,

~,

:6N':l~

np~l1'tV

":!m,~

~nop

"~:!r'

.,!), 7~1'tV

:l~1J7

i~

161

1,:;""

ip:J "" ~ji .,!) ~, ,m 37:l~' .,~ ~., 4"'3711'" :C'~, Trr:;, ", ~'V:l l"1!f~ ON 5ip:J n:l ~n"!) ", 37"~ .,~ 7"'3711" .,!) C~':J n,'tV' n"'37 ~7' m':J' :j7~ 8il7~ m~l1 'p n:l P73711" ~, n:l

n737!)

10"'37" 73~!)

"P~7

~n'

i":l'~

':J~7

~"'371 "7~

7'~

CO" 7~ 13"7~ n"'371~

14:"MN

,n n:l "737 73!)~ i~

.,66

l1~:J'n

i~

~n7:J

o~m

7'3!)~

i~

i~:J

"P~7

~n'

:l~" i17~

7~3!)

9.,~p

~7'

1 FEA I

11

11

11

5. *FEA I

'n1:JKn illil 'nOK1J 'nKltv > FEA I

7. FEA I 2437, fo!' 361v K'37n'.

11:1'.119. FEA I 2437, fo!' 361v has mi"i'l' instead ofil~n1J ~'371J.I

N1N'

3. FEA I 2437, fo!' 361r K'3mn. FEA I 2441, fo!' 27v K'37n'.

11

... il1ilKU 1'~K

2437, fo!' 361r.

'NP

'NP" IN 10n" ':J il:J 14"37!:)~ 13 N 'N il""N 'ilN 1)37 '37!:)'N IN' 37p'

il"!:) 1"'" lN~'

1. FEA I 2437, fo!' 361r ~m'. 'n~

'''NP'N

1"7:J :IN'''' TN Ton, 37p' T~:J :J,:i-'N ,.,,, TN~7 37p' 1~:J ON"P7N N1il 7Np

"n~'

4. li"~

''''''N '37!:)'N' N~"

N'''NO TN' il:J 12N"37!:)~

'NP!:) 'NO "

1.21.11.

il:J '~)NP o~n .,!:) 'il!:) il:J "37!:)~'NJ N'N :J,wn N" ION"~ N'N '~Nn

lN:J"W~

", N~il':J il"137n 01377

'37!:)'N pn T~'

il1:i- 8"137n~

T~

,.,,,

4478, fo!' 94r.

6,'1 '''N6), 1"'i~

ilO~37'

N' 1N ilN"'N 37~ .,~o

il'ilN6 '''j'N 'N37!:)N'N' 1.21.10. '.M~rQn ;p~ 3"137nn il37"~N 4:1i"Y '.My~n :1'U~rQ

:'~"

T'~"

~rQ"

11

8. FEA I 2437, fo!' 361v + lK il0:137'.III0. FEA I 2437,

11. FEA I 2437, fo!' 361 v :J'1tv1J. 11 12. FEA I 2437, fo!' 361 v

FEA I 2437, fo!' 361v '~K.14

*FEA I 2441, fo!' 28r.

Part I: Chapter 21

164

1.21.12. Take note that, when you wish to make an intransitive verb transitive in Hebrew, you have four ways of doing so. One way is to insert a particle between the verb and the object. This is the case, for instance, with :JW~

and ,~

which are intransitive, but when you use a

particle that makes them transitive, the result would be constructions such as iT~7J

NP=P 7,¥ iT~7o/

:JP~

(1 Kings 1:46) and i~-7¥

'P-~

(Dan.

11 :20). A second way is to change the structure of the verb and produce

:Jy,7iiT

constructions such as ';1nrl~

"?~-1

(Gen. 47:11), iT$~7?lJ

'~lJ

:Jy?i!!l

(Gen. 47:6), ~Qi'

(Isa. 21:6), C'1lJ~

'P.~,l

34:24). A third way is to change the vowel of the verb from

pat~.

Examples of this are Cl~ intransitive, as against 'tl1~J:I

179~

r~

17.9~

15:29) as

W~

lJ~tp,

(Job 19:10) withpa~,

which is

iTJf.T-'?

i'~?

7W~

(Job 33:12) as

iT!:9~-N71

(Job

way is to put

(Psa. 86:4), whereas the form

without dagesh is intransitive, for example i~t:lf further example is "J~

to

which is

"-iTf.T N71 (Deut. 17:17) and also r1~7 against i~ iT!?: iT1·iT'l (Isa. 31:3). A fourth

dagesh in the verb, as in '9J~¥

~ireq

(Gen. 12:9) with ~ireq,

transitive. Similar pairs of verbs are iJ7~ against C'tP~

(Job

"P-tr-' (Ecc.

11 :9). A

(2 Kings 4:38), which is derived from 7Y>~

(Joe14: 13).

1.21.13. Take note that just as the structure of the letters of an intransitive verb changes when it becomes transitive, as remarked above, likewise transitives verbs with one object take two objects when their structure is changed. An example of this is '~.t;l

}"ql1; iT.t;l'Wl (Lam. 3 :59), which

Part I: Chapter 21

165

"n7J ")N':J37?N .,£> "'37n7J '''''?N 2?37£>?N' ITN C?37N' 1.21.12. TN Nil,nN i1'~ i137:J'N 3,nN ,?, .,£> ,?£> i1"'37n TN n"N :1~' ?n7J ,?" ~"n?N f37:J ?'37£>7J?N' ?37£>?N 1":J ?:;"n 7"'?N ~'n?N:J n"~ N'N£> T"'37n~ ,.,,, N~i1 6T"'?N 5'011' :'J~ '11 '~1 :r~"o NO~ '11 ro,~ :1~' n?i' iP 8"'37" :1~'r ?'i'n£> i1"?37 ,i1 N~37 ?37£>?N N):J ,'"n TN Ni1")Nn1 '011" :r~YO 'Ol1rr :":1N f1N '10" :1~'" :1':1N f1N "?N 'O:;'?N T~ ?37£>?N i1:;"n ,'"n TN Niln?Nn1 :C',nN .,£>, "'37n~ ,.,,, C':1N 110" "O:;'~?N .,£> '?'i':;' nn£>?N rr:1" ,~ 9N~i1?n' :"'37n~ :'f1'j?f1 rl1~ 110" mn£>~?N "" IOr'N' r~' N" N~i1?n' :C'~J " rr:1" N" rr"N no~ ?'i'n£> 'CV"'?N:J ?37£>?N "'(1)" TN Ni137:JN" :", r~' m, 12"'37n" N? m~ 1,'CV~ '''''?N T':;' '37:J 1':111 ~J :,'Yj? '~:1 T~ ,'tJ '~:1 ?'i'n1 "n:1 n~ 4

N"'37n~

,.,:s.,

N~:;'

"'37n~

'''''?N ?37£>?N TN C?37N' 1.21.13. f37:J 13,?,:;" :i1,:;', c'i'n N~ :Jon i1£>"n N):J ,'"n" "'37n i1N):J n,'" 14N,N ,nN' ?'37£>~ "?N i1"'37n~?N ?N37£>N?N "'37n~ ,i1 "'?N ,f1f1'11 ", f1'N' ,?, ?Nn~ :T"?'37£>~ "?N 1.1N C'l1N' ... 'nONIJ 'nN)lV > FEA I 2475, FEA I 2441, FEA I 2702. 11 2. FEA I 2437, fol. 362r, FEA I 2441, fol. 28r 'l1El'N. 11 3. > FEA I 2437, fol. 362r. 114. FEA I 2441, fol. 28r NIJi1,nN.

11

5. *FEA I 2702, fol. 20r.

11

6. FEA I 2437, fol. 362r "'N.

7. FEA I 2441, fol. 28r and FEA I 4478, fol. 94r + N'N.

11

11

8. FEA I 2437, fol. 362r

N'l1'. FEA I 2441, fol. 28r N'l1n'. 11 9. FEA I 2437, fol. 362r Ni1'nIJ'. 1110. FEA I 2475, fol. 2r + C')IJ. 1111. FEA I 2437, fol. 362v "lVIJ'N ").1112. FEA I 2437, fol. 362v N'l1n'. 1113. *FEA I 2702, fol. 20v. 2441, fol. 28v NIJ 'nIJ.

11

14. FEA I 2437, fol. 362v N'N'. FEA I

166

Part I: Chapter 21

takes one object, but when you change its structure and say ~

i1l?~J

i1Wi? (Psa. 60:5), it takes two objects, the first being ~ and the second i1Wi? Similar cases are 1'~ '~-1 311 (1 Chron. 28:9) as against iJ'p~;l-1

OJtp'T-l1~

37Jii1

(Lev. 6:4) as against "i~f-l1

(Ezek. 16:2) and "i~f-l1

T"tn~-l1

'DW~iJl

bW~'

(Num. 20:26), and

other examples. Take note that the maximum number of objects a verb can take in Arabic is three, for example ~amlrn

~ari

Zaydan cAmran ~alihu

('God showed Zayd (Amr as a comander' = 'God showed to

Zayd that CAmr was a commander'). In Hebrew cases are rarely found where a verb has three objects. An example is o,;g~-

(2 Kings 8:13), where

1?l? '3J;l~

i1Jl1' '~J51i

i1)11" the exalted one, is the agent, the

first object is the first person singular pronoun on '~J51i, and the yodh, the second object is '3J;l~,

and the third is 01~-'

namely the nun

1?l?

Section concerning the mafCiil fihi 1.21.14. This consists of two categories, namely (expressions of) time and place, both of which act as 'containers' of a verbal activity. A verb in all its various inflections, past, future and imperative, takes all types of temporal expressions as a complement, since a verb is formed from an infinitive by means of these inflections. When one says in Arabic sirtu al-yawma ('I went today') the meaning is fi al-yawmi (,within today'), and when it says in Hebrew tr>'~-miJl meaning is i17;~, it says i1!p~m

as in N,ii i17;~

'O7?'

i17;?iJ I'n~, I OJ?,~1

(Zech. 1: 18), the

(Gen. 32:23). Likewise, when

(Esther 5:8), the meaning is 'within (fi)

Part I: Chapter 21

r~i'

'~1

1" il'n~

il'n~

:5", 'Nn~

.n'N,rr

ilN):J n1;" I N,N' ,nN' "37~ "N :r~i' ')Nn'N' ,01' "N'N r"37~ "N 3"37n :rr'.n'!l1".n .nN Ot,~" .nN 1'"rr :4"!lN 'rrt,N .nN 2

n'p~

:"'l!l.nN 7,rrN .nN

;, 'il il"N ':J137'N ,~

N"37n~ il"'" S,p, ')N1:J37'N

N1~37

9

'37N~

167

'37~N

'il ",~ :O'N t,1' ,t,0 ,.n'N ", 'IN,rr 1O,m ,m 'IN,rr ,~ O':Jn~N 1'~ 'il "N'N "37~'N llN'N37n O'N t,1' ,t,0 n'Nn'N' ,.n'N ')Nn'N "37~'N N"N' l')'N il'~

'37~"

lN~1

1~

N~m'

il~N'n:J

IN:J~'

il:J'1~

"37

Nil:JOn:J 1'~N 'NP N'N1 01"N 'n~

rrt"t,!l '"0 ,~

ilN)37~

ilN)37~

ilN)37~

~'N

r~1'N

,~

13N~Op,m

12,~

1.21.14.

37'~"

'1P~

,~

lN~T

"37~'N

"N '37~N "37n' lN~T' 1~ "'~ mN' 1~N' ':Jpno~, '~N 1401"N n10 ':J137'N ,~ "NP'N rrJrr, rrt"t,rr '.n'N' ')N1:J37'N ,~ '"0' ip ",:J, :15 N,rr rrt"t,!l Oi'"

1. FEA I 2475, [01. 2r N'N. 11 2. FEA I 2441, [01. 28v iln'N1il. 3. FEA I 2437, [01. 362v N'37n. 114. > FEA I 2475, [01. 2r. 11 5. > FEA I 2475, [01. 2r. 116. FEA 12441, [01. 28v '1N. 11 7. FEA I 2437, [01. 363r "T. 11 8. FEA I 2441, [01. 28v"p'. 11 9. FEA I 2437, [01. 363r, FEA I 2441, [01. 28v, FEA I 4478, [01. 69r, FEA I 2475, [01. 2v. > FEA I 2702, [01. 20v. 1110. FEA I 2437, [01. 363r + ip:J. 1111. FEA I 2437, [01. 363r, FEA I 4478, [01. 69r '7N37n. > FEA I 2441, [01. 28v. 1112. *FEA I 2702, [01. 21r. 1113. FEA I 2437, [01. 363r T'~Op.

1114. 'n'N1 'JN1::l377N ,~

7NP N'N' C"7N ,~

urN mm il7'7il > FEA I 2475, [01. 2v.1I15. FEA I 2441, [01. 29r N'ilil.

ilN)37~

168

Part I: Chapter 21

tomorrow', and for this reason this type of complement is called majCal

fihi. Past and future time are identifiable from the verbal form without any explicit expression, for the activity of a verb does not extend to time as a separate entity but rather it takes place within it, since time encompasses the verb together with its agent and patient. In this respect it resembles a container that encompasses everything within it. A verbal activity may take place within the full extent of the time that is mentioned, for example c'~-nW7O/ C',~tp

'=t?,~1

(Exod. 15:22),

W7tp

'~o/l

(1 Kings 22:1) and similar cases, or it may take place within some

tr>1y~ N'IJiJ ilJ~ N';t~iJ ilJ~m n~l part of it, for example '~o/iJ (Jer. 28: 17). Anything that can serve as an answer to the question

('lJ??) is an expression of time, and a verbal activity can take place within it, for example ~? i'!:'¥t' I 'P??7 (Exod. 8:5), to which the answer is iD??? (Exod. 8:6). 'When?'

1.21.15. As for an expression of place, this does not exhibit the features of expressions of time whereby any verb can take all types of temporal expressions as a complement and whereby a verb indicates (by its form) past and future time. Rather, an expression of space is of two types, namely general and specific. Specific forms are cases such as

i'+'i/, n~iJ,

C7tp'i;,

and similar cases having a boundary that delimits them and

to which they extend. This type of spatial expression can act as the complement of a transitive verb but not of an intransitive one, since it resembles a person. Since, on the other hand, a general spatial expression is the opposite of this, in that it does not have a boundary delimiting it, an intransitive verb may take it as a complement, as, for example, in Arabic,

Part I: Chapter 21

1~,:s7"

1N~T7

N7

:i1"~

OOP7N N1fr .,~ 'N 3iJ:J pt?.l" 2 07, 7:s~N 1~

7:s~N

"7:s7' i1"7:s7 i17N~nW "7:s7 7~nWN 1N~T7

7':s~

i1"~

n,n" ~.lN' 17' .,~ iN~7

~'7N

i17~"

O'J~

169

.,~

~t,

Nn'Nn 7:s~N

'!1~"

rr' JJn .nO" ,m N:JN'" 6i1.l~

7~n

i1~:s7J

.,~

N~7:>'

" .nVN '.not,

i17:JpnO~'

i1"~N

1N~T7

O~.l

7:sN~

N'rrrr

7:s~N

m,n n7~'"

1N~T

.,~

i1"~N

1N~T7

.""., .",~

"7:s7 i1n7N7' .,~

17'P::> f'~:>7N :f'~> "i1m", mb., 1n i17 N~ N7 N~

11'

0i1:J~7N

1N:>~7

,.,,,7N

7:s~N

"':s7n~N

N7~

1N:>~7

N7' i1:J"~ 0i1:J~

:s7"~

N'!1Jrr 7, .nOt, ,t,

rJ~!1

'i1~

:,not, 8" 'p' :i1"~ 1'::>" ~N ,~t" ,m i1"~ :>'~7N" Nn'Nn 1'::>" 4,p, N~i17n'

.n~t,

:0'0'

7"P N~

i1:JN'~

N~

1.21.15.

:s7"~

91N~OP

17' 7Nn~'

"7N :s7~N ,i1 'N i17:JpnO~' .n'!1rr ,'vrr ot,~"

7:s~N

i1"7N "':s7n" OOP7N 'i1~N i1"7N 1N:J N~7' fN::>WN77 i1n:JNW~7 1O"~n i1"7N l1",:s7n i1'~n" i17 1n N7 'N i1O:J:s7:J

1. FEA I 2441, fo1. 29r

O'l".

11 2. FEA I 2475, fo1. 2v O'~.

113. FEA I 2437, fo1.

363v, FEA I 2441, fo1. 29r, FEA I 4478, fo1. 69r, FEA I 2475, fo1. 2v + nl'~.

11 4.

*FEA 12702, fo1. 21v.1I 5. 'l"::J1lJn l1J1n::J > FEA I 2441, fo1. 29v.116. FEA I 2437, fo1. 364r, FEA I 2441, fo1. 29v, FEA I 4478, fo1. 69v, FEA 12475, fo1. 2v have m':l instead ofm~ 'l~

~,.

':m. 117. FEA I 2441, fo1. 29v 'l~".

FEA I 4478, fo1. 69v 'l~

11 8. FEA I 2437, fo1. 364r, FEA I 2441, fo1. 29v, FEA I 4478, fo1. 69v.

FEA I 2702, fo1. 21v: ",~. 364v, FEA I 2441, fo1. 29v ~'l. fo1. 3r "l".

lon

11 9. FEA I 2475, fo1. 3r r~Op.

1110. FEA I 2437, fo1.

11 11. FEA I 2437, fo1. 364v ~'l.

FEA I 2475,

170

Part I: Chapter 21

sirtu qudiimaka ('I went in front of you') and martu warii"aka ('I went

behind you') and in Hebrew C;j'~7

0~¥W;it

biJ'l.n~

bf7~

'~,1

(Micah 2:13), 1Z~

(Neh. 12:32). This is because expressions such as

;j'~7C and biJ'I.n~ do not extend to a boundary at which they stop. Rather, there is no specific distance that is reached by somebody going in the aforementioned manner, namely 'in front' or 'behind'. It is not appropriate, however, to make a specific spatial expression the complement of an intransitive verb, as you do with regard to general expressions, for constructions such as C2o/~';

'J:lN¥~

and n:~iJ

'J:lNf

are not permissible unless you attach particles that link the intransitive verb to its complement and say C2o/~"7;) When you find a construction like "~iJ

'J:lN~

'J:lN¥~

b~l

and n:~

iJ-~

'J:lNf.

... 07.o/iJ 'J:lN#~-C

(Jer. 14: 18) without particle, (we must assume that) the two particles have been elided (before each of the two spatial expressions) and the virtual form is "~iJ-

... 0,!o/iJ-~

for these places are each distinct in form

like concrete items and a transitive verb can take them as a direct complement as it takes concrete items as complements, as in, for example, "~

P;l (Jud. 1:26), n:~iJ-

l'ml (Lev. 14:45), and similar

cases. Section concerning the maf'iillahu 1.21.16. This can only be an infinitive, but it differs from an infinitive

that is a majCill mu{laq, since the verb that takes the latter as its complement is a verb derived from the same infinitive, as has been

Part I: Chapter 21

.,~

1~"

n,o ":J'37~ if'l~ 1::Iif',nN :Oif'J!:)t, O~t,Q 7:J il':J37 ~i' ,n 7~" "iln:J" ~7

'1~7 ~7

n'~

1~'i

171

"'7~

4'il 1~

n~o7

.,~

1~7

ci1:J~7

.,~

1~

,t",

3"~'7

r'~7 n73~

11' T~l

.,~

,"~o7

lon"

~

"'37n~

~7'

:~"

~il"7

'l7~

17'

il~:J't1)

"'7~

"~7

'il

1~'

"'37n~

17il"~

"'7~

16"'37n"

~'n7

8~il"73

7~'n

'nN~

7'in~

7n~

~'n

"'37n~

'''l:J 17' n'l' 1"'~n

1"~'n7 1~

il'il

n"n

1. *FEA I 2702, fo1. 22r. 11 2. FEA I 2475, fo1. 3r i1!:lNO~7.

n"n

1~

14 9 NL Nl ~I.!L

L,JtNL c:~

NCO c.!~L

LNJ.:L.! LNtc.!N Nc.!Ut4'\ CLtl.!N

N4'\t:L.~ LCc.!~

c.!4'\ G41.4L

L,(laJ..L

c.!~1

J.:C CaL41.! L,JtNL J.:C LC:~

J.:C:J.:! LC:~

ClNI.!L.

4'\~

N4c4NO LaGL c.!4'\ a~J.:

LNJ.:L.! 4Nl N4LNL" N4u~ c.!~LNIE t:c.!4'\~

LNCLL

La~J.:

c.!1 at:'t NL

(lac G4L CNtU LNLL L,(laJ..L LNL 4'\Cl~ N41.~ a~J.: NCO

4'\NClGI.! 4Nl NI.!4 N44'Cl.! 4N ~4'\ClGL t:4 c.!4'\t~

aL(lJ.. La~J.: LN4~NL.

N4'\Cl~ NtU

c.!L~4'\ 4'\Cl~

c.!4'\

c.!4'\1.!

G~

4Ntl.!N

4L NL.N1. N4'\Cl~

c.!N G4'\4U

4Ntl.!N 4L CNtU 4'\NClGI.! 4c.!N tAt:U c.!N t:4'\1.I.!N LI.!L G~ caL41.!Ol G~

N44'\L. t:~

·srn·. GA4 G~

c.!N G4'\4U LNCNL G4~CU

4N t:1. G~I.!

1.!1.1.! N4LNL LNL

c.!l ULCCl N4LNL t:~l

N4GN4'\4 LN4c.!G4'\L4

N4c.!G4'\L4 c.!4'\1.!

IZ l and there are still some remaining conjugations for which other symbols could be proposed. I shall mention what I can concerning this matter and explain how these words act as symbols and how each symbol has a number of subdivisions that encompass various verbs that differ in conjugation, root letters, noun of agent and noun of patient, if a noun of patient exists, with the help of God, the Exalted One. 1.22.2.

N~tr:

This comprises four types of conjugations. The purpose of

these symbols, together with other symbols that have been devised, is that the first vowel of an imperative form (of one of the conjugations that it represents) corresponds to the first vowel of the symbol and the first vowel of the past form corresponds to the last vowel of the symbol. An example of this is the imperative :lll?iJ, the first vowel of which is qame~ as is the first vowel of the symbol. The past form of this is :J"WiJ, the first

'NC;UAl.~L1v6£

t:~C

NClL

'1176£ 'loJ 'L£vZ I V3d < 'v

11

'l oJ 'L£vZ I V3d '£ 11 'AV '1 0J 'SLvZ I V3d* 'z 11'117 '1 0 J 'SLvZ I V3d* '1

NL4

Cl4LC:L.!

N4aCll

ClU4

NL4

Cl4LL

ClCL.! NL4 Cl4L G"L.! ClU4 N4Cl4L N4NC:"L ClCL.!N:

t:L.!L.L.! N4lt4NClL.!

L:CN

LL.!"

Cllt

ClN L~lt

Ual.UCl4

lt4"

N4lt4NClL.! ClUN4 L.4L

L.!L Nl C:4 NClL NL4 Cl4LC:L.! ClU4 NL4 Cl4LC:L.!N "C:Ll N4 'CL~

"Z:"ZZ"I

N4Cl~"

Cll 'C"LL.!N Cll N4lt4NClNU

1:-

~Lt:

Cll

N4UANL"lzE:

N44L.! UltN4": LNOC N4GNlt4 LN4ClGltL4 Nl C:Nl lt4"L.!

Cll

N4NGltN4

N4Clc:u4GL.!

"'C,,

ClGltL4 Cll L.4L

N4uAL"lz

LN4ULLlz

t:ClltLCL.!

N4'CLL.!L"L.!

L.!L.L.! N4N4GN8 lt4NClNU LClN ucaoc N4"L.! C:4 lt4NClL.! LumuCl4 ,,'elt4 4L.! lt4NClNU LNCN NL.C:L ClN "OCU Clll: L.4L Lt:"Nl c:Ll Cll

L~lt

C:L~!

LaL. ut:aN t:ltL. L.4L Cll N4UAL"lz ClN "Cld Nl

Nlt4C Nl t:l~

ciLU' fJlkd't r~,

LAlt Cll L.!L.L.! N4lt4NClNU L:CN

TZZ"I

L'eN Cll

t:ltL.L.!

Cll uaL.c Cll N4L.aL.La",,1 lt4" ClN UC:" .L

••

....

N4tt4NQNU LW" WCN 'et" LUQNQWN LN4NGttN4 N4QNCLL.W QtWN LQN L~t

4WN Ql

CNC 1 G" L.CL. NaONC NOQN N4GNtt4,,1 LN4QGttL4,,1

ZZ "}I'3:~dVH;)

:I

d ~"}IV

178

Part I: Chapter 22

vowel of which is agent is ~.,tP

~o/,

~er

as is the last vowel of the symbol. Its noun of

as in 17~;,

as in il,1"~

~.,o/

(Job 20:18) and the noun of patient is

~WiJ

(Num. 5:8). This is the first conjugation

consisting of two root letters preceded by a non-raot letter. You can conjugate similar forms by analogy with this. 1.22.3. A second conjugation with two raot letters in the opposite order (relative to the non-root letter) is the imperative

il1.!.

The past form of

ill!, the noun of agent is c"~o/!, il)'!71 (Prav. 20:26) and the noun of patient is il1.1771 ,I since the (attested) feminine form is ntp'JiJ il)171

this

(Prov. 1:7). You can conjugate similar forms by analogy with this. 1.22.4. A third conjugation, also with two (root) letters, is the imperative

"'J~t1-7

~WiJ with i~J

(Ezek. 21:35). The past form of this is ~WiJ

"tl!f-n~

(Gen. 17:14), '(1)i?~

~}1

by analogy

17'JiT7f (Psa.

for these two have imperatives with the same pattern, namely

171iJ.

The noun of agent is ~W

6:29), ~"O/i?

17~,

by analogy with 17~

I~p

i~J

74:3), and

(1 Kings

(Prov. 17:4). You can conjugate similar forms by

analogy with this. 1.22.5. A fourth conjugation, with three root letters, is the imperative ,;n:~.

The past form of this is ';J1~

Kings 21:13), for example ~il1. for example ';J~71

il1il; Ir~

';Ji.~

';J.~71

or ';J1.~,

(Psa. 10:3). The noun of agent is

';J~

(1

';J1.:t71,

(Prov. 27: 14). The noun of patient is ';J1~7,

ill;';

Cy?

"P;

similar forms by analogy with this.

I

for example n1~

The base manuscript has jJ'W~

with pat~.

(Psa. 113 :2). You can conjugate

Part I: Chapter 22

1'7~

2'~N

CON'

71~

7'N ~,tr i1:J~ ~, ip~ ~, i1:J~ 737Nn7N CON' 7'N ~"':lm N1iln "'7 l~':1 3ip~ :l~' .""., N~ il"737 op, "7~N ,.,,, ~'n N~il1P

V~

l"n,n T~ :ilN'~

N~

"n C1pl1 4t:1'V~

:1't~

il"737 Op,

l t"y~ 73~' iI'737 Cp' r!:)'I~

:iI"~'D.l 1'7~ l'~n

1~

rr,y

rf~

iI'DP.l:J :7"~

1~ ,~V

iI:>'7~

7'3~

T'7~ T'~n

7'3~

1.22.7.

:iln1~7

:5i1i1:JW N~

'~7

1~"

,:>~ r?~

p:>

7'~

71~

2~iI:>'7

'rlN r?~

1~

l:)1n

1'7~

181

17~

t"y~

t,¥~

p:>

'~7

~"1

1.22.9.

rr,y ,~

71~ :r'Y~

:O'Pl1

7'3~

C:l~N :il7~1

~il37:J1"

7~iI

~iI'Pl1

~,

iI'DP.l:J 'l' 07

~.l'

'~N

'rlN

rN'~

'~N

iI'737 cP' rt,~

l'~n

rrN,rr lOp:> rN'~

C,tl~r

1~

1~

'~7

~"1

, ,~

73~

'n~7

1.22.10.

r~'tT

:8'iI

71~

oc~,

~'7

rt'~

~l7

7'3~ :m~n

1. > FEA I 2405,fo1. 12v. 112. FEA I 2441, fo1. 31v il~N'317 fo1. 31v, FEA I 2405, fo1. 12v + m~. fo1. 285v ilil:lN1lJ. 11 6.

i'Tn~

1'7~.

114. > FEA I 2437, fo1. 285r.

113. FEA I 2441, 11

5. FEA I 2437,

')31 > FEA I 2437, fo1. 285v, FEA I 2405, fo1. 12v.

7. > FEA I 2437, fo1. 285v. 118. FEA I 2437, fo1. 285v, FEA I 2441, fo1. 32r, FEA I 2405, fo1. 16r, Nil. 119. *FEA 12475, fo1. 5v.1I10. FEA I 2405, fo1. 16r 7;;':1.

Part I: Chapter 22

182

1.22.11.

A fifth conjugation, which has three root letters, is the

imperative i~l?,

i~1.

The past for is

i~1

and

i~1.

The noun of agent is

i?li? (Gen. 29:9). The noun of patient is if.1~

for example Cp'~

1# (Psa. 87:3). You can conjugate similar forms by analogy with this. 1.22.12. A sixth conjugation, which also has three (root) letters, but (in this case) preceded by heh, is the imperative

1'7tpiJ. The noun of agent is 1'7tp~,

17.tpiJ. The past form

for example 7ji"~

7~n

is

1'7tp~

(Micah 2:5). The noun of patient is 1?tp1;?, for example 17tp1;? iW~f

(2

Sam. 20:21 ). You can conjugate similar forms by analogy with this. 1.22.13.

A seventh conjugation, which has four root letters, is the

imperative 7~.

The past form is 7~.

for example )7~i?

i'111 7f.1~i?

'~

The noun of agent is 7~i?,

(Mal. 3 :2). The noun of patient is 7f~i?

like

(1 Chron. 15:27). You can conjugate similar forms by

analogy with this. 1.22.14. ~1:

This comprises three types of conjugation.

ilW~.

1.22.15. One conjugation, which has two (root) letters, is the imperative The first (letter) of this has sewa, like the first letter of the symbol. The past form is ilo/~,

the first letter of which has qame~

vowel of the symbol. The noun of agent is ilo/37, for example (Psa. 115:15). The noun of patient is '~tv,

for example C'~if

like the last

C:P-o/ ilW37' '~tpl

(Ezek. 41: 18). You can conjugate similar forms by analogy with this.

Part I: Chapter 22

'~N

183

,:1, il"~N rp,n " 1~ OOV ':1'0 il"p:J ,~'O '~N

"~'N

O~N:J

ililN:ltVN N~'

"t,~

il"P:J Op, ,t~J

~"n

iln,n 1~

'~N

"t,~r

i Cil"p:J ,t~J

1,:1" ,:1, Op, ,:1 ':1'0 il"~

01NO ~"n

'~N "~'N

3

1.22.11.

'~N

2

:Nil Nil~1pn'

~"n

1.22.12.

'~N

t,"l:1 t,:1M "t,~ :il'nN~

'~N

t,~

:il',m" ~"n

"~'N

:t,~

,~

:ilN'~

7

NW) il"N '~N

rt~V

il"~

T ~"n

l'~n:J

il"N rt~V

'n~

t,~

1.22.15.

il~N'

O'~

"N 'n~

rt~V

"",

1~'

'~N

"N ~"n

'~N

"~'N

1. Vocalised in FEA I 2437, fol. 286r:

1.22.13.

4""

Op, SbtJ

:ilN'~

1~'.

il"~

t,~?

l"'~N

r~p

p:J '~f!

1~

p:J t,~J'N

6"" N~

Nil':JN 'n~ "~V'

~:J'N

N~

1~'

p:J rt~V N~

,t~r

il"~

'~N

Op,

:0'1"~

and in FEA I 2441, fol. 32r: 1:;1'1

11 2. FEA I 2437, fol. 286r + N1in. 11 3. FEA I 2437, fol. 286r + min. FEA I 2441, fol. 32r + WlN1 min. 114. > FEA I 2405, fol. 16v. 11 5. FEA I 2437, fol. 286v, FEA I 2702, fol. 7r, FEA I 2405, fol. 16v + f1::l "l.'~:

'1l'.1I7. FEA 12405, fol. 16v N:l1Z7.

11

6. FEA I 2437, fol. 286v

Part I: Chapter 22

184

1.22.16. A second conjugation, which has three root consonants, is the imperative 'i~tp. example

The past form is ,~W.

il,1il;

The noun of agent is '~itV,

for

'l?lV (Psa. 116:6). The noun of patient is ,~W O~Nl;I

for example '7?N? ~7-"W

(1 Sam. 9:24).

1.22.17. A third conjugation with three root consonants, which is close in pattern to the preceding one, is the imperative

n7W, the noun of agent D?lV, for example ~J;1i

m7W, for example ilW~

n7tp, with the past form '

,~

li"~1'\

4,', C'N~!)

"~£)'1\

~"

185

1~

;,

,~

11'\n

,~

p:;,

~"n

1.22.16.

'~1\£)

"ONt, ,t, ",1'\ ~"'n1\

1~

, IN nt,~

1'\~

p:> '~1\£) 0i" :-t~j?

71'\~il"

1'£),":J ~"n'1\ il,,1'\ !l~ !l~ p:> ':J~1\

1'£),":J ~"n'1\ ~lj 1T1:J ':J~1\

'n~:J

il"~

0i" "~£)

1'\:J "i' 1'\~ 001'\ nt,~

~"

'"1'\' lO 1.22.17.

il,,1'\ '~1\ 001'\' il~1'\ ,,, '£) "~n

'~1\£)

il~1'\

m~

,~ntzm

,'1'\ 'n~

:m1'\T11'\ il"~

!l~

p:> n't,~

"~

il~1'\

l':J~

n,~ 6

,~

;, 1~ ;, 5~"n

,~1'\

"t,N n't,~

1~ m~

il"~1'\

:91'\~il

8""

t,!~

1.22.1S.

!l'~

:1"'~\

':>1'\ 1il 0'" ~'!l

'il1 rJ'~

il,,1'\ ':;'1'\ 'n~

,~

001'\'

'~1\

1.22.19.

~O

q",~1'\

12",~

il"1'\

t" CN' :!l~'J

'n~

t,j? t,V' "~) "", 1'\~ :il1'\~

1. > FEA I 2441, fo1. 32v. 11 2. FEA I 2437, fo1. 286v, FEA I 2441, fo1. 32v, FEA I 2405, fo1. 16v. FEA I 2475, fo1. 5v has "~N.

11 3. FEA I 2405, fo1. 16v '~N7.

11

4. > FEA I 2702, fo1. 7r, FEA I 2405, fo1. 16v. 11 5. *FEA I 2475, fo1. 6r. 11 6. > FEA I 2441, fo1. 32v p::l "7W.1I7. FEA 12405, fo1. 9r ;"731.118. FEA I 2437, fo1. 287r";". 11 9. FEA I 2405, fo1. 9r

;'N~.

11 10. FEA I 2437, fo1. 287r, FEA I 2441, fo1. 32v,

FEA I 2702, fo1. 7r, FEA I 2405, fo1. 9r. FEA I 2475, fo1. 6r has :m~. 2405, fo1. 9r '~N.

1112. FEA I 2437, fo1. 287r 1"'~

11 11. FEA I

Part I: Chapter 22

186

:t"tt: This comprises four types of conjugation.

1.22.20.

T

•

1.22.21. One conjugation of this, which has two (root) letters is the imperative C"W. The (vowel of) the first letter of this corresponds to (that of) the first letter of the symbol. The past form is Co/, the (vowel of) the first letter of which corresponds to the last vowel of the symbol. Its noun

cw

of agent is the same as the past form, as in CJO/~1-n

.,~)

i1J~)

(Zech. 12:2). There is no noun of patient for this in Hebrew, that is in this conjugation, but rather it is derived from CtpiJ, which is equivalent to

C"W in meaning although the two belong to a different conjugation. The noun of patient of this is Co/~.

A form corresponding to this has been

given above under the symbol N~iJ. 1.22.22.

A second conjugation, also with two (root) letters, is the

imperative P~iJ.

The past form of this is P~,

(Psa. 38:6). The noun of agent is plural form)

C"i?~

~)r:t

P~,

C.~

for example "J.l1~:

~p,

which may be inferred from (the (Ezek. 33:10). There is nothing from

which the existence of a noun of patient can be inferred for it. You can conjugate similar forms by analogy with this. 1.22.23.

A third conjugation, also with two (root) letters, is the

Ti:;'i). The past form is

imperative

i1~:;>

i1?~Jl example

Ti:J~,

which may be inferred from

(1 Kings 2:46). The noun of agent is also Ti:J~,

"f,17 Ti:;>~

for

(Psa. 57:8). It has no noun of patient. You can

conjugate the patterns (of similar forms) by analogy with this. 1.22.24. imperative

A fourth conjugation, also with two (root) letters, is the l~:i).

The past form is

1~:J

can be inferred) from "l}ip~

1~:J

with the pattern

oq~:J,

(which

"f, (Isa. 10:3). The noun of agent is also

in the singular, which may be inferred from CD C"?~

(Exod.

14:3). It has no noun of patient. You can conjugate the patterns (of similar forms) by analogy with this.

Part I: Chapter 22

187

7n~:I

il7'N 1 S"El ~7n:lN TN' ")37~N "El O'~ 47n~:I 'il "17N Ot'rf T~ 7:1 N;1tT il~N73 "El il,"6) c1pn 1p' ot"~ 6il7'3E~ N~ilE"'n T

i'~

"~N7'

'~N

i'~rf

UnJN O:l, T~

N~"

1"El,n T~ TNn ~"'n 1.22.22. i'~J n,37NEl7N' 'Ji"':ln 'i'0J P::l 8il"737 op, 7'3El~ il7 N~ 0"7' O'i~J

1':lN~

:il7Nn~

9"~N7'

'~N

f'lrt

7':IJ P::l 7':IJ N~"

:N~"

T"El,n T~ n7Nn "'~n 1.22.23. 737NEl7N' :rfJ,:IJ rf:lt,~' T~ 7':IJ i1:INnN llil"737 op, 7'3El~ lOil7 0"7' ':It,

,:1 377N' '~N ,,:lrf N~" T"El,n T~ 37:1N' ~"'n 1.22.24. 1"n" ,,:lJ 12N~" 737NEl7N' :'~U':lJ ':I T~ 7':lJ Tn:l ":l~ :i1:INnN il"737 op, 7'3El~ 14il7 0"7' :13 0rf O':I,:lJ T~ 1. FEA I 2437, [01. 287v, FEA I 2441, [01. 33r, FEA I 2702, [01. 7v, FEA I 2405, [01.

':m~.

9v, [01. 2r. 11 2. FEA I 2437, [01. 287v, FEA 12441, [01. 33r, FEA I 2702, [01. 7v mil FEA I 2405, [01. 9v'::l.l1't '.l.lil. 113. FEA I 2437, [01. 287v, FEA I 2702, [01. 7v, FEA I 2405, [01. 9v. > FEA I I 2475, [01. 6r. 11 4. FEA I 2437, [01. 287v 7n~.

11

5. > FEA I 2437, [01. 287v, FEA I 2441, [01. 33r, FEA I 2702, [01. 8r, FEA I 2405, [01. 9v. 11 6. *FEA I 2475, [01. 6v. 11 7. FEA I 2437, [01. 289r, FEA I 2702, [01. 8r, FEA I 2405, [01. 9v

+ 1't~I.

11 8. FEA I 2405, [01. 9v '73.'. 11 9. FEA I 2437, [01. 289r

+ m~.

10. FEA I 2441, [01. 33v 'il. 1111. FEA I 2405, [01. 9v '73.'.1112. > FEA 12702, [01. 8r.

11l3. FEA I 2441, [01. 33v + f'I't:J.1I14. FEA I 2441, [01. 33v 'il.

188

Part I: Chapter 22 . t . ~:

1.22.25. "

.

ThIS comprises one type of conjugation, namely the

imperative 371F', (the vowel of) the first letter of which corresponds to (that of) the first letter of the symbol. The past form is 371i), for example ,~

1iJ

37)i) (Exod. 2: 14), (the vowel of) the first letter of which corresponds to the last vowel of the symbol. The noun form is 371i), for example il']~jrf 37']i) (Psa. 76:2). You can conjugate the patterns of T

forms with waw by analogy with this. 1.22.26. Take note that there are various other conjugations in addition to those mentioned above in which (the vowel of) the first letter of the imperative does not differ from (that of) the first letter of the past form, so it is not permissible to give them a symbol like the foregoing. Rather, (the vowel of) the first letter of the imperative and of the first vowel of the past form are the same. These are divided into various categories. 1.22.27.

Among these are intransitive conjugations in which the

imperative has no past form or noun of agent derived from it, (i.e. these are not derived) from the same imperative, for example :J Vi and its inflectional patterns, 371 and its inflectional patterns. For such forms it is not possible to establish a symbol. 1.22.28. Also included among these are various conjugations of passive verbs, such as

ilfry, 1~ry,

n'p~,

17o/ry, '~1

and analogous cases. It is

not possible to establish symbols for these either, since no imperative form exists that is used for them and they do not have an agent. It is not appropriate for them to have an imperative, for this would be inconsistent with their being passive forms. This is because when somebody is

Part I: Chapter 22

:2~'n7N

1~

,nN' ~,i'

189

'737 7~ntv

1 FEA I 2437, fo1. 289v. 11 6. FEA I 2405, fo1. 10r '~N7;).

11 7. FEA I

2437, fo1. 289v, FEA I 2405, fo1. 10r '1nN. 118. FEA I 2405, fo1. 10r '10.119. > FEA I 2437, fo1. 289v. 1110. > FEA I 2405, fo1. 10r. 1111. *FEA I 2437, fo1. 290r. 1112. FEA 12441, fo1. 34r, FEA I 2405, fo1. lOv'7;)O' N'. FEA I 2702, fo!' 8v N7;)O' N'. 11 13. FEA I 2441, fo!' 34r, FEA I 2405, fo!' 10v '7;)N. 11 14. FEA I 2441, fo!' 34r, FEA I 2405, fo1. lOv 'lN~.

Part I: Chapter 22

190

commanded to carry out an order he becomes an agent. It is also because an order communicated by the person who commands to the person who is commanded must have a meaning that is intelligible and that denotes something that may be carried out. This is not possible for passive verbs. 1.22.29. Included (among such conjugations) are those that differ (in

form) from this type of conjugation but nevertheless correspond to it in meaning, as, for example, (Psa. 22:11), 'i?.~J

'W~

19-n i1r.~

n)~iJ

(Lev. 5:23),

(Joel 1:9), CIJ~

'W~

h7-?-iJ

'r:t~7o/iJ

(Esther 2:6),

(1 Kings 22:34) and similar cases. It is possible that the

qame~

under the first letter of all these words stands in place of qibu~, case in CJ~?

~ryqT;l

'1}'?'DiJ that is as is the

(Psa. 62:4) and other cases of short qame~

stands in the place of

qibu~.

that

Given these facts, it is not possible to

establish a symbol for this type of conjugation either. Some forms, although resembling this type of conjugation, do not belong to it, such as, for example, ~)iJ

~O
1?i TN:> NiN' "T.?N "',~ il"'N"?N il£l"£l:>?N il::1 il::1nW" ip TN:> TN' il~N?37 :1'~?N Niil? T':>" TN? N~" ?~n" O? 1?i n?~N NiN' U~M 'OU ,m i1l~ O"? N~ ilnnN£l ONP~

il?'N "£l il~NP?

T,:>n TN N~£l

ON::1n?N

7':1 C',:1Vj"f il?'P TN 9"?N ",n S"?N TN::1'Nln" ip N~i1l?

T':> 37~ ,pn il~NP?

N~i1l":

P'£l N? N'O 1O"?37 j"f'Y C'i"Vj"f t,lVj"f "~:1 T,:>n TN ~N' nn£l::1 ':>N?N' r~p:1 N~iln

?37N£l?N' j"f~ '::137?N' "f~;rj Niil "?37 T':>" N?' j"f~ '37£l~?N ?'37£l~

T"::1' j"f~

1. FEA I 2441, fo1. 34r N~O' 34r ?'i17~.

i"n"?N '~N j"fJ'~Y

T':>'" j"f~

"il n"n::1 ip:> j"f~

'il "i?N ?37N£l?N 'l?£~ 1"::1 ?'P?N P'£l j"fJ~r. 'il "i?N ?l?N£l?N N? FEA I 2405, fo1. 10v '~O

N? 112. FEA I 2441, fo1.

113. *FEA 12437, fo1. 290v. 114. FEA I 2441, fo1. 34r + ':' n':l~.

115. FEA

12441, fo1. 34r, FEA I 2405, fo1. 10v + ':J. 116. FEA I 2441, fo1. 34r, FEA I 2405, fo1. 15r :lii"!). 11 7. FEA I 2405, fo1. 15r ~N!)?.

11 8. FEA I 2441, fo1. 34v N?N.

9. > FEA I 2441, fo1. 34v.1I10. *FEA I 2437, fo1. 291r.

II

Part I: Chapter 22

192

1.22.30. Among the conjugations (for which a symbol cannot be used)

are various conjugations of exceptional form. For example

'T;,tllP:

Orr

(Exod. 18:26) and forms of a similar pattern. Some say, with regard to 4

this form, that its imperative is i1~'tp. a noun with the form ~,tV 'i1W~

b~

:

Others say that it is derived from

that is a verbal noun. Another case is

"37i" ~

(Nahum 1:4), and forms of a similar pattern. Some say that

its imperative is mp:piJ and others that it is derived from (the imperative) tV~iJ

withoutyod. A further example is '~:p

J~r;t

O,~

(Gen. 43:29).

Some say that the imperative of this is mlJiJ. Others say that it is derived

tV1i', '9tp1~.

from the noun

Ttl',

like

derived from

Tin,

the /:lolem turning into short qame~,

O'p.~

.,tl~-'f

'9~IJ;.

Another case is

According to another opinion it is as in '9~lP;

(Hab. 2:8), but the dagesh has been elided, so that it is

imperative is i1~o/

i1?P i9o/T

(Psa. 20:4). Some claim that its

and others claim that its imperative is

TV!1 and that

the heh is added. A form resembling this is ~7

1~lPi (1 Sam.28:15), in that the discussion concerning the two forms is similar. 5 Further

irregular conjugations such as these could be mentioned. It is not possible to establish a symbol for any of these for there is no word that could represent both the imperative and past forms. 1.22.31. Among such conjugations are those that have many root letters

and are rarely attested. These include cases such as ni"J~ (lsa. 19:6), i1?'~tO/l

T'~iJ-Oq

(Gen. 13 :9), '~IJ

'n.~m

',~

(Lam.

'37WP,lPT;l

:?-'~lO (lsa. 66:12), and other forms of this type. For these also it is not possible to establish a symbol, for their inflected 1:20),

forms are not sufficiently attested to allow one to determine this.

41. e. '1:J~P 5

(Ruth 2:8), CJ.1~¥T:l

(Prov. 14:3).

I.e. They are said to be derived from imperatives with similar patterns, the two

possible imperative bases ofi1,tl~

being mn~

or ~l

with the addition of heh.

Part I: Chapter 22

il£)'1~n

'£) ~l;1n:J"IN

il1""N

TN

I;1N",,31noNI;1N '£) 1Ntvl;1N Ni1.:I",,'

I;1NP'

N""""

CON ')31N ~,

ilN1i""

'1i'

N",,'

,m,

1"

C'~

'Vl I;1NP" ;-r~

NI;1:J

r'M T"" i1.:IN I;1NP" tI'~V ,n' ,~ 3 1:J31I;1N' 1""NI;1N '£) i1t~£);

1NilntvN I;1p,

,m

,~

C;-r

~tr T"" li1.:lN CONI;1N T"" i1.:IN I;1NP" ;-rJ;-r;-r il1""N TN I;1NP' '11;1N

6

1.22.30.

'il '11;1N CONI;1N T"" Ni i1.:IN I;1NP"

TN I;1NP' '11;1N ilN1i"" '1i' N",,' ,;-r~'

C'~N

193

il'I;1~N

NI;1, il1:J1 C1pn N",,1;1 ill;1

il£)'1n 1n:J

r'~:1

Ni1.:I",,'

1.22.31.

tiN' 8n":1J ':1'JtN:1' ,m il£)'1~n

N1il '1l' N"""" 11;11 1'l 'I;1N cl;1 i1.:INI;1 ill;1 il""N1;131 31~,; il'1;131 31~p"

N""

w~vn ill' NI;1 N~'

l;1~n'

'V' "~'M

C'~

N1il TN£) '1i""I;1N

N1NilntvN il£)'1~n

1ilntv'

1. *FEA I 2437, fo1. 291v.1I2. > FEA I 2405, fo1. 15v.113. FEA I 2441, fo1. 35r. FEA 12437, fo1. 291v has ':1'711..". 11 4. FEA I 2405, fo1. 15 ·N7N'. FEA I 2441, fo1. 35r ,N,7N.1I5. FEA I 2441, fo1. 35r, FEA I 2405, fo1. 15v. FEA I 2437, fo1. 291v has 116. FEA I 2405, fo1. 15v Nil7n~'.

,m.

11 7. FEA I 2441, fol. 35r. FEA I 2405, fol. l3r "0.

FEA I 2437 291 v N'W. 11 8. *FEA I 2437, fol. 292r.

Part I: Chapter 22

194

1.22.32. There remain, in addition, a number of conjugations that are

quite well attested but (the vowel of) the first letter of their imperative is not different from (that of) the first letter of their past form, (which is the crucial feature that) would permit us to establish for them one of the aforementioned types of symbols. These include such as ~7.?fiJ inflectional patterns,

and its

ly.i:ll;m and its inflectional patterns, 1.~J;i

and its

inflectional patterns, pi:>iJ and its inflectional patterns, lVWiPJ;1iJ and its inflectional patterns, 1ijtpiJ and its inflectional patterns,

1~J;i

and its

inflectional patterns, pi:> and its inflectional patterns, iq~J inflectional patterns,

m~J;1i

and its inflectional patterns,

and its

il~J;1

and its

inflectional patterns, il1.iT and its inflectional patterns, illiil and its inflectional patterns,

77.'ij

and its inflectional patterns, '1.iil and its

inflectional patterns. If you choose to establish a symbol for these, you must make it correspond to the last vowels of the imperative and the past form, for the last vowels of these are not the same, unlike their first vowels. You must, however, make some (further) conditions in order to exclude various forms from such a category. This is because the last vowel of the imperative in many of the conjugations in the categories N~V

and

'~

are the same as the last vowel of the imperatives that

concern us here and if you do not lay down further conditions, you will clash (with regard to the conjugations you include) with the aforementioned conjugations of the categories ofN~il

,.

T

and '3~.

• -

1.22.33. Note that the aforementioned conjugations that differ in their

final vowel are divided into six categories according to one criterion but

Part I: Chapter 22

T~

N:J'~

370n~

37~1"£)

1il N~

~"'n?N

T~

l':Jl7?N ?1N Tl7 '~N?

Ut,r.Jrt 2

1m

,rtUrt

i1:INT1N1

rtJ:lrt

1m1

N? Nil'~1

1m1

'D1,tv?N T~

~"'Nn

8T~ "n~£)

T~

1m1

iln'~1

1m1 i1:INT1N1

'~N1?

6ilp:JN'D~

O.,? N~

P£)N1~

N~:J

i1:INT1N1

Nil?l7;,n 1?1 .,£) p£)nn

Nil"£) il7~

Nil'~1

n~'l7N

rt,n ",rt

TN ",,:J)"£) i1:INT1N1

TN? Ni1:I~ il1il '~N1?

~"'Nn

1m1

Nil"£) 'D,nWm Nil?'N1N ?n~

7N'n~

'~N1?

3'V~rt

rtJV~

rt"rt

TN n'~N

TN£) ':Jl7?N1 '~N?

N~

m:n i1:INT1N1

i1:INT1N1

1m1 i1:INT1N1

1?1? l7~n

il?

1m1 i1:INT1N1 P'~rt

1m1 i1:INT1N1

t"t,'rt

1m1 i1:INT1N1 TN il~N?7

4p,~

il~N?37

,tr~

1m1 i1:INT1N1 ~'irt

rtN'~

1.22.32.

l7NOnN?N

?n~

1m1 i1:INT1N1

si1:lNT1N1

i1:INT1N1

1m1

nN~?l7

":l~rt

1m1 i1:INT1N1

1?1 1l7:J "P:J"1

?1N ,""n" N? i1:I~?

il~1pn?N

1?11

195

?~1"

'~N1

N? , Jl

N:lrt

1?1 .,£) 'D,ntvn C? 9N~

IO'Jl N:lrt ~"'Nn?

il1il

l7",m

T~

12iln'~

lN~

TN

C?l7N1

il"1 "?l7 CNOPN ilnO 13"?N copm '~N1?

1.22.33.

il£)?n~N

1. FEA I 2441, fo!' 35v 1::JN3.'7N. FEA I 2405, fo!' l3r il~N73.'

11

2. Different order

of examples in FEA I 2441, fo!' 35v, FEA I 2405, fo!' l3r and FEA I 2475, fo!' Sr: P':lil

,m,

jJ)NT1N' 1iltm

,m,

mJ'. 113. FEA I 2441, fo!' 35v 1"'))3.'nil ,m, jJ)NT1N' pbil ,m,. 11

jJ)NT1N' tvtv'pnil

11'3.'nil. 11 4. FEA I 2441, fo!' 35v + jJ)NT1N'

5. *FEA I 2437, fo!' 292v. 116. FEA I 2441, fo!' 35v Np::JNtm.

11

7. Omission of n by

mistake in FEA I 2437, fo!' 292v: N1':l. FEA I 2441, fo!' 35v 1'n:l. FEA I 2475, fo!' Sr N1'n:l. 11 S. FEA I 2441, fo!' 35v, FEA I 2405, fo!' l3v + :J'1~.I9 fo!' l3v.

11

> FEA I 2405,

10. FEA I 2441, fo!' 36r Cl. 11 11. *FEA I 2437, fo!' 28Sr.

2441, fo!' 36r 1:l'. 1Il3. FEA I 2441, fo!' 36r '73.'.

11

12. FEA I

196

Part I: Chapter 22

fall into three according to another criterion. One of these is where the ~er

final vowel of the imperative is

and the final vowel of the past form

is pataJ:t. This is the most common category. The second is also where the final vowel of the imperative is

~er

and the final vowel of the past form

is pataJ:t but it nevertheless differs from the foregoing. The third is where the last vowel of the imperative is qame~.

~er

and the vowel of the past form is

The fourth is also where the last vowel of the imperative is and the final vowel of the past form is

qame~

~er

but it nevertheless differs

from the foregoing. The fifth is where the final vowel of the imperative is ~er

and the final vowel of the past form is J:tireq. The sixth is also where

the final vowel of the imperative is

~er

and the final vowel of the past

form is J:tireq but it nevertheless differs from the foregoing. Among the conjugations of this group there are some in which the first letter of the imperative remains in the past form, others in which it does not remain but rather changes to nun and others in which it may remain or may be changed to nun. 1.22.34. Now, the first of the six categories, which can be reduced to

three, consists of an imperative with three or four root letters that has ~er at the end and heh with J:tireq at its beginning, so long as this is not followed by one of the letters

'37ni1~,

and the past form has pataJ:t at the

end, unless the final letter is Ja/eph, in which case it has qame~

on

account of the Ja/eph and the changes that it entails. Every imperative that has three root letters and ~er noun of agent of 'i~lf>

(i.e.

as its final vowel and has the pattern of the

'i?iW), the past form

of this also has pataJ:t

as its final vowel. These two types in terms of meaning can be classified as a single category. The symbol that has been established for them is

:lQi?

Part I: Chapter 22

i:J~'

T'r1'op):J i~' i:J~ T':J' i~' i:J~ 11:J' 3T~ ~i1')m ~i1'£) c'pn ~ i'l i1l' ,,37 m:J, ~, i1~p:J

i:J37'~ ~,

i:J~'

i1~p:J

7i:J~'

i:J~

T'n~p):J ~

~,

i137l~'

i1"~'

T'n~p)

'l' r~p:J

T~

'l' m~£)

'n~

'l' m~ cop

,~

m~

i:J~

,~

i:J37'~

T~

~in'

')37~

i1'~

'£)

i~

13T~ ~37li

T~

~i137:J' 6

~,

i:J~'

i1~P):J T~ ~i1'£)

9T~

i:J37'~ ,~

~in'

T') "~

i"ln'

s"P)£)

1.22.34.

co~ T~'i1£)

~i1'

FEA I 2437, fo1. 288r. 11 7. *FEA I 2437, fo1. 288v. 11 8. FEA I 2441,

fo1. 36r "PI1!). 11 9. FEA I 2441, fo1. 36r '!). 11 10. FEA I 2475, fo1. 8v C~Op'. 11. FEA I 2441, fo1. 36v ~n:lp17'.

fo1. 264r.

12. FEA I 2441, fo1. 36v ~'·ln.

11

1113. *FEA I 2437,

Part I: Chapter 22

198 1.22.35.

The first type (in this first category) is divided into seven

conjugations. 1.22.36. One conjugation is (that of) the imperative vowel of which is

~er

'D7.i?i),

the final

corresponding to the first vowel of the symbol,

namely :lQi? The past form is 'D7?~,

for example 'D.7?~

T$.-7~

(2

Chron. 16:7), the final vowel of which is pataJ:t corresponding to the final vowel of the symbol. The noun of agent is 'D?7~, 'Di7?~J

for example i1~J

(1 Kings 19: 17). It does not have a noun of patient, since it is

intransitive. You can conjugate the patterns (of similar forms) by analogy with this. 1.22.37. A second conjugation is (that of) the imperative final vowel of which is

~er,

1?'iJJ;li), the

corresponding to the first vowel of the

symbol. The past form is 17iJJ:li) with pataJ:t, corresponding to the final vowel of the symbol. Its noun of agent is 1?'iJ;l~,

i7pry:p P"J~

for example 17.iJ;l~

(Prov. 20:7). You can conjugate similar forms by analogy

with this. 1.22.38. A third conjugation is (that of) the imperative 11.fJ;li). The past

11fJ;li).

form is

rl~f

,1.fJ;l~i

The noun of agent is 1.fJ;l~,

for example 'W~

(Isa. 65:16). You can conjugate similar forms by

analogy with this. 1.22.39. A fourth conjugation is (that of) the imperative 'ijtpi). The past form is 'iJtpi), for example ~)1tpi-7

'W~

(Josh. 22: 17). The past

form may also have nun and have the form 'iJtp~,

C.,W ~iJ-7f '[ltp~iJ

this.

(Ezek. 23 :48). The noun of agent is 'ijtp~,

like "~1 for example tz,;"~iJ

(Lev. 14:11). You can conjugate similar forms by analogy with

Part I: Chapter 22

'1~

"N

1'~P)

3~J

7:l t,11

rr'rr,

p:J

~'J

p:J

sl'1~P)

ili:JN

'1~

Nili:JN

~0

~t,J

4

,trn~

p:J

'in

'1~

Nili:JN

2il1~N'37

ilnl1N£l

"37£l~

il,

,t,rrnrr ~m ,t,rrnrr ~37'Ni

7i"'Y '~n!1

1.22.36.

!10~

i'" mN'

i~N

~'il1

"N

i~37'N

CON'

"371~

iln1N£~

il"37 Op,

m~

m~

'37N£l'N

mNnN il"37 Op,

'1~

i~N

ili:JN

199

ili:JN

~t,Jr

N"

~'il1

lNl1

1.22.37.

6il1~N'37 ,trn~

"N

m~

'37N£l'N' il'N~)

,'!1nrr N~

i~37'N

,'!1nrr i~N

r'N!1

il"37 Op,

"!1n~r

m~

l1'Nl1 ~'il1

'~N

1.22.38.

ip:J "!1n~

'37N£l'N'

ilN"~ 'r~

lOm~

'r~J

i~37'N

1')~

l':J'£l

~'Nr

ip:J

'ru~

i~N

i~37'N

'r~

9m~

l':J n,,', '37N£l'N

CON'

37~Ni

~'il1

1.22.39.

ll Nt, '~N ip:J C'~ Jrr t,:l ,'OU, 1~'

ilN~'t)

1. FEA I 2441, fo1. 36v, FEA I 2475, fo1. Sv + n~N73.

8'i'"

il"37 Op, 'r~

m,.

11

2. FEA I 2441, fo1. 36v

113. Different biblical quotation in FEA I 2441, fol. 36v: ~7J 3:26). 11 4. > FEA I 2441, fol. 36v. 11 5. FEA I 2475, fol. Sv T'n~VJ:l.

"nN' (Jud. 11 6. *FEA I

2437, fol. 264v. 7. > FEA I 2475, fo1. Sv. 11 S. FEA I 2441, fo1. 37r '1l. 11 9. > FEA I 2441, fol. 37r. 11 10. > FEA I 2441, fol. 37r, FEA I 2702, fo1. 23r. 11 11. FEA I 2441, fol. 37r. FEA 12437, fol. 264v.

un1~.

Part I: Chapter 22

200

1.22.40. A fifth conjugation is (that of) the imperative lVWiPJ;liJ. The past form is lVWiPJ;liJ. The noun of agent is lVWiPJ;~, of 7,.ir\lp~

with the pattern

(Isa. 59:15). You can conjugate similar forms by analogy

with this. 1.22.41. A sixth conjugation is (that of) the imperative pi~J, may be inferred) from '~i:;Tl Hi~J.

i1~

The noun of agent is pi~.

(which

(lsa. 54: 14). The past form is You can conjugate similar forms by

analogy with this. 1.22.42. A seventh conjugation is (that of) the imperative past form is '~lJ;i. 37l1m~:;, -

h O•

:

-

: .

'~lJ;i.

The

The noun of agent is '~1J;l,

like

'l}';;:11

")'37:1 (Gen. 27: 12). You can conjugate similar forms by \,T"

:

analogy with this. 1.22.43. The second type (in this first category) has one conjugation, namely the imperative pi~.

The final vowel of this is :jere corresponding

to the first vowel of the symbol :lQ~.

The past form is Hi~,

the last

vowel of which corresponds to the last vowel of the symbol. The noun of agent is PtJ71, with the pattern of77i3771 "W~ patient is Hi:J71 like 7*"71

ory,?

(Isa. 3:12). The noun of

(Mal. 1:7), which is equivalent (in

pattern) to the noun of patient of 11.f, one of the conjugations of (the category of) N~

iJ . You can conjugate similar forms by analogy with this.

1.22.44. In the second category you should include any imperative with two root letters, with :jere as the final vowel, with heh in initial and final position and that has a past form with qame:j as its final vowel. According to such a specification, the conjugation symbol '~,

i1~lJ,

which is included by the

would fall into this category, but this would not invalidate it.

(You should also include) any imperative with one or two root letters with the pattern of the noun of agent ofi1tp~

with :jere as the final vowel

(i.e. i1lpi37), and that has a past form with qame:j as its final vowel. The symbol that has been established for these two types is i1~

.

Part I: Chapter 22

lrQrQ'i'nrT 1:l377N' 1~N 3"1i" N~

il"737

201

rQrQ'i'nrT iJ)~

OP'

O~N:J

~"1

1.22.40.

2rQrQ'i'no 73N~'

t,t"nrQo In:l

ilN1"~

'J~

rTi"Y:l 1~ ilN1~

5"1i., N~

1~N

P'~rT

iJ)~

il"737 OP' rJ'~

01NO ~"1

1~N

'11'11 nrT 1:l377N' il"737 OP' 11 ~1 ~

1.22.41.

73N~' \r~iT>

1:l377N'

iJ)~

'11'11 nrT " J'l1:l '~"rT

37:lNO ~"1 71~

1.22.42.

'11'11~

73N~' il1"N~)

il1:JN 1~N P'~

iJ)~

P'~

1nN' ~"1

1:l377N' :lOO ,m il~N73

t,t,WO "rQlJ

1'?

1nN

,m ")N117N 7Nl1~

In:l P'~O

7'3~

7'N 71~

73N~'

71~:l

l"1~P):

71~

Nil1:JN

t,~UO

ont, 71~

ilN1"~

1.22.43.

7"1"" N~

r~,O

il1:JN

67'3~N

il"737 OP' N:lrT ~"1N 1.22.44.

iJ)~

.,,,.,

,~

1:l377N IN Nil il1:JN' Nil il7'N' 8rl1~p)

~"1N

'N "7~N IN rl1~p)

ONOPN 1~ 1nN' ~1n il1:JN' rT~l}

r1il7 il37'~N

il"~

1~

7:J1" ~1'()7N

il~N73'

1~

1~N

N1m r~p

7:J' il~PN) 9

il1:JN

1"" ~1 T~'tr OON In "737 ~1nr

N~"

il1:JN'

r~p:l

"i" iJ)~

1:l377N

rT1V. r~Op7N 1.

tvtv'prlil ':J1'7N' > FEA I 2702, fo1. 23r. 11 2. *FEA I 2437, fo1. 265r. 11 3. FEA I 11 4. FEA I 2442, fo1. 37r. FEA I 2437, 265r 1"n. 11 5. FEA I 2702,

2702, fo1. 23r "".

fo1. 23v "". 116. *FEA I 2437, fo1. 265v. 117. FEA I 2441, fo1. 37v, FEA I 2702, fo1. 23v"i. 11 8. FEA I 2702, fo1. 23v lNn~p). 265v has 71'£l7N.

119. FEA I 2441, fo1.

37v. FEA 12437, fo1.

202

Part I: Chapter 22

1.22.45.

The first type (of this category)

IS

divided into three

conjugations. 1.22.46. One of them is the imperative il~fJ, ~er

il~

the final vowel of which is

corresponding to the first vowel of the symbol. The past form is with

qame~

example h~

corresponding to the last vowel of the symbol, for

il,~-7

"'$ (1

example illil;-CW? il,~J

Kings 3:2). Its noun form is il~,

for

(1 Chron. 22:19). You can conjugate similar

forms by analogy with this. 1.22.47. A second conjugation is (that of) the imperative

past form is il~;J,

(1 Kings 2:26). Its noun

lP1;~i similar forms by analogy with this.

(Prov. 18:9). You can conjugate

like i~9N71:;

1.22.48. A third conjugation is (that of) the imperative

(can be inferred) from C"~9 u~n

The

for example i'H~l;J-W

form is il~;

il~;J.

il~;J.

~l;

il~;J,

which

(2 Kings 14:11). The past form is

The noun form is il~; with the pattern of n1T~:;> il;.¥~' (Psa. 37:35). You can conjugate similar forms by analogy with this. 1.22.49. The second type (of this category) has two conjugations. 1.22.50. Its first conjugation, which has one root letter, is (that of) the

imperative il!.iil. The final vowel of this is ~er

corresponding to the first

vowel of the symbol. The past form is illiil with qame~

corresponding to

the last vowel of the symbol. Its noun of agent is il1~,

for example il;.b'

'''rt"Yf¥ttf (Prov. 6:13). The noun of patient is ilV~. similar forms by analogy with the patterns of this.

You can conjugate

Part I: Chapter 22

7n~

T'n~i)

,~

2il':J~

l

~il':J

p:J

0i" ,!,

7n~

C~t,

:-r~0

r~i':J

m~

:-r~!1J

7'~

m~

:-r~!1J

:-rJ!1J:-r ii':J

203

~"n

':J1.7~,

1.22.46.

m~

il~71.'

CO~7'

7'~

:-r~!1J

n'!1

Nt,

il7~n

'i':J 3:-rJvn:-r s:-r£)'n~

':J1.7~,

:-rJvn:-r ,~

7n~

:-rJvn~

m~

n'tN~

l~

:-r'l.!n~

In:J

m~

7

'n~

1.22.47.

~"n

il:J~V

il':J~

~"n

4:-rJvn:-r il'71.' 0i" 'n~Nt,!1 ~

6,,;.,

:-rN,n:-r ,~

l~n

CO~7'

il~';

C' J£) 'N,n',

m~

il'71.'

7'~ 71.'~,

7n~

0i"

~il':J

:-r,~

7'1.~,

1. FEA I 2441, [01. 37v, FEA 12702, [01. 24r. 112. *FEA I 2437, [01. 266r. 11 3.

immil ,:13.';1'\' > FEA I 2702,

[01.

24r. 11 4. FEA I 2702,

2702, [01. 24r l'\!),n". 116. FEA I 2702, [01. 24r "~. 2437, [01. 266r. 118. *FEA I 2437, [01. 266v.

[01.

,,,1'\

24r + ':11'\. 11 5. FEA I

117. FEA I 2702, [01. 24r. > FEA I

204

Part I: Chapter 22

1.22.51. The second conjugation, which has two root letters, is (that of) the imperative n,.iT, which (can be inferred) from n'1~

'n)r7~

nJ);

(Job 18: 15). Its past form is n1iT. Its noun of agent is nl.im. If a noun of patient were derived from it, this would be

nl.,m.

You can conjugate

similar forms by analogy with this. 1.22.52. In the third category you should include any imperative with three root letters, with form with ~er

~er

as the final and initial vowel, that has a past

as its final vowel. (You should include) also any

imperative with two root letters with

as its final vowel, with heh at ~er

its beginning but not its end, and that has a past form with J:rireq as its final vowel. The symbol that has been established for this is ''1*,. 1.22.53.

The first type (of this third category) consists of one

conjugation, namely (that of) the imperative 77.'i]. The final vowel of this is

~er

corresponding to the first vowel of the symbol. Its past form is

"7'i], the final vowel of which is J:rireq corresponding to the final vowel of the symbol. The noun of agent is 7'7:'i?, which (may be inferred) from

7'7:'; i7~

(Isa. 15:3). You can conjugate similar forms by analogy with

this. 1.22.54. The second type (of this category) consists of one conjugation, namely the imperative

".in.

The final vowel of this is ~er

corresponding to the first vowel of the symbol. Its past form is

",in

with J:rireq corresponding to the final vowel of the symbol. The noun of agent is ",i~ patient is :l~;',

for example 7i~o/

"1i~

(1 Sam. 2:26). The noun of

which is like the noun of patient of ::lV/iJ, one of the

conjugations included by the symbol N~

iJ.

Part I: Chapter 22

T~

rr1,t i~N

i1:I~

N~

3~inN

T'£lin:J i1:I~

2rr'in

737N£l7N' i17nN~

1" 7'3£l~

i1~P):J

i1:I~

i1~P)

'~tT

i1i:>N>

i1:I~

i1i:>N

4

T~

37'~N

s

i1~N73

1.22.53.

7'N

N T"

,nN' ~"in

""tT

rr"t'

7:>' i1~P):J

'1V. 17'7 i1i:>N i~N

'V

i1i:>N i1"7~N

T'£lin:J i~N

i1i:>N ";''' i1:I~

1.22.51.

N;' TN' r1m~

i17'N' T'n~p):J

i1i:>N "£l T"7~N

N~"

,rru

7:> n7Nn7N OOP7N "£l 7,pm

i:J377N TN T"n~p):J

"£l' T'n~p)

TNn ~"in

i:J377N' .M"!ll

T

n7n:J i~N

.,,,.,

205

7n~

T'n~p)

7n~

737N£l7N' Ni1i:>N i17Nn~

,."rr ,nN' ,'"rr i1:I~

i1i:>N i~N 7n~

,~

i1~P):J

7'3£l~N N~tT

"N~

,m ~"in

")Nn7N 7Nn~

i:J377N' 6i1n~N73

"',~ ~"iNn

ip:> ,nN

1. FEA I 2702, fo1. 24v. FEA I 2437, fo1. 266v. il'7~K. 717K£l7K COK'. 113. FEA I 2702, fo1. 24v ~"n.

1.22.54.

7'N 7n~

"',~

T"n~p)

737N£l7N' Ni1i:>N

!:lWtT T~

7'3£l~N

7n~:J

11 2. FEA I 2702, fo1. 24v +

114. *FEA I 2437, fo1. 277r. 115. FEA I

2702, fo1. 24v. > FEA I 2437, fo1. 277r. 11 6. *FEA I 2437, fo1. 277v.

206

Part I: Chapter 22

1.22.55. This is what comes to mind with regard to the types of verbal

conjugations and the nouns of agent, and what should be mentioned with regard to symbols that have been established to represent the imperative and past forms by their initial and final vowels. I have not exhaustively listed all the inflectional forms of each of these conjugations. This is because it has not been my intention here to do so, but rather only (to mention) the imperative, the past form, the noun of agent and the noun of patient. Another reason is that several of the grammarians from among our elders in Iraq, may God have mercy upon them, have undertaken this task. Perhaps (more on this matter) will be dealt with later.

Part I: Chapter 22

207

7Nl'!)N7N ~"Nn :1"~ V~ illnN N~ N'il!) 1.22.55. '!) ':1l'7N' '~N7 il"~'7N nN~7l' ,:J" T'7l'N!)7N il'Niln)N '7N ,7' T~ ~"n 7:J n'WN C7' il':JN' il7'N 7l'N!)7N' '~N7 '~N7 7:1 N)ilil f'l7N '7' 0'7 mN7 N):J'W~ T~ T"v"i"7N fl':1 ilN~vn 'v '7' TN7' 7'l!)~N '31:1 T~ ,7' 'i' N~:1" il77N Cil~n' T"VN'l'7N N~O'

PART I: CHAPTER 23

ON THE CONDITIONS THAT MUST BE OBSERVED WHEN THE PATTERNS OF WORDS ARE FORMED ON THE BASIS OF THOSE OF OTHERS 1.23.1.

This applies to verbs and nouns but not particles, although

particles constitute one of the parts of speech, since a particle, unlike a verb or a noun, cannot be formed into patterns nor can it act as the model for the pattern (of other words). The purpose of this in nouns is to ensure that they resemble one another (in inflection) with regard to the plural and the singular forms and the conjoined and disjoined forms. In verbs (the purpose is to ensure) that they correspond to one another in their conjugation. This feature is exclusive to these two parts of speech (i.e. nouns and verbs) and is not exhibited by particles. 1.23.2. Take note that, if you wish to know how to form the patterns of words in Hebrew, (I tell you that) you must observe seven conditions if the word is a verb. One of these is that the form of the word that is patterned must be like the form of the word that acts as the model of the pattern. The second is that the two words must belong to the same functional category. The third is that they must have the same attribute. The fourth is that the number of root letters in one word must be the same as those in the other word. The fifth is that the two words must be in agreement with regard to the retention or the elision of a letter that is liable to elision. The sixth is that the two must be equal in that the place of the elided letter in one of them is the same as it is in the other. The

PART I: CHAPTER 23

Ni1~37:l

UND;N;N TNT1N "D i137N'~;

~"'tZ);N

"D l:lN:l

Y37:l ";37

1'::;' 3.'~ 'El ~'n"

~"n'

~o,

1" ~,

'bn

~O':1

'~3.El

m~

i1'l:~

'~El)

~"n'

~"n' 'b~El 1~7

i1'El'::;'

1~:;'

1~

~"W

2i13.':10

m'71~

i1t;El"~

'El 1~

~',on

1~

~i13.':"

1~

i13.'~:;

i13.'~Eln

~i1'n

1~

'El

11

3

'n~

~'n

c::;,n

'El

i1"l'~

'~n:;,

3.'~

"3.' 1'::;"

~'n

2. *FEA I 2437, fo1. 278v.

(evidently a scribal error for i1l'~).

'El 1" 1~

":;,~

~'n

')~:13."

~i1n'm

~i10:;"

'~n:;,

i1'~l

i1t;El"~

i1"l'~

1~

1" 'El 'El,

'~3.El 1~

~m

171' ,~

1.23.2.

'l:1)'El

~i1'n

~"n'

c'3.~

m'71~

,~

1. *FEA I 2437, fo1. 277v-278r. 278v il17'~

1~

1,nwn ~i10'O

1~

1.23.1.

jn~

1)~

'3.~n

'El ~i'Eln i1,i1 'El

i1'bEl"~

l~n'bE"

~,

~i1:

~,

"3.'::;'

'El

n"~

~i1')m

'n~

~'n

i1El'3.~

1,j 'El p::;,' i1l'~

c~0i'

'3.'El" ,:1 i1:1 171' 3.'~l 'El ~i1"on 'El ~i1'Eln '~3.El p' c~,:; c~0i'

"'Eln~

~':1nOEl

1,j:1

c~,:;

co~,

'~n 1~

1~

n'n

,~

'El ,::;", 1"

m:1n

1'::;' 'El 11

~',on

3. FEA I 2437, fo1.

Part I: Chapter 23

210

seventh is that the conjugation of the two words must be the same in its full extent. If the word that you are patteming is a noun, you must observe three conditions with regard to this. One of these is that the two words should have the same number of root letters, in addition to the fact that they should be equal in form when conjoined and when not conjoined, 1 and (should be equal) when plural and when singular.2 Section concerning issues relating to verbs in this chapter 1.23.3. The first of the seven conditions relating to verbs is that one word must be like the other with regard to form and structure, so that they are pronounced the same and perceived by the sense of hearing to be the same although they differ in their letters. This is illustrated by examples such as iltv3.' and il'3.', iltv3." and il'3.", ,~tV T

T

T T ' " -: -

',' -: -

-

T

and ':::IT, 'i~tV -

T

:

•

and 'i:;)T' : •

etc. 1.23.4. As for the second condition, namely that they should be equal in their functional category, this means that they should resemble one another in being both verbs. One cannot be a verb and the other a noun, even if they correspond to one another in form, as in the following: '1~ ~)·rJ

(Gen. 43:20), which has the same form as i~

:J9~

(1 Kings 7:23),

although the first is an infinitive and the second a future verb; (Deut. 28:36) -

'?Wf I n?i' (1 Chron. 26:14), where the first is a verb

and the second a noun; il:t~

';J7.iill (Num.

17:11) -

'i?:h,? '1~;

5:8), where the first is an imperative and the second is a noun; O'~3. (Isa. 44:13) - tVi~

il1;'; ';J7.i'

:JWIJ

(Amos •

••

tV,n J- T

(Isa. 33:8), where the first is a noun and the

second a verb. To these could be added further pertinent examples.

I

This is the second of the three conditions.

2

This is the third condition.

11

'N~4

Al 'IOj 'lOa I V'iId 'L

JOL '{OJ '8L1717 I V'iId 'S II'G4!.!

Al

11

'N~4

'{OJ 'lOa I V'iId '£

11

'N~U

lNU

+

'GN~4

AI

'{OJ

'zoa I V'iId '8

Al 'IOj 'lOa I V'iId '9

11

'at!.!

+

JOL 'IOj '8L1717 I V'iId 'v

Al 'IOj 'lOa I V'iId 'N~!.

II'A6a '{OJ 'L£17Z I V'iId*

'z

II'J6a 'IOj 'L£17Z I V'iId*

'I

L.4L c.!c.!N "'CL.,, L.!L.N N4c.!'CL."

UL.~

a.t,Q U~t

Nn~

N4NL4L.! NQC LN4UNC"L.! att4 N4" 'C"L.

Cll.!L.l.! Ll.!LGl. 'ttaL. ,LaJ

t~c:'

aN4NL4L.!g

Nc.!L.

LN4UNC"L.!

NQC

Lc.!u 4

N4u " N4NL4L.!L att4 LN4UNC"L.! NQC Lc.! u 4 Ll.!L'tl.

N4NL 4v c.! u 4

c.!J;:L.L.N

LN4UC".!~

att4N

,L.Ll. ,L.l.n

NUL."L.!c.!N Nl

"cLl

N4u " L.!"

att4N

c.!Quat:4N

N4J;:,,'CL.!

LN4NCL."

NUL."L.!c.!N

''''£Z'I

NQc.!N

CN4NCL."

Lc.! u 4

,L'tl.

c.!u4 ,QLt NU'L

c.!tt

a"

NUaNaL.!c.!N

CLCL.!N

att4N

c.!tt

a" 4N

'~9 cLl

N4J;:" 'CL.! Nl

"cLl

LNc.!N N4al.L.Cl N4uNC" LL.!L UQNL"L.!c.!N a" N4uCC aL.!LE

L,a~l.!

L,a'tl.!

c.!LL.L.N

QLN

CL.L 'CL.!c.!N

L~Cl.

L~C:.

c.!tt

c.!l

L,~Cl.

L,~C:.

Ncu4Nk

N4ac

N4a~u,1

NUL."

LNal.t:NL.!'l L.4L

UL.LaL.!c.!N

CL.L 'CN

LNUL.

CN4NCL."

T£Z"I

a"

LL.4L

L"L.L.Nl

N4J;:,,'CL.!

c.!u 4 a~l.! tt4"

La'tl.!

UNQL.!

LN4L.!""NL.!

N4Qc.!tt

t:Nl

"cLl

aN4al.L.Cl N4NL4 c.!l N4Qt:ttL.! alL.LCl a"L.! L.!L Nl "cLl

aJ;:4 a"c.!N "cuJ. N4NattN4 c.!l L.!L.N N4t:Nt:

LUaL."L.L.!c.!N t:ttL.

~

UQNL"L.!c.!N

N4~aL.!

a"

N4~aL.!

LL.att

N4a~,1

NUL.L.!N NuaNa

La"

N4UL.~

a" ttL.L.

'Cc.!ttL.!c.!N

N4NJ;:4"L.! a"L.!c.!N

CL.!N"UL.! LNl CNl c.!N UltL.! c.!l N4NQc.!NJ L.Ntt"U a" L.4L al.L.LClN a"

N4NCL."

LQNt:ttL.!N

Nal.UL.NCL.!c.!N

IlZ

a"

NuaNa

N4UJ;:L."~

N4"

£Z l;)ldlll.{:::> :1 lllld

212

Part I: Chapter 23

1.23.5. As for the third condition, which is that they should correspond to each other in having the same attribute, this means that if one is a past verb the other must likewise be a past verb, (if one is) a future verb, (the other must be) the same, or (if one is) an imperative, (the other must be) the same. If this were not the case, then it would be permissible to form the pattern of C,~1"

~

li? (Isa. 41 :21) on the basis of"W~7

~:J 1~

(Psa.

59:4), although the first is a plural imperative and the second a third person past verb, it would be permissible to form the pattern of :1'1i?1

C~N

(Ezek. 37:17) on the basis of C;~iJ

'Ji?l C~7'.

(Micah 3:6),

although the first is an imperative and the second is a past verb, and it would be permissible to form the pattern oftV!\;., on the basis of .,~

lv,;>J;l (2 Chron. 25:23)

lJJ;l (Job 17:2), although the first is past and second

is future. Nothing like this is permissible, since in each case there is no relation in pattern. 1.23.6. As for the fourth condition, which is the requirement that the number of the root letters in one word should be the same as in the other, this is necessary, since otherwise it would be permissible to form the pattern of 7~iJ

:J~91

(Num. 34:5) on the basis of nj~

lJ~

(Num.

11 : 18), although the root in the first consists of two letters but consists of three letters in the second, it would be permissible to form the pattern of j:J!.l"~

np~

(Prov. 9:1) on the basis of n#iJl~

n!)1o/

(Isa. 14:4),

although the taw in the first is not a root letter but is indeed a root letter in the second, and it would be permissible to form the pattern offi??1J1 n)'~ (Psa. 59:14) on the basis oq~W

~1j?

~7.

(1 Sam. 16:1), although the

root in the first consists of two letters but in the second it consists of three. To these could be added further pertinent examples.

Part I: Chapter 23

,nN' ~,

,~

'1~N7

n:JN~

N1~

'N 37n~

'~JS

N~i1pn

N73~

s"N07' N'~

'i1~

IN i1:JN

'N 2N'~

o,'rr orr'Sv "i"

N73~

Ni17n~

1'~

In "N07' N'~ s':JNn7N' N'~

i17'N7N 1'~

~1'(Z)7N

N~'

,7' N7'7 i1:JN 'i1~ '1~N7 N~i1"n ,~ '1;""7N 1'~ 37~ ,~ rnJ' '737 S':1lrr rrn':1 rrnJ:1 IOn;" IN:;" i1n7n i1':JNn7N ,~

'J'V

1.23.6.

1'" i17'N7N ,~ ll'Nn7N I':;' 37~ r:1'~ NSO '737 rron:1 rS~ In n;', lN~' i1'7~N i1':JNn7N 15 ~iT lS"~on ,t, rrMp "£) ~iT' ,::1 Mp

1. FEA I 4478, fa!. 70v, FEA I 2702, fo1. 3r, FEA I 2405, fa!. 3v. FEA I 2437, fa!. 280v has has i1~JIU.

,m.

11

2. FEA I 2702, fa!. 2v, FEA I 2405, fa!. 3v. FEA I 2437, fa!. 280 v 11 3. FEA I 2702, fa!. 2v, FEA I 2405, fa!. 3v + ,p. 114. *FEA I 2437,

fa!. 28lr. 11 5. FEA I 2702, fa!. 2v, FEA I 2405, fa!. 3v ,~. ,~!).

2v ,m.

11

7. FEA I 2441, fa!. 90v + 1~37.

11

11 6. FEA I 2702, fa!.

8. FEA I 2702, fa!. 2v, FEA 12405, fo1. 3v

119. FEA I 2702, fo1. 2v, FEA I 2405, fo1. 3v 1~'"

1110. > FEA I 2405, fo1.

3v. 1111. > FEA I 2441, fo1. 91r. 1112. *FEA I 2437, fo1. 281v.

11

13. FEA I 2702, fo1.

3r i1"'pl1. 11 14. Different word order in FEA I 2441, fo1. 91r, FEA I 2702, fo1. 3r, FEA I 2405, fa!. 5r:

iI1~

I'pnm i1'~

I1JI1I1. 1115. FEA I 2702, fa!. 3r ~OI1.

16. FEA I 2441, fo1. 91r, FEA I 2405, fa!. 5r. FEA I 2437, fo1. 281v has C'::l!)I1.

11

216

Part I: Chapter 23

belong to its structure. Similar cases of this are "wrl1~ 30:26), .,?~

il~t;1

(Gen.

il)1 (Gen. 45:9), etc.

1.23.8. As for the sixth condition, namely the requirement that they correspond to one another in this, that the position of the elided letter in one of them is the same as its position in the other, this (is necessary), since, otherwise, two forms of different patterns would be confounded. A case in point is C~tp

n~:

(Psa. 109: 13) and :J1?~

The position of the elided letter in

n?p:

iJ:1 (Gen. 28:20).

is at the end of the word, its

virtual form with retention of the letter being

7~lO/:

ilIJi?:,

as in il.!J?:-~71

i??tp (Deut. 25 :6). In i1:1, however, the place of the elided letter, namely nun, is between the yodh and the daleth, its virtual form with retention of the letter being

i1~:,

since nun belongs to the root of

this lexical class. The difference between

iln~"

"."

T

•

and i'1)", therefore, is -: •

clear, on account of the difference in the position of the elided letters, although this is not apparent before they are restored in their virtual forms. A similar case in this regard is

1D11¥ )7~T:l

(Isa. 47:3) andiW~

1W: (Deut. 23:20). In the first a heh has been elided from the end, its virtual form with retention of the letter being il7~T:,

70i?1

as in i~¥l

il,7~T:

(Prov. 26:26). In the second the position of the elided nun is

between the yodh and the shin, its virtual form with retention of the letter being 1W~:,

since it belongs to the root of the lexical form. So the

difference between them is clear, although they may prima facie be considered to have the same pattern.

Part I: Chapter 23

"N :t"

217

2"0 171:J I"il ~7;)

'r&I J .MN 3

7117;) il~):J 4

~'n7N

37~';)

,m 01N07N ~'W7

l':J "0 N7;)il"'~01

171 N7'7 i1)N 'ilO "':J~7N

"0 il37~';):J

7117;) 171' "':J~7N

1n7~

5"0 il37~';)

N7;)il"1n~

~i1)7;

'~1:J7;)

'N'r&I'tJ '~r&I 7~1'

:tn~'

1'7~

1":J il37~';)

1pO ;",7~

8il1il

1"0,n7N 37~';)

~7;)il"O

N" 7~N

1~7

:tn~'

'~1:J7;)N

1"N:J117N 17;)

1r&1'

il7'N7NO

7117;) 1":J

~i1)7;

:t'l.M '~1:J7;)N

1pO il11"7 7~N

'r&lN

1.M"11 'l.M

17;) i1)':J7

37~';)

~il':JN

6""

:tn~'

~i1)7;

7il,"1pm

1":J N7;) 'il6

137:J N7;)i1)7;) 1"'~:J7;) ":J17;)7N ")377;)7N "0 N7;)il7117;)'

ilm:J11:J "

'n~

,~

~il"'

~,

~'il

T~:J

,~ ~mn

N~ il"~

,~

~'n:J

?1

(Exod. 16: 18).

Part I: Chapter 23

2N~i17l'

n~rp

'11

'f1~i"

C'~":l

'N N'i1 T"

~"17N

l i1i1N:P,vN' ,~t

'f1'l' ":J'~7N i1~'7N

"l' 3 i1m:Jn 0'377 T')7N llN'O Ni17~ T~ ni" 'n ON77N 11:J 17~ c,~'" f1N ,~ '717 ,~ ,i1 "7N ,~ '717 i1:J:JN' 7:J ,~ 'n 17':J 110'7' '~1:l

,~"

T~

'~N7

71~:J

1. FEA I 2441, fo1. 92r, FEA I 2702, fo!' 4v. FEA I 2437, fo1. 383r has In. 112. *FEA 12437, fo!' 283v. I FEA I 2441, fo!' 92r, FEA I 2702, fo!' 4v, FEA I 2405, fo1. 6v i1'NT\~.

11 3. FEA I 2702, fo!' 4v, FEA I 2405, fo!' 6v. > FEA I 2437, fo1. 283v. Different word order in FEA 12441, fo1. 92r: ',':IT\ 7':1' 7':ll ":IN. 114. FEA I 2702, fo!' 4v, FEA I 2405, fo1. 6v l~.

115. FEA I 2702, fo1. 4v 9'~n7N.1I6

FEA I 2441, fo!'

92r :1;'". 11 7. FEA I 2441, fo1. 92v i1T\'n. 11 8. *FEA I 2437, fo1. 284r. 11 9. FEA I 2405, fo1. 4r '7'N'N. 1110. FEA I 2441, fo1. 92v, FEA I 2702, fo1. 5r, FEA I 2405, fo1. 4r i1'lNn'N. 1111. FEA I 2441, fo1. 92v, FEA I 2702, fo!' 5r, FEA 12405, fo1. 4r "0.11 12. FEA 12702, fo1. 5r, FEA I 2405, fo!' 4r 9"~n.

222

Part I: Chapter 23

1.23.11. As for the second condition, namely that they have the same type of inflection, this is the requirement that one must correspond to the other in being either plural or singular. If this were not respected, it would be possible to form the pattern of '9~ basis of i1~?

~)7

~'1N

htJt' (Ezek. 18:2) on the

nil)t' (Cant. 8:8), although the first is plural and the

second is singular. It would also be possible to form the pattern ofni.l!o/1

T~;

(Isa. 22:13) on the basis of'm~

ni7~

(Isa. 40:11), although the first

is an infinitive that is singular and the second a noun in the plural. Further examples could be added to these. 1.23.12. As for the third condition, namely that the two words correspond to one another both when conjoined and when not conjoined, both when plural and when singular, this is necessary since there are some nouns that correspond to each other in the singular but differ in the plural, some that correspond to each other in the plural and dual but differ in the singular and some that correspond to each other when not conjoined but differ when conjoined. Surely you see that o:m and 'lZhn have the same T

T

TT

form, but they differ in the plural, for the plural form of O~ but that of'tV10 is 0'tP10. The words O'!~

i? and o'!~

is

o'~p

1 correspond to

0'!~1

one another in the plural but differ in the singular, for the singular form of is '~l

but that ofO'!~i?

is '~i?

The words 0:~1

(Prov. 28:6,

18) and O:;>p correspond to one another in the dual, but differ in the

Part I: Chapter 23

'n~

ill' ,~

37~l'

,~

~i1"tm

~'t7

l':J' ~i1"n

"~N'

n,nN "37 'O:l 171 T~l" ~'m

')~1

,m

":J~'

~,

~":!r

n':lN 17' i1')~

~37l

si1"~

3i1"~'

l':J 37~

i1'~

~,

1.23.11.

'l:JJ' 21~

T~l'

m~

1 FEA I 2441, fol. 92v, FEA I 2702, fol. Sr, FEA I 240S, fol. 4r. 'l:J~

11 3. FEA I 2702, fol. Sr ,1;1'N1;1N. 11 4. "'FEA I 2437, fol. 284v. 11 S. FEA I 240S, fol. 4v

,1;1'N1;1N. 116. FEA I 2441, fol. 92v, FEA I 2702, fol. Sr, FEA I 240S, fol. 4v il'~Nn1;.

\I 7. FEA I 240S, fol. 4v N~il'.

11 8. FEA I 240S, fol. 4v N~il"1!)m.

2441, fo1. 93r, FEA I 2702, fol. Sv, FEA I 240S, fol. 4v lN~o1;.

lNi'!)n'

'i"

\I 9. FEA I \I 10. l'~i1;N '!)

> FEA I 2702, fol. Sv. 1111. > FEA I 2441, fo1. 93r, FEA I 240S, fol. 4v.

1112. FEA I 2441, fo1. 93r, FEA I 2702, fo1. 4v. > FEA I 2437, fol. 284v. 1113. FEA I 2441, fol. 93r, FEA I 2702, fol. Sv, FEA I 240S, fol. 4v N1;1N. 1\14. FEA I 2441, fol. 93r, FEA I 2702, fol. Sv, FEA I 240S, fol. 4v. FEA I 2437, fol. 284v has N'O. \I IS. "'FEA I 2441, fol. 93r. 1\16. FEA 12702, fol. Sv Ni'!)nN' il'~n1;N

"1!)n1;1N '!).

'!) N!)1;1n::lN

Part I: Chapter 23

224

singular, for the singular of C::;tn is words '~l\

T

T

';11.1 but that of C:~p

is

~f.

The

and 1:Ji correspond to each other in the singular but differ in T T

the plural, for the plural form of '7?~

is C.,~

but that of 1~!

is C"!~T.

Each of these nouns should be categorized with what corresponds to it in the plural, singular and dual forms. So, 1~,

since their plurals are C"~n

C~lJ

should be categorized with The word 'tV1lJ should be

and C"!~l-

since their plural forms are C"O/1lJ jW~1

categorized with 'tV1~

C"P'O

2:3) and b"W1~' categorized with ,~

(Ezek. 27:14). The word 1~

since their plural forms are

(Zech. should be

and C",p. The C"!~?

1::1i should be categorized with 'tV~, since their plural forms are C"!~1 and C"7W?f· As for C:~1' if the singular of this were 11.1, which is the attested form, the dual would be C:~T!' like 'no - C:7~1, ::11.;' c:~1· It is said that it is derived from 111, like ~f - C:~p, 11i? C:n? Although the forms 111 and 11i? are not attested, they are word

T

T

T

T

required by analogy. This is because from C:~1j?,

n~

is derived the dual form

in conformity with analogy and with what is found in (Rab. 3:4), but from 11i? is derived C:ni?, like C:~p, i1~

C:,ni?tq C:n? i'?1 nift":1~

categorized with T~W

C.,~

C.,~

C~1j?

as is found in

(Dan. 8:3). The word '7?~

should be

since they have the same plural form, as shown by

(1 Kings 10:2) and C'¥t-~,

C,~

C"~o/,

(Prov. 30:26).

As for nouns that have the same form when not conjoined but differ when conjoined, these include words such as

'9¥1.

derived the conjoined form form '9"J~;-nl

n~i?f

i17?i?

and

i1~"

From

(Deut. 23:26) and from

i17?i? is i1n the

(Ezek. 29:4). It is said that the reason for the difference

between the two words is that the first is derived from a lexical class that is conjugated with forms such as unproductive noun. As for from that of

i17?i?,

i1~;,

C'i', Ci?, i17?i? etc. but the second is an

the conjoined form of which is different

as seen, for example, in

i1Jq~-n;

(Gen. 12: 11),

despite the fact that it is derived from a lexical class that is inflected, it is said that the reason for this difference between them is that they belong to different conjugations, for the conjugation of the form

i1~;

is derived

Part I: Chapter 23

'£) p£)n~ ,~t ~'T ~

O"~l

'~!

'~l

"'1~ '1?~

"!V ~o,

T~

~l£) T~

il'il

11:J' ,:3, ,,37 o~" 37~l' '£) ~il' 'l:3 "37 ,:3i' '~n ')37 ~ il'~ ,~ ::Ion " , il"1£)n

O'~J 'n~

37~l'

T~'

,:J ,~n' il')nm

'~n£)

225

,." O'~" '£) ~£)'n:J ~'1£)

T~

T~

,'n',

1£)n'~" 'l::l)'£) ~37l

O"~t

ilP£)~'

0":3' o'~n ~il37 T~' O'~, 0'0'0 o'~n rrV:3'N "37 ,:3" O"l:3 0',:3i' ~il37 'l'£) T~:J " O'~" 10"~ 0":3' 37~;" m~ "P£) O~;'V :3'V O~'" 'l' ,n~ O~'" ~l' "'~ 7'i" ", P' T~' 0' ~'i 7'i' O~J "'1~ 'n~ T~ il'mn O~'i? 'l' 7'i' T~ ,~ ~ilnp o~'P£) T"'~ O'~J 'n~ 0' ~'i 7'i? T~' ",~ 0' J'i' ;P:J, ilO~'P ::Ion 7~ ,,37 '~l ,~n 'l::l)" n,rr':3l o~'ir O~'i ", ;P:J, N' OV 0' J~ O'N~ J O"~l p:J ~p£)n ~il37 'l~ ~'n:J" il£)~' 1'l '£) ~o, T~ p£)n' ~ ~£) O'YV il£)~' ')37 r~i' T~ 'l'£) rrl', r~i' ,m il£)~' ')37 ~il£)'n:J il'37 T~ "P£) "',~ nl' rrl' T~' n~i':3 1'l' r~i' Oi' O'i' ,m T~ ~1n ill' "~ ~37;'1 ,~ 11:J il£)~' '£) 'In 'n~ r~' ~£) :'~l co~ rrl', ", ill' "~ ~, ~37l1 m':J 37~ rN'~ n~' ;p:J r~i' ~':JI '£) ~ilp1n£) ~m':I ~':J ~'il il;" T~ "P£) ~1n

C,

~,

,,37

~'n,

",

,'V'

1. *FEA I 2441, fo1. 93v.

Part I: Chapter 23

226 from the imperative base

iT~;

whereas that of iT7?i? is derived from C~i'.

Since they differ in this respect, they differ also with regard to the conjoined form. The explanation concerning iT7N and iT~tv, T

T

T

T

which have

the same form when disjoined but differ when conjoined to a pronoun, for

h!f

example in?J$-~

W~' (Ezek. 17:16) and ih~tp-7 (Exod. 28:26), is the same as the explanation concerning iT7?i? and iTn, in that iT7N is derived from a lexical class that is conjugated producing forms T T

such as iT~n1

'7~

(Joell :8), h'7~

't;I~1

(Jud. 17:2), etc.

Part I: Chapter 23

N:~£)

O'i' 1~

.,£) CN:~J'

N:~"

i1£)N:~

1)37

CN:~J 1~

37~PN:

"~N:

1'f~

m.~ ~"'n

1N: ~"'nN:

.,£) 2N:p,n£)N: '~1

IN:£)~nJ'

~S1 m.~

1~

i1£)N:~

'n~ ~'n

1'f~t

1'f0i"

227

37"'"

1"p£)n~N:

1'f~

nN 1'fT:1 '~N

ip:J '~N:

.,£)

'n~N 1'f~N

IN: N:~i1'

I.,£) N:p,n£)N:

nt~N

n"n

1~

1'f?~

"~N:

1'fl', 1'fOi' .,£) nN' 1'f~n:

1. *FEA I 2441, fol. 94r.112. Np1n!JN " , '!J > FEA I 2437, fol. 396r.

t~N

PART I: CHAPTER 24

ON THE LETTERS OF THE ALPHABET 1.24.1. Take note that, although the letters of the alphabet in the Hebrew

language are twenty-seven in number, they should, in fact, be reckoned as twenty-two, since one should not include among them the five letters that correspond to their 'sisters' in pronunciation but differ from them in form, namely, the kaph, mem, nun, peh and ~adhe.

The remainder, after

omitting these, amount to twenty-two letters. One person has added to this group of letters six other letters, thereby making the total thirty-three letters. The purpose of this is to demonstrate the superiority of Hebrew over Arabic in its possession of a greater number of letters. These six letters that he has added to the basic number of letters are the letters n£l:J''':J, which have a different pronunciation with dagesh from the one

they have with raphe. This is shown, for example, by the second beth of C~;:Jp

(1 Sam. 16:6), which, on account of its being raphe, is pronounced differently from the first one, since this latter has dagesh. It is shown also by the second gimmel on~iJ

(Josh. 2:6), which is pronounced

differently from the first one and is like Arabic ghayn, by the second

daleth of';; (1 Sam. 10:14), which is pronounced differently from the first one and is like Arabic dhiil, by the second kaph in n:Jj (Exod. T

T

29:35), which is pronounced differently from the first one and is like

PART I: CHAPTER 24

3

TN :J TN' T")N':J377N 2ill7 ~

n~:J

T~'t1J37

T~)nN

i'~)7N

~ 6~7N'

~7N

1i"

:N~'n

~73

il~m

iln07N

~n7N

~il N~

~N7:J

~N7:J

il~)Nn7

~7'N

" , T~

~n7N

,m,

37'~O

il~)Nn7 ~:J'37N

7N17N

~7N:J

~

T~

N1N 37~on

~n7N

,m il~'

7

~:J'37N

~

i'~)

Nil:J Nm,:J7

,m,

7~lN T~l7N:J

~i1

~N7:J

r~

~'nlt7.

~:J'37N

Nil:J i'~)

Nil37'~O :il't1J"~ ~7'N

Nil37'~O

T~

1. *FEA I 2441, fo!' 94r. 11 2. FEA I 2437, fo!' 396v ml't::l.1I4. FEA I 2437, fo!' 396v O~:l7't

~

~n7N

~7'N

~n7N

1137

Nil~

il~)Nn7

,m,

~N il7~;'N

Nil:J

il~'

7N17N:J ~i1

Nil37'~O

;,

Oil~37:J

1137 7:!rN ~7N

~N7:J l~r

~7N

~1:!r7N'

il1N~T

N:J7N

37'~O

Nil37'~O

'~:!r

il~'nN

il't1J"~

T~

ON':l:l Nm':J7

~73 ~"n7N

Nil~7:Jm

~i'N:J7

"

~i'0

~

7:J't1J7N

N~'n

il~'nN

il1i11

il37:JO Nil1137

il1il il7~;'

~"7

~"n

N1N 37~on

~i1

ilno ~'nN7

1.24.1.

ii7N Nm~

rmN Nil137:J 1~)n

~)N':J37

nil:' ;;':J

T~'tV37

4~'nN7 ~N:J7

':IN ~'nN

~'nN

TN~

il'~n7N

O~7N'

T~'t1J37

737;"

il1il TN 0737N

Nil37'~

sNilnN':J 37~ T')7N'

~'nN7

m.7.

il~)Nn7

~n7N

~N:J7

11 3. FEA I 2437, fo!' 396v

115. FEA I 2437, fo!' 396v l'ti1n1::ll't.

116. FEA I 2437, fo!' 396v l't£l7l't.1I7. *FEA I 2441, fo!' 94v.

230

Part I: Chapter 24

Arabic khiP, by the first peh in 'r1.~I

(Job 16: 12), which is

pronounced differently from the second one, and by second taw in

nn

(Deut. 2:25), which is pronounced differently from the first one and is like Arabic thiP. It should be noted, however, that these six letters, which the proponent of this opinion has added, are not really an addition to the letters of the Hebrew alphabet, since none of them has a form when it takes raphe that is distinct from the one it has when it takes dagesh. The form in both cases is the same. One may, however, distinguish between them in writing by a horizontal line that is written over the letter called (the letter with) raphe and by a dot in the letter called (the letter with) dagesh, for example O~i5f'

etc.

1.24.2. The same graphic form is not used twice in Hebrew as is the case

in Arabic, where two letters are written the same way and are distinguished only by dots to indicate the difference between them in pronunciation, as is the case with tiP and thiP and others. Indeed, in Arabic there are letters that are pronounced with sounds that are not found in Hebrew, such as jlm, cjad and others. Some teachers, however, when reading i)1~

'7.iJ~

(Dan. 11 :45) and hl~

01~

(Exod. 28: 17),

pronounce the daleth in them like Arabic cjad or fa' and these words sound like i)~9N

:

-

-

and i1~9.

T

:

•

This, however, does not increase the

number of letters, since the daleth has the same form, although the reading of it differs. The sum total of letters in the Hebrew alphabet, 1

The intention here is that the fricative daleth in these two words was pronounced

with the added feature of emphasis. )AM al-Faraj compares this pronunciation both to Arabic qiid and Arabic ;ii' and there is variation in the manuscripts in the transcription of the words with the ludaeo-Arabic equivalents of both tjiid and ;ii'. This is a reflection of the fact that the letters r/-iid and ;ii' are not distinguished in many Arabic dialects. Evidence for the existence of this phenomenon in the Middle Ages is found in numerous medieval ludaeo-Arabic and other Middle Arabic texts. For the pronounciation of the daleth in the word 'i)!~15 (1993), Khan (1996: 10).

(Dan. 11 :45) see Steiner

'L£17Z: I V3d °8 OMl S;)A!~

11

°Cil~L.!

°A8 °loJ 'S017Z: I V3d < °NL.N l178£ °loJ 'L£17Z: I V3d °611 °1~L.l78Z: A8 °loJ 'S017Z: I V3d °Ci~L.!

l178£ °loJ 'L£17Z: I V3d °L

11

°NCi~tl

Cil~L.!

o~N

°loJ

:plOM S!lllJ o suOnd!l:lSUllll

l178£ °loJ 'L£17Z: I V3d °9 11 °acl."C

l178£ °loJ 'L£17Z: I V3d oS 11 °l178Z: °loJ 'L£17Z: I V3d < °17 11

C!!

N~l.

11

o~L

l178£ °loJ 'L£17Z: I V3d o£

lN4UN l8 °loJ 'S017Z: I V3d 'l178£ °loJ 'L£17Z: I V3d 0z: 11 °lS6 °loJ '11717Z: I V3d* °1

N~k

NULk

t:"U

G"

N~t:L"

t:~l.

ALl.UL!N LNUl.L! LN! NC:U~G

C:C:l.L'Cs

G"L!C!N..

NG~tL9

C:c!OL~

N~c!"

GCl~L!:

l.~L

N~ULk

NOaNCl

N~C:c!OL N1.l6

C!tL!

LN!

C:Nl

C:~Nc!L

G"

C:C!N

t:~

G"

t:N~aCl

t:"tL!C!N

N~t:L"

~"O

C!N

t:~

L'C"LL!C!N

L"GLa G"

Nl.

G"OC!~

NL1..C GC11..l.: NC:l.'C N~l. L'C"LL!C!N t:L!N

LN~l:

N~c!U, C:UNt:UL!

UC:LL j

G"

C!'CLNL!

Lt:N~aCl!

LG"

N~ULk

G"

N~C!aL

t:N~c!l.L

~"o

uua"aN Nl.

N~a"

L!l.N

C!l. 'CL (l).N

N~aC:lL!

~"

N!

ALLL!

NUl.k

N~OUL!

"ua""l

N~k

tUL

G"

N~U"

aoL~

aoL~

N~L"

N~Ut"L!

G" N~l.

t:L!N

t:"U

N~Ul.k

L!l.L!

t:C~Nk t:C~Nk

N~

N~Ul.k

LNUl.L! LNtaN

atL!N

~"

IN,,l.L!

LN~C

aOL~!N

aOL~!N

LU'Cl." a~l."

N~ALl.!

~LNUl.

~"OU

N~Lt:,

G"

N~U"

U'L.J

a!

N~Ul.k

N~l.t:"

G"

LN~l.

N~c!tClLa N~tJL

tUL

N~Ul.G,!

UC:l.l.

"~l.,

G" N~UA

t:1N"l.g G" ~l.

N~

NL

Nl.:", NG1..rL

N~"C

tUL C!!

N~Lt:"

t:L!C!N

C:UNt:L!

N~Lt:"

N~aL!

G~"O N~l.

Nl.N aLN f

~Nt:L"

N~tCla

~NC:Uk L~N

TtZ"I

CCLNC LC!N N~C!aL

t:"tL!C!N G" N~C:UtL!

"GLa

Nl.N C:N! aLG"N a! C:LtL! al.'CL(l).N t:~

N~t:L" lNl.L!N

C:N~U

N~Ut"L!

L,GL.GL.r, N~U" N~L"

LL!" LtUL N~UL

t:" LtUL N~G

N~L!

a!

vZ J;)ldtll{;) :1 lltld

I£Z

232

Part I: Chapter 24

therefore, omitting the five letters that are pronounced the same but each have (two) different graphic forms, is twenty-two, as stated above. 1.24.3. Take note that one half of these twenty-two letters, which are joined together (in the mnemonic) n~

,~

i'~!

'9~,

share the feature

of differing from the other half in not being prefixed to words or suffixed at the end of them in order to perform a servile function and express various types of meaning. They are only found in words as root letters. Whether they occur at the beginning or the end of a word, this is always their status. They are never added redundant letters or the result of interchange with other letters. They share this feature with some of the other half of the letters, as will demonstrated in the appropriate place. 1.24.4. As for the other half of the letters of the alphabet, the eleven letters that differ in the aforementioned respect from the eleven letters that are combined together in the mnemonic phrase indicated above, these are Yaleph, beth, heh, waw, yodh, kaph, lamedh, mem, nun, shin, and taw. The grammarians arrange them in the sequence r"tv.:J~

7::>' 'i1:J~.

If

you were to arrange them in a different order and, as with the first half of the alphabet, make out of them real words, that would be easier to remember. You can do so by arranging them in the three words CtV

P':J~

711i1. These, I mean these eleven letters, occur at the beginning of

Part I: Chapter 24 l".l11N

'O:J'N

il£>'1:J~N

'£>

~£>"N

233

ilP£>1~'N

'£>

1~nN' N~:J

:01p11

N£>1n

l'1ID31'

il'£> p£>1~

l'J11N'N

o:m

1nN'

3~N£>'

1~

il1il

2n¥

il'

~.l'N

1N

pr)! ,~

"31 il:1':J1 '£> 1:JN'N ~.l'N

'.lN31~

il~1:J'N

il1N£>N'

sil"~N

1~

O:Jn'N N1il il~:Jn 1:JN 7~'1n 1':1' N~

N'1:~

'£> 1i,'

il'O:1~N

IONiJ'N'

ll'11'N'

:nit j~ ~.l'N:J

l"'tV'N'

,:,; ,:i~N

~'N

~'1n

1~ 1':J~N

N:1'N' l'.l'N'

"N '£> 11:J' NW

,i11

~£>n'N

il1il '.l31N 'i11

1:JN'N ~.l'N

'.l31~N

~'N

N~£>

O'~N

il1:J1

01P~'N

'ON:11:1

~N:J'

ON"N'

N1il

N£>1n

1"'N'

Ni1.l'~

12

1 ,,, "31

14

"N :11pN mN:J il'~310

O*, t,nrt r:;"!l~'

1.24.4.

'£> il£>'N:J~

9il,£>

:1'11111'N

il1il '£> i1.lN£> '£> 1'1 '£> il'Nn 1~

l"'P'£> i11N'11 "31

'31i11 11'n:1

1N

,:1 il1'N"~

N,

11NID' 1p il'~PN

N£>1n ~.;"

'N"N'

4

'N il' il1'N£> N' N1'NT 'i' 1N 1'1

"31 1:JN'N ~.l'N

,i11 8N:1

il'N~1

Nil1:JN'N:1

:il31~' ~';N

Nil'ON:11 '11'N

1N:J Nil1:JN '£> 'N 6il~£>'

1~

1.24.3.

'1i' N' i1.lN ,i11

"31

il~£>'

O'31N'

'9~

'1"~

P'1'O

N'N ~N£>'

N£>1n 1"1ID31'

1"P'1P1'N'

13~.l

N1N'

N~£>' "P11£>

"N'N

~N£>'

1. FEA I 2437, fo1. 284r rpnN. 112. FEA I 2437, fo1. 384v '''731

i

vn~

I 2437, fo1. 384v 6NEl7N7N. 11 4. > FEA I 2437, fo1. 384v. 11 5. il'7~N

Nil'31"11

1CElU. 113. FEA

N7N: FEA I 116. *FEA I 2441, fo!' 95v. 11 7. FEA I 2437, fo!' 384v 91n. 2437, fo!' 384v il'7~N. 11 8. FEA I 2437.384v n':J. 119. FEA I 2437, fo!' 385r 'ilEl. 1110. FEA I 2437, fo!' 385r Nil7N'. 1111. FEA I 2437, fol. 385r 'Nn7N'. 1112. FEA I 2437, fol. 385r 1"v"v,7N,. 11 13. FEA I 2437, fol. 385r n~6l. 1114. FEA I 2437, fol. 385r 9N7:J.

234

Part I: Chapter 24

words, in the middle and at their end, expressing various senses and different meanings. It is not the case that everyone of these letters occurs in all three of the aforementioned positions in a word. Some of them do so, but others are found only in one or two of the three positions, according to the existing evidence. 1.24.5.

Take note that in their performance of the aforementioned

function they can be divided into three groups. One of these is used specifically with nouns and not verbs. This consists of three letters: 'i:J:J. The second is used specifically with verbs and not with nouns. This consists of the four (prefix) letters of the future form of the verb. The grammarians, since they join them together in their (alphabet) sequence, call them the

nl"N

letters. By combining them in a different order, you

can join them together in an real word, namely In''N. The third group is used with both nouns and verbs. This consists of the three remaining letters of the eleven. You can combine them in a real word, namely i1'tZn~. 1.24.6. Two letters may perform the same function. The majority of these

eleven letters have a single meaning. Some letters have a unique meaning, which is not shared by any other letter. 1.24.7. I have decided to discuss the latter eleven letters before dealing

with the other eleven. I shall examine briefly each of the three aforementioned groups. This differs from my practice in the third part of

Part I: Chapter 24

'!)' Nil~O' N' 0'" 1~

~N!)'

'!)'

"N'N '!) 2'"n IN!),n N';'N ':JNY~ il!)'n:>~ "N'!) il"!)~ Nil':>N'N ;"N '!) 'l" N'N Nm~ ~'m ~'n 1":J il';~ on' Nil~Y:J ,:J il~!)"N :Jon Y~N' ;"N 1~ l'Y~ 3,!) 'N Y~'

m'N:Jn~

il":>'~N

Y~N'

'!) N'N ,;", N' :Nil'!) ilN,n

235

Nil~Y:J' N~

ONOPN ;, "Y ":>'~N o:>n'N '!) NmN 40'YN' 1.24.5. t,~!I s~'nN iln,n ,i11 'NY!)N'N 1" N~O':J rn:>' Nil,nN ~"n , ,i11 N~O' 1" 'NY!)N'N:J rn:>' Nil':JNm i11N,n "Y Nm'~:J" 70mN, 61"P"P',N!) :'N:JpnoN'N ~:J'n 1N p~N 1" ~N':>J n~:J' N'N' Ji)';N; 8~,'n Nm'~o N~O' il'!) 1,n'(1)n ;"N' tJi';N 9'i11 il'~YnO il~!)':J 1N p~" ~'n N';'N 1~ il'PN:J'N lO~"n'N ;"N 'i11 'NY!)N'N' fnb~i 'i11 il'~YnO il~!)':J :J~'n '!) N!),n N';'N il'il il'!) 12il:>,'(1)' 110,

1~

,n:>N'N' 1N!),n'N p!)n' 'p' Nil~Y:J ,,!):J' 'p' ,nN' ':JY~

1.24.6.

':JY~

:':>N'N N~'p

"Y

N!),n N';'N il'il "Y ON':>'N "N' 1.24.7. 1~ oop, oop ,:> '~PN ':>N'N N!),n N;'N "Y ON':>'N '!) iln:>,o N~ ~N':>J Nil'!) il":>'~N ONOPN iln,n'N 1. FEA I 2437, [01. 385r ~1n.

11

2. FEA I 2437, [01. 385r ';'rn.

385v. 114. *FEA I 2441, [01. 96r. [01. 385v l"v"v,1;1ND.

385v.

11

11

11

5. FEA I 2437, [01. 385v

7. FEA I 2437, [01. 385v CilJND.

11

11

~'1n.

11

6. FEA I 2437,

8. > FEA I 2437, [01.

9. > FEA I 2437, [01. 385v. 1110. FEA I 2437, [01. 386 ~1nN;.

2437, [01. 386rN1;1.1112. FEA I 2437, [01. 386riJ:J1NllJ'.

3. > FEA I 2437, [01.

II

11. FEA I

236

Part I: Chapter 24

The Comprehensive Book both with regard to the length of exposition and

also the order of arrangement, in that I began with the discussion of Jaleph, then discussed beth, then heh and so on until the end of the eleven.

This is because the expansiveness of that book is not possible in this short version. I shall not, however, omit to deal with what is necessary, as far as this is possible, with the help of the Exalted One.

Part I: Chapter 24

.,!)

7~ntz"N

on ~7N

n7Nn7N Tl7N .,!) Nil"!) ON7N

"737 ON7:>7N:J nN,n:JN 1"'7N :J"n,n7N' 37NonN7N

N'il 1N n"n 1~ :JNn:>7N m~n

1~

:JNn:>7N

237

N;7N ON~n N~:>

Nil"!) il"7N illNn7N o~n

"7N Nil7N "737 on N:J 7N "737

Nil"!) 37NonN7N 7~n" N~:J

7N7:>N7N 1,n 237~ "7N37n ilP"!)1n:J 1N:>~7

1. FEA I 2437, fo!' 386r 'M'N. 112. *FEA I 2441, fo!' 96v.

N7 '~n:>7N ":>'~7N

:Jon

PART I: CHAPTER 25

ON THE THREE LETTERS THAT ARE USED EXCLUSIVELY WITH NOUNS, NAMELY THOSE THAT TOGETHER FORM THE (MNEMONIC) WORD

7""

1.25.1. I state concerning these three letters that they are used specifically with nouns since the people of the language do not attach them to verbs and particles in reality but only in irregular metaphorical usages such as (2 Chron. 1:4), Oi~jTl7 (Exod. 9:18), and similar cases, which have been explained at the beginning of

Ott> lP1:'l7

(1 Kings 6: 19),

i7

l"?iJ~

this part (of the book), at the end of the discussion concerning the distinctive features of nouns. 1 They attached them to nouns in reality and not as a metaphorical usage in order to perform a variety of functions, which will be explained below. They did not attach them to perform only one function, but rather subordinated them to words to perform more than one function. Some of them, namely beth and lamedh, they used only at the beginning of words. They used kaph, on the other hand, at both the beginning and the ends of words, as will be mentioned below. 1.25.2. Beth is like lamedh, in that it operates at the beginning of words but not at the end. It can be classified into two types.

1

Part I, chapter 4.

·NLNC:L1..!N A96 ·loJ '11717(; I Y3i1·811 ·4C A96 ·loJ '11717(; I Y3i1 ·L II·Nu4 A96 ·loJ '11717(;

I Y3i1 ·9

11

·lL8£ ·loJ 'L£17(; I Y3i1* ·S 11 ·CUL A96 ·loJ '11717(; I Y3i1 ·17 11 ·N4~

A96 ·loJ '11717(; I Y3i1 .£

~d

NLNCLg LU~"

11 ·dL4

A96 ·l oJ '11717(; I Y3i1

·(;11

NUL6

·A98£ ·loJ 'L£17(; I Y3i1* ·1

ltC;" ~Lt:"

NC; t:N L!" CNC;C;NC G" Nt ltc.!C;L!c.!N G" NLN"C; NC;G~

TSZ"I

~CL!

NOUltc.!C;LL!N LN';';NC

G"

NLN"C;

NOUltc.!';LL!c.!N

NOUC~c.!L

C;NG~

NC;G~

G" C;Nl,~

,~C;L!N

C;"OL

NCL

NLN"C; c.!t

C;GN,~L!

LNU~!

NC;NOc.!N Ud"dL! C;N c.!~Nl NC; ~l

"a! J.:,LC LNC;U~

NC;CC;NC

LNLNCLL!N NC;N';GN8

GN,~L!

UOt:

c.!N

"NU"

LNC;~

GdCl

Gt:l~L!N

LL!L

NC;UL~

t:C;

C;GLN,~ G"

NC;t:N

NC;LU~

c.!tL!N

NC;U" "NU"9 alLUL!N N~

ltC;Nc.!NU

LNalt:NL! ~C;L

c.!c.!N d~

NC;NOc.!N

c.!~N

uud"dN t:C; U'CUN alN~

LN~C;!

ltC;"

UNL"C;L! G" NLC; L!~N LL!Lp ,~!

mc eJ.:C:,! "L

t:N';NOc.!N c.!t U"U Nt NL!C; NC;C;'CL! C;N ,~C;L!N Ntc.!N NdLC;l: G" L!~

TSl"I

NC;UL~

ltC;" NC;NGltNC;

NC;UC;UL!£ NtL!N c.!CALAL!

c.!N L.t:NC1W ~c;: N4C4NCl tt4" N4u4uw NUL.~

~z

N4c.!GCU.2\W t:N4NQc.!N LW"

~3ldVHJ:I

l~Vd

240

Part I: Chapter 25

1.25.3. One of these types does not perform any function, as the beths in

riJ

7~!J

Ni~;

Cl.~:P

7'D~

i117;

C1P:P (Isa. 66:7). The meaning of this noun with the beth and the meaning of Ptfo/: Cl!:? (Josh. 2:8), in which the beth has been omitted, is the same. A similar example is

C,tit! WN'l:P rl.~-'Q7

C'P.~tpiJ

meaning as Ti~1

C'P.~tpiJ

(Amos 2:7), which has the same

(Amos 8:4). To these one could add similar

cases. 1.25.4. The other type performs a function and can be divided into two categories. The first category is where it performs functions that are specific to it. This is divided into two types. The first type is where it performs its function on the word to which it is attached. The second group is where it acts as a substitute for something else. 1.25.5. The first category includes various functions. One of these is to express the instrument with which an action is performed, for example

:Jl1:9 ";1 ~i1," N~"D

"~N

1.25.3.

':>N~

l":J'~

1.25.4.

"~17

1~"

nn:JN"l:J '''D'' "lNn~

ill':> Nn,nN nu, "~17

,,':l ,rr:lrr

'D~

COPl'"

'''D'' N~n'

n,"" :JNl~

"D n~N

COP~N'

s~'N

mm:>n ~ND

COP~ND

1.25.5.

',nN:l ,rr:l" :l,n:l ,rr:l" ,nl n:J ~17DN O"f'frr .M,:I, 'YVO:l t',n ", rt'V~ .M'~nr

nN:J'(1)N' .M"~fO:l

.Mn~

,.,,, N~n'

2rr, ':In N':l' O'U:l rr,,' "n.M ill17 nDnlN "'~N T':l:lt" O'~ "l17~' N:J~ m:Jn 17~ "'~N 0'" t'N':l r'N ,!)V 'V 40'!)N't'rr n~' N,n .""., N~ 1~' ,.,,, "~N T":lN O'!)N't'rr "l17~:J

n"~17

't'N

,nl 'D~

3"'~N

'''N'D '''D'' ~'N l~

241

1nl lN~T1

IN:>~

l~

"'(1)~

~,

,n N~

Nn"lNm 61~'

O'~:l

't'N' .Mn~ r'N:l 't'N' 'V~ O'~t:l :l,n:l rr't':l 't'N .M':l~ :lv,rr, ':l,rr, r,n:l :l,nrr r'N' U'i"':l, " 't'N o'v,rr ',:I:l O.M'N Ot'" "V:l 't'N' .M'~ r"~ N,rrrr rr"':l 'It'lt'.M 'VU~ O,':l '.M':l:l :It',, '~N Nn~m 1~' ~Nn' .M'~tr r~t':l T't'N,rr t',n:l .M~t' n:J pnp" N~

~'N

,~

'N ~17DN

"D n~N

rt:l:l' ,nl 1~" n:J n:J'(1)~ ~:J p"n~N ':lrr V' T'nt':l :l"N .MN ", :l:l, T'r~.M:l 1. FEA I 2441, fol. 96v + 7'~m.

",i~

"D 1~':>

N~

."i., O"~'

T"'V:l' T'Vlt':l

11 2. > FEA I 2441, fol. 96v. 11 3. *FEA I 2437, fol.

387v. 11 4. FEA I 2441, fol. 97r + l":lN (cf. Amos 8:4.). 11 5. FEA I 2441, fol. 97r "£)'.116. *FEA 12437, fol. 388r.

+

Part I: Chapter 25

242

1 n:p~

TiJ?l:9~

::Ii? C'il~Q

(Gen. 19:11), C'J"ntp~

il)?~'1

and also to examples such as (Deut. 29:11), 1tpn~

i~t

~i!-n

(Deut. 28:28), 37

C'?7·j

',~1i?

~f7

~:pry

1~

(Job 2:7), ~:i)J

(1 Sam. 5:12), and cases like these,

i'.H7~

ilj~

;m (Isa. 9:1), 1tpri~

n'1~ :IJP~-'f

~1+'7 (Micah 7:8),

'J~1f

lYiJ1 (Ecc. 11 :9), and similar cases. Its fourth function is to connect the verb to its object and transfer its action to it, where this transfer of action can only be performed by the letter beth, for example C~1f

'T:l7~J;i

(Jud. 19:25),'f T;l7,~Ji

(Exod. 10:2), h?~7iJ-f

,~

ilJ1il; '~J;l1

i-l1

for example

il~:J,

1;>1 iibn7 ilW~P TT

il).iJ1 J~1l:' il).iJ1 f'i?iJ1 l~i1>

for example

ti7)~ il,~J"

'W~

il~:J

il~J1

Tn

Part I: Chapter 25

'Yl1:l

l' '11':1 'nNY~

n'~

l'

':l~

O':lJ1~

257

o'mn:1 r':l r~

,m

:1Jr&I'~

:'~j?

,)., N' ':IN'N' il'37~

'n'N' l:1n'r&lN':l :1JNn:l :1"~l 'N'r&I' 'U1 "'N '~N T"~n :1" ilN~'tV 1'N'Y "" "l~ :20~'nlN i'l)"~

il'~

"n~'N

o"n' 'n~

'r&lN~

'~P

').n N~ ~" N" :N':1 "37 il~ 'm~N "l~ N~' '37~N :il"37 ~"n'N ion' ~N' N"P '37~N

",

:1~

').n N' "'N ~'N i~ nN'm~ "37 il~ 'm~N c'pn N~il'n 'n~ "'D' 3,p, CN':J ~m'N 'p' O'U:1 ,~ r'~:1 :1':1' ~r r~

CN':J N~m' CON'N c'pn' iN 'n~ m37 ':JNn' iN p~' iN C'37N' :rr&l:1 "l~ i~ Nil").' il'~tVnN 1" ,~ '~37nON '37~ '37~ i~ iN:J N~ ~N:J' "0 il'~tVn"

n"'J r~

50~'

"11 "~N'

:'110r&l :1~

'ON

ON' :6,',

i':J' N' i'~

')37~N

lIOr

6. > FEA I 2441, fo!' IIOv.

,~

~N:J

r~ P'~

CON'N

:1'N'Y

,,:J, 'NnnON "n~ "N ). 'nnN' il"37 Nil":J' p:J :1~ il"37 ':J'N 4

:1~'

n'l1 ,~

n:l

N~'

1'N'Y

112. FEA I 2441, fo!. 110r 'rm~.

'i'l:l. 11 4. *FEA I 4478, fo!' 72v. 11 5.

"~Y

'm~N

:'Jn~N

l. FEA I 2441, fo!' 110r 1V~':J.

il'~

,~

"~N

:1~

CN':J'N ,~ '~37no N~ 1" r~' p:J r~ ~il'nN i'~ il"37 ':J'N "P~ 0" N'37~ n':lN ,~ :1r&1l1n r~' ~r&I' :1r&1l1n r~' "~n' :1~ il"P:J :1~ ':IN'N' :")'~N N'il ,,)., N~'

iN:J

N~'

:1Jj? r~

r~

'il'tVN'N "37 P:J' iN ':IN'N' il"P "N :l11':1

O~":l' n

:'~1

:,J"l1

,'u r&I'N

:'~j?

,~

C~

:'ONn 'Nn~

m~

:1r&1l1n

:1'nN

113. FEA I 2441, fo!'

> FEA I 2441, fo!' IlOv. 11

258

Part I: Chapter 25

,iW7 i'1tp¥,~

(Num. 15:11), 7~,tp:-;>

i'1:;>f-. (1 ~tp

Sam. 2:14), i'1:;>f-.

i'1W¥,:, (Deut. 25:9), and similar cases. It is also possible to use i'1:;>f tV.,~?

in connection with direct speech and to use i'1~ another, for example l?PiJ ,~

i6~tp

i'1~

i'1:;>,f-O~l

to compare one verb to

(1 Kings 1:48),

"11 i'1W¥-~

(1 Sam.27:11).

1.25.28. The word i~f

is also an expression of comparison, for example

i'117

w~n i~f (Jer. 13:21), TW1l :J?P i7?f (Psa. 63:6). There is no difference with regard to comparision between this and the letter kaph, for there is no difference in meaning between the two comparisons just

'1W~?-"i (lsa. 54:6), n~J :J?!Jf (Lev. 4:26), except that it is preferable to translate nw~ i~f 'like a woman (mill mara wiilida) giving birth' but to translate

cited and the constructions i'1.~T O.,~?t¥iJ

i'117 i'1.?~T

i'1W~f

'like an abandoned woman' (ka-mara matrilka), although

the meaning is the same, in order for the mem and the waw that are attached to the kaph to have some added significance. 9 Surely you see that when a pronoun is attached to these three letters (i.e. the particle i~f)'

for example 1i~f'

oiJ~f'

such forms can only be translated by

(the Arabic word) miJI. 1.25.29.

These words, namely

p, i'1~,

i'1:;>f

and i~f'

are used in

comparisons in the way that is described above, but the basic construction and the most common one is with the letter kaph. 1.25.30. Kaph may be elided in comparisons. Such constructions fall into

two categories. One of these is where the elision is indicated by the meaning, for example, i'1~

h:'1~

,~

(Gen. 49:9), i1:'~

,~

n (Deut. and '~"f n

33 :22), the virtual forms of which are i'1~ '1:~i '~"f i'1:~. The other is where the grammatical structure requires it to 9

The argument is that the fonnal distinction between f and 'i~f

reflected in a translation by using different expressions in Arabic.

should preferably be

'1111 'loJ 'IvvZ I V3:d*

LN4NCL N44'CL.! uauJ!:" CLtL.! ~CULN NL.d: N4L." UaL."!~N NUL.!~ "Of"SZ"I

"L.4 ~4"L.! LaL.

c:tLL. NL.d~ N4~t"

UC~L

~U4

'zll 'L!1..L! + 1111

'loJ 'IvvZ I V3:d 'I

tUL C:L.NLt! L"lClaL! ,L:Ll..L:

l..! c:tLL. NL.,L:

tLL. NL.,L: ,L:Ll..L:

G" CNC N4Ual.C"L.! LL.4L ~4"

l..! tLL.

~Lc"l

L.!L N4CNLz G" N4Ual.C"L.! ~4" "6Z"SZ"I

~N

UaL.C C"NtL.! LN4~

GL.!L.L.! N';N';GN8 N~t"

.;"cLl ';~"C

LN4Nal.L.!L G" L.4L

c:L LC:L: LC:C:L: LC:elL Uo~';

tUL C:elLl. C:ClLL:C 4N "uol UL ~L.!

L..;L N4N ~U4

GN"L.L.! N4N UL" NtL.! N!...N NtJ!:C N4J!:~"L

N4~t" ~L.!

LN';LNL

N4" L.!!...L.! N';~

N';~tJ!:"l

N';"

LN';!...L.! LUUL 'CC C:N"lL: z a~Lt:

C~L

'C"L NtL.! N4NL4" G" N';ULC~.!

N4~!",CLl

ULLLz

~!"L.

N';CNLz

~ULC.!

~

NUGNa

Nl "UL'CC C:elL N"lU' ~1.L:

Lc"l aL4L.! c:, C:N"lL: autL:: C:U~t

~tU

C:elL U~t

Ll.."lL:

~U4

L:"l~e,C

G" CNC N';Ual.C"L.! N!... ';N GLa G"I N4~t" N"lU' ~1.L:

c"l N';~U."l

L4N GLa C"tL.!N Lc"l N4CNLz

C:L: a"lL: l..L,l.. LC:L: el"lGClL:

L:Cl~.

GN~

"8Z"SZ"I

C:elL GL.!" N,~

~l

N4G~

"uol !...CL4 C:L: G" Ual.C"L.! N4G~ LN~U';

N4Ual.C"L.! tUL C:elL

C'C"LL.! C~

LtC C:C:L: NelL.

La!... "uol !...CL'; C:C:L: G" N.;aL'; N';~UC"

L..;L:

,a"lL: ~"lL.:

C:C:L: ,a"lL ~c:

'lL.N~:

La!...

C:C:L: ,a"lL: ~N'l:

Sll

1',7.~

37~o/

l~

mPb-~

~)tp-'W

redundant addition. The same applies to the kaph in ilnJ-7~f

ilWb ~W 'W~

< :

(Josh. 1:17) and so it must be a hitv~

(Josh. 1:7), and similar cases.

Section 1.25.32. Take note that kaphs that occur at the beginning of words, in the middle of them and at the end of them belong to various categories. Many usages of kaph at the beginning of words have been discussed already, including its use to express comparison, etc. and also its occurrence as a redundant addition. In addition, it may also be used with the meaning of other letters, which will be explained in what follows.

Part I: Chapter 25

"£) iI"'37 1~'37"

il1N'O~

2r'i"Y~

~'37N

C'rrt,N ,tJ'~ :",i~'N

3r~

,m

4""

111::111

"£)

'N

':::>N'N::1 N'm~

N~i1'n

'i1 0'"

N~"£)

i1N:J37~

""N r~J"

i1"::1W11" ""::1:J"£)

8r~

5

7

J~'

1,t,N J'~ 1'Y '~N

'~1:>

1'O~

N~:>'

'O~

1.25.31.

'1~

NY,'rr t,~

'~J 'm~N

11'N11 T':::> "'N """,

,m

i1"::1W11'N ::1N::1 T~

N' 'N 6r~J"

J r~ r~ t,N 'J~ rr".Mrr t,~ N:>~

"£)

1~J'

i1::1 'm~N

i1 '''NT "i11 'p' N~i1'

N:Ji1Ni1 NiI:J':::>' ":J37~

!lNn~'

il:J37 Ni1£)'iI ""::1:J" 37~'

T':::>' N~p:J

"!)~

111:J11

C"!)N~

"£) 37~'

11N£)N:::>

T"£)N:::>'N

,t, ,'rr'

'N

:NilN£)11:JN "£)' ~"n'N

N'iI ",i" N~'

'Jt~

"'37

pn T~

'1~

'NTTI ",:::> iI"£) Nil111::111 ::1,,"

1'tJ~

261

"!)~

'~N ",:::>,

NY,'rr t,~ t,~

~N:>

'1~

i1'''NT

NiI:J':::>

" , 'N1~

"£)' O':::>'N '''N'N "£) ""11 "11'N 11N£)N:::>'N TN O'37N' "N'N "£) "i" ""N£) N11tv :1"~ " , ,,,,,, '1~N

9,,,£),, N~

Nil:JN"::1 "11N"

~"n

"'37 Ni1':::>N'N "£)' NiI~O' ,m iI:J~

'''11:::> n,w O'P11 'p

i1'''N£) '''£)'' 'p' N'''NT T':::>"

1. *FEA I 2441, fo1. 1I1v. 112. FEA I 2702, fo1. 9v 'i1V~.I3

FEA I 2702, fo1. 9v 1'37~) 9v i1'N'T. 11 6. i111)37' ,~

1.25.32.

i1)~"

N~'

C"~N':

N~"i1

1:1'N". 114. > FEA I 2702, fo1. 9v. 11 5. FEA I 2702, fo1. " > FEA I 2702, fo1. 9v. 11 7. FEA I 2702, fo1. 9v

N)i1i1.11 8. > FEA I 2702, fo1. 9v. 119. *FEA 12441, fo1. 112r.

Part I: Chapter 25

262

1.25.33. In some cases it has the meaning of the heh of definition, like the kaphs in Oi~

'1?~

(1 Sam. 2:16), Oi~;>

hJ;l~

(1 Sam. 9:27), bi!l~

~-tV1

T'1"~P:

'~j?

(1 Kings 22:5), for the meaning in all cases

is oi!ljJ, since a comparision makes no sense here. ilJ~?pj

1.25.34. On some occasions it has the meaning of mem, as in O,~J;lif

il~

(Isa. 28:20), the virtual form of which is O~J;li,

so that

it would correspond to the form that precedes it, namely ~J.;lo/i

i~."

i13:J,

It sometimes has the meaning of gimmei, as in

1.25.35. ilpt?r'V~

T -

:~

(Psa. 80:16). This is said to be equivalent to il~-

1.25.36. It may have the meaning of Jaieph, as in il"~

',t~

'P~

,~

(Job 21 :20). This is said to be equivalent to i'~. 1.25.37. It sometimes stands in the place of beth, as in

O:JnN "l1tv'9 O"7JWil nim, (Zech. 2: 10). ......

:

','

.1-"

.:

equivalent to 17~

T

'.,-

-

S

17~

«

'~f

.,~

P

It is possible that this is

,~:p.

1.25.38. Kaph may also be equivalent to words. On some occasions, for example, it has the meaning of 'approximately (naJ]w) such-and-such', as in

0"1370/

1:4), "7~1

ilJ~"f

"D~1

~?

ow

(Ruth 2:17), O"~o/

tpJ~f' ':Jo/,~1 (Ruth (Exod. 12:37), for the meaning of all of

ni~-tVWf

these kaphs is 'approximately. 1.25.39. It sometimes has the meaning of Arabic can, as in :J~o/

17:r'~

(Gen. 26: 10), "~'?

"l:l";V 'O~7?,

'O~7?,

(Psa. 119:87), .,~

'O~7?

'O~7?:;) (Job 32:22),

(Prov. 5:14). The meaning of these kaphs is

'such-and-such almost (Can qalfl) happened'.

263

Part I: Chapter 25

,m nN~:>

o,'~

~"37nN

NJ ~"

Ni1 ':J37~

o,'~

1'::>' N~

'Uj? r"'~j?

N:Ji1Ni1 ~'n

':J37~

N~

o,'~

Nm~

1.25.33.

"~V

iN

,~

rt1'1N'

O,'rt Ni137'~;

'n~N

':J37~

1N~ 1.25.34.

i1~pn

N~

",~

"n~

CJ~1'm

CJ~1'rt

i1"ipn

V'1~rt

rtV~J

'~N

,m rtJ~'

~Nl

':J37~

'l' N~

Nm~'

1.25.35.

rtJl' i1:JNn~ ~'P

",~

'N"

"J'V

V:l'N~

1'1'""

,~

V:l'N:l ':J37~

'l' N~

'~V

O~

'~i

,m

~N

':J37~

m,::> fbNn~:J

6N~

37'~l

':J37~

1N~

1.25.36.

"'N i1:JNn~

T1l' O~1'N

1.25.37. '1~C

O'~rt

p::>n ip'

'rt"

,i1

Nm~'

i1:JNn~

rtC'N~

'J~

Nm~'

'''' N~

O"'V~

i1ii1

'l' N~

N:J i1:JNn~

1~

':l~"

nN~:>

,m

,i1 ~'P

1.25.38.

,Sl' "1SN 1'N~

~

0' J~

,m ~V

:l~

i1ii1

':J37~

,m UV~

V' S~:l

1. *FEA 12441, fo1. 1I2v.

137 ':J37~

'1'1"rt ~V

,m

ip::> Ni::>' Ni::>

1,;" N~

'JN~

'~i

UV~

T~'

':J37~

Part I: Chapter 25

264

1.25.40. Cases of kaph that occur in the middle of words and do not belong to the basic root fall into two categories. One of these is where it stands in the place of other letters. On some occasions it stands in place of gimme/, like the kaphs in O:1¥~-n

ilf1 O;ilT;l

n·)~

~T:l1t;

(cf. Gen. 8:2),10 '~9

(lsa. 19:4), "?9~1

'?

(Psa. 63:12), which are

said to be equivalent to gimme/, in accordance with the usual form of the lexical class of 'delivering and closing'. It is sometimes equivalent to resh, as in

'.;>ip-P O~'lJ

(1 Chron. 11 :35), whereas in the other

version the name of this person has the form

'1W-P

23:33). In some cases it is equivalent to peh, as in ~'i

6: 13), which is required by the sense to be ~'il concerning location, like b;l!i) T;l~iP.7

il·~'

il·n'~,

O~'lJ

(2 Sam. il·?'~

(2 Kings

for it is a question

(Ruth 2:19).

1.25.41. The other category is where it is combined with a following mem and forms a second person plural pronoun on a noun, verb or

particle, for example, O"?.l)~'

O;i?~l

q?,'~:p

(lsa. 33: 11), q?,t;l~ 'D7~iJ1 (Psa. 115: 14), and similar cases.

(Exod. 32:2), tr>~ (Exod. 6:6), O;>'~:p

-'~1

O?tnl O?'7.~

1.25.42. Kaphs that come at the end of words, other than those that

belong to the root, fall into three categories. One of these is where the kaph has no meaning, as is the case with the kaph in '~!i)

'P-W

O'y.;~n

~f1¥

~f1¥

il(;;:q

(Lev. 27:3), 1?¥~ 37J.1~ (Lev. 27:18), for in these places it is not the second person pronoun and does

ilJ;;:q ...

not have this meaning. It is said that 111IJ case.

r1!9 (Zech. 9: 1) is a similar

Part I: Chapter 25

265

1.25.40.

V~£)

~"n

:lU' :l~J

C"Y~

~

~m

, ~,o

1~'

17' ~'il

~il"n

,m

'~O

P7l~'

,~

~ '~np>

'J37~

~Upt,

;'£)~

3

7n~

'il 7~l

il:~n

il:~n

tl)"

'il

il:>OJ7~

137 7~no

m~7

~£)

'il il:~n

~,;

~

2~07

'£)

,m ;,~

1~:>7

"~O

:lon

":>~7

~

~U'V

,m O~'"

',ml:l 17'

~il'£)

:l~n

"ilt)~

ill7

"7~

7~l

1;':l, o,;~

o'70n~

137 7'P" ,~t 7:l 17' 1~' "tt 7:l O~'"

'737 j':l~

n~£):>

'17~

7'P

~

;'£)~

\m,:> 0";'

"7~

il'711

O'~7

,m

37~

C~'J:l

t,V' C~,tV

~'m

1':>' 737£)'

C~

,~t,y;"

~

'il ':>~7 '£)

O~

:l'~7

O~t,

:l~>

,~t;

'7~

"0 5~£)7

,~'V

~, 17' 7~n' 17' ~il:J37

n~£)N:>

~'V, P:>'£) ',i~7

:l~>7

,~

N'il ,~i

~,

C~"

C~'

N'il ',i'

'£) ~m 'i, ,m il7 'J37~ ~7 V'lJ' t,ptt O't~" ,:>~

;";"

37~i

t~ :',i~7

'737

1.25.41.

~U:l'

~,

C~'

"7~'

1.25.42.

~il'n

37~'

"," r'~:l

1. n:J1 C1nn > FEA I 2702, fo1. 26r. 11 2. FEA I 2702, fo1. 26r '~O7N.

J:l

:l"~

l

;";"

~'V, il'il '£) nO'7 1~

7'i' 'i"

11

3. FEA I

2702, fo1. 26r. FEA I 2441, fo1. 112v has 1n. 114. FEA I 2702, fo1. 26r. > FEA I 2441, fo1. 1I2v. 11 5. *FEA I 2441, fo1. I13r.

266

Part I: Chapter 25

1.25.43. The second is where it is said to stand in the place of waw, for

example, l~

C'W~-f

(Zech. 14:5), which is equivalent to '~.

1.25.44. The third is where it is the masculine and feminine second

person pronoun, the masculine being distinguished from the feminine by the presence of

under it and by its absence on the feminine qame~

pronoun, for example, J~t?=;1-'

C'tPlJ (Cant. 7:3), ]~=;1 ~l,;-'

lP'~

hJ;l~

(Deut. 28:4), 1~

(Deut. 6:2), 1~:P

(Exod. 13:9), 11; 1~J

(lsa. 57:10), ]J;l'~

(Josh. 2: 19),

c!l,nf '1'!:17tWl

'.D71~ '~lf

l~f

'p '~l

1~t?

(1 Kings 17:23),

N'~t

(Psa. 66:13),

(Haggai 2:23),

l'!:17tWl

(Nahum 3:6), '1~t"P-C (Jer. 2:28), l~'tP N~-'7t (lsa. 47:13), and similar cases. The pronominal kaph sometimes has the same form in the masculine and the feminine on particles when the masculine

h1i1;

pronoun is not conjoined in meaning, as in l~

3D?W;~ ,tP~ (Deut. 28:48), which is a disjoined masculine pronoun, an example of a

N?l (Ruth 2:22).

feminine pronoun with the same form being 1.~-3?: Another case is 62:4).

li

Cj? (Josh. 7:10) - i1~T

'i~

l?

'~,:-N

(lsa.

Lamedh 1.25.45.

This is only place at the beginning of words. It may be

meaningful or without meaning. A case where it is not meaningful is the lamedh in Ci7O/~

I,W7o/iJ (1

Chron. 3 :2), since the meaning of this

expression remains when the lamedh is removed. Another example of its redundant addition is the lamedh in I,IJ

:J7,?7-'?, (Eec. 9:4). There are

also further cases in addition to these. Meaningful lamedh falls into two categories. One of them is where it is established in its position and the other is where it has replaced other letters. Explanations of each of these two categories will be presented in the following sections.

Part I: Chapter 25

,m ~

,~

:J~)

m~

:J,)'

~'i

'~31

1l'~

':J~

~il'n

il11n11 il~'

~N

':J~

,~ ,~

""

,~

"110'

c~

,'~ir N~

N~

~,

:1~

1,m,

e,i'

1~

T'~1"

1)'~

,'~ir

6~

117

,~

1!l ", UM~' 1~

':J~

1J!l 'M 'N' 1J!l' l' ~, 1~'!l 1'V~" NJ ~1'

~"n

,~

'il

1.25.44.

,m

e~'M

'i" ,~

e'~"i

~il1m

1~

l' ~, 'N"~

~:J ~1'

':J~

1~3

m:J11:J 1l'~

,'~ir

~il17

';" ,'~ir

eN 1'3~"

1.25.43.

'il ,~

1J~!l

1~'!l "~31'

~il')m

"1) 1"!l N'!lN 1" ~'M 1" ~V 1J~!l

,~

~

ti:J~1

:J~

~'31

267

,m '~N

'Vl1)' N~'

1)'~

m'~

':J~

il~1'

~1

~!ln31

il"~

'1~

6~

e'~!lN

,~

il"~T

CN~

~m':J

'~17 :J~)

l':J~

2~,

,~

~

~1

~il1'

~,

~17

il"~

':J~

";" ~il'

,~

~

"~N

~,

1. *FEA I 2441, fo1. 113v. 11 2. FEA I 2702, fo1. 28r 7'K'K.

"",

')17~

'M

'i'11011

';'11 m,tv l"il 1~

1.25.45.

il"~

~n

~il'; 11'n:J

~il

~il17':J

il"~' :J')11

,~

"31 1~

!l~

,~

11'n:J :J,ir ~:J'

,~ ~il'n

C~ ~il"

Part 1: Chapter 25

268 Section

1.25.46. Take note that a meaningful lamedh that is established in its

position is attached to a verbal noun and also to a noun that is not a verbal noun. The lamedh that is attached to a verbal noun (and to other nouns) is divided into various types. 1.25.47.

One type is equivalent to what is called by the Arabic

grammarians 'the lam (that is equivalent to) kay' and also 'the lam of purpose'. An example of this in Arabic is qa~dtuk

kay taqcjiya /:tiijatl ('1

have sought you out in order that you perform what 1 require'), it being also possible to say li-kay taqcjiya J:tajatl ('in order that you perform what 1 require'), kayla taqcjiya J:tajatl ('in order that you do not perform what 1 require') and li-kay la taqcjiya J:tajatl ('in order that you do not perform what 1 require'). The meaning of the particle kay in all four constructions is the same, the intended sense being 'My purpose in seeking you out is for you to perform what 1 require' (or the negation of this). 11 An example in Hebrew corresponding to this type of lam is ~

':7,~1

ni)7? nlW7' 'niT-np?1 (Neh. 8:12), meaning that

iI!:J?tW ni~?l iI,?'~

C¥V-~:t

their purpose in going was to eat, to drink and to be merry. Further examples are i~':t7

:l?tf7?1 ni~tf7?1 '?~7

i~N1P? "P~-'t\

"~o/

N~1

(1 Sam. 13:10), Ni:tl$ "~l

(2 Sam. 11:11) and the like.

1.25.48. The second type is what is called (in Arabic grammar) 'lam of

outcome and result', that is 'from such-and-such situation there results such-and-such an outcome'. An example in Arabic is Casara Zaydun cAmran li-talafihi ('Zayd associated with cAmr to his ruin'), by which it is

meant that his ruin and destruction resulted from his associating with him. The meaning of lam here is the opposite of the preceding type of lam, for the preceding type denoted the purpose of the speaker with

regard to the matter in question, whereas this type denotes that he recoils 11

Two of the four constructions are negated.

Part I: Chapter 25

269 ,~!)

Nil1P~

Nil1N1pnON Y~

'Y!)'N

OON::J

0"

il1'!)~N

ON"N TN O'YN

OON

"Y'

'Y!)'N

CON

1.25.46.

"Y

':J1n

CNOPN "N copm 'Y!)'N CON "Y il':JN1'N!)

N~'

2N~0"

,n1~p

N":J"

'niNn

4p!)n~

mi"N

'~pn

N":J' ilY::J1N'N

'~N:J

t,~

'n~it,

t,~

:1;'~t"

"Y

Nil::J

':J, 'NP"

')Y~N

,'1

'~nt"

t,~

'niNn

'~pn

:'niNn

'~1"

,:;,t",

TN:J TN ')Y'

~", N~'

1.25.47.

f1"'N ON,

TN 'il '1~p:J

031:1 t,~

Cil~1"

'~pn

'niNn

:'niNn '~pn

nu,~t"

':IN'N

Nil1nN

Cil"P '::J1Y'N '!) ,'1 'n~

ON"N il1il 'n~ 5

N~

TN T'1'1'

,"P:J ')N1::JY'N '!)

:1n~

n'~31t"

'n~

n'J~

'1"1':1 t,~

n1!)'N'

~':1

::J1'tlhN'

'J~

'~:1t, ,'1 ilN::J't1JN'

~

11)Y' 8'N~

il!),n,

N1~Y

1'~N 1'7

1't1JNY Oil"P:J

ON"N f'P) Nil)Y~!

1':J~N

ON' 7N~0'

FEA I 2441, fo1. l13v has '~np

n':J'

il:JN,m il!),n iln1'tVNY~

''t1J'N '!) C':Jn~N

1. FEA I 2702, fo1. 28r '~O.

N~

Nil')Nn1 n':J

1.25.48.

1~N

TN'!)

T~

l~

T~ 11)Y'

f1" 1'!)n "n TN' il~1pn'N

11 2. FEA I 2702, fo1. 28r '~O1.

1n1:!rP.

11 3. FEA I 2702, fo1. 28r.

11 4. *FEA I 2441, fo1. 114r. 11 5. FEA I

2702, fo1. 28v. FEA I 2441, fo1. 114r has M17l1]'n .1I6. FEA I 2702, fo1. 28v + N1:J71. 11 7. FEA I 2702, fo1. 28v '~O.

11 8. FEA I 2702, fo1. 28v 7N~1.

28v 7N. 1110. FEA I 2702, fo1. 28v 7N.

119. FEA I 2702, fo1.

270

Part I: Chapter 25

from the thing to which the lam is attached, but such an outcome results from his situation. An example in Hebrew is

0'0/37 I 7~ltp-n'# 'W~

'W1i?i?

J':¥~7 ;'i?D1? iT¥;, (Ezek. 8:6), in which it was not their purpose in performing the misdeeds to become distant from the sanctuary, but

rather this conduct of theirs resulted in becoming distant and uprooted. Another example is

iTP.W? O~,

O,o/? (Jer.

18:16), in which it was

not their purpose in performing the said abominations to make their land desolated, rather their condition acted as the cause and led to that outcome. 1.25.49. A third type is what is called (in Arabic) lam al-tawkid ('the lam of emphasis'), like the lamedhs in iTp,W?' iT*'I!? O~¥' 'r.Jl~1 iT.??i?71 (Jer. 44:22), for these lamedhs do not exhibit a function beyond expressing emphasis. This is because, if one were to say

iT??i?' iT~Wl iT~'1!

O~¥'

'tTT;l1

iT~'I!,

like ';ry~ q~'l iT~?o/ b~¥, iT!.l;;:J1 (Lev. 26:33), the meaning would be close to that of the

construction that has lamedh. The lamedhs of emphasis are attached to nouns of action that are not infinitives and that are used in the context of the lexical class of 'being'. The lamedhs of purpose, on the other hand, are used with nouns of action that are infinitives in the context of lexical classes other than that of 'being', as has been shown above. Lamedhs of emphasis may also be used on what is not a noun of action where the two items in the construction constitute a predication of the lexical class of 'being', for this includes a noun concerning which the predication is made and a predicate. The lamedh is attached to the predicate for the sake of emphasis, for example,

17.P? (Zech. 14:9), 0'~7N?

Th? ;'1;'; i1~Jl '7 iT.1iT;

(1 Sam. 24: 16), iT.tiT; iTs~Jl

iTs~Jl

(Gen. 28:21), and similar cases. This differs from Arabic, for the predicate of Arabic kana is not

emphasized by lam and one does not say kana Zaydun la-qa)im(an) ('Zayd was verily standing'), but rather the predicate of )inna is

Part I: Chapter 25

3,~

i1)~, '~N

c, 'j,~

Ci1'~

,~

i1)~

i1"~j,

Sl1~

n'~:Jp,

n~,

'n~

j'~n,

i1j'~

,n~

1'1f1' 1'1' ~ ~o

j'~m

f1,'1'1 1,w':J

"l 17~

'j~

j'~n

l'w, ':J~

c~,

~i1 ,~j'

7':J~

1~' ~i1:J

j~"

~o '17~

~

CO~:J

i1)17>

i1P"~ c'~P

~':J j'T

1~

11 3. FEA I 2702, fo1. 28v 7~. N~ilm:Jn.

':J~

" ,~p tI~Y'N

17~

'n~

p~'

'~17

',17 'in r'"~ :Jon f1,'1'1 pw, 0" ~ ',17 ~, co~ i1, 1~' f1,'1'1

"j, "j '~n '~P

~,

1. FEA I 2702, fo1. 28v. FEA I 2441, fo1. 114r: "~N7.

n~,

1'~

no', ,~

'n,~

'" 1'1'1'1' :i"S '" 1'1'1'1' ,m ~j'n

':J17~ ,:J

~,

,~

'1'1f1,

'j~

6 llot ,:1::> ?'i" lot~:> U!)'~" ':I ?loti" llot 10n' lot? ,lot Clot?:1 ,::>"

,',

j"S '" :1':1' llot? illotm?lot ')l.'

il£)ot~?

Clot?

"T Clot?" ?n~ Clot? ",,:1 lot~i'n Clot?" Cil?'i'::> Clot?:1 ,::>lot?lot, lot~i'; lot~i'n£) lot~i':>? '?lot l'£)ot~ "'S !l'" ')lot,:1l.'?lot '£) ,?, n~'? ,?, illot:1tvlot' C',~o ",,:1 ,::>lot l.'~ot,

'£)

:1,,:1' Sv ,~ ~Yi'

':1"

l'n£)ot~?

l.'£)" T"~n?lot j!lS :1n~ ?'i'? l.'~otO?

lot~'

lot~

1':~ l'~Oot?,

li"'YS "'~ lot£)~

lotill.':1lot"

'?l.' Cil')l.' '1lot~? ";" lot~, "~l.' ,lot" '~l.? ,lot" "T? Clot?:1 ,::>lot?lot, Clot? ",,:1

!,',S ~Yi' il'il

lot~O?N

1.25.50.

j'V'lS,

?n~

':I ?~n

lot~?'

~" j!l j'V'l !l'" ii'::> nlot" Clot? 1':1 ')l.~?ot '£) i"£)?N' :1lJ "~:I C'i"'Y "'~, '£) "?:1lot 'il Clot? lot~m il'?l.' '''' lot? lot~ llot '"'!l 2,£) ?'loti'?lot 11.' l.'~otO? Cil£) ,lot ?lot::>tvlot?lot Cil£) 1~ :1 'i'lot 3,~ lot?,lot 1~ '~i 1~ '?lot ,~ \,~S j!l> 'n~ :1J:1 il""

'?lot il?l.'lot£) 1~ ?l.'£)?lot lotil:1 "l.'n' lot~ lotiO~:>' 1.25.51. l.'~ot,? fl.':1 '£) Clot? ",,:1 il'?lot "l." 'i' lot~ ?'l.£)~ot ii'::> ,?" Clot? lot?:1 il'lotm CN?:1 sil'lotn il"??lot ?illot m,l.'£)

S!l!l '!l~"S

t'l,rt, j"!l~

'J!lS 6n~N

1'1" i1:J

N~C'

Ni137:JNC' N~

'N1N N'N£> Ni11i, i1T"~n

N~?

"?N 'r~ Tcn '£> ?N:Ji?N ' 137 :J~?N [i1371C]?N ,i11 [i11i'?N] T~ 11::> ?~nN

n~)

'V O"N:1r~'

o',rrrr

'£> "?N

T'1:>~?N

,nN':J i1T'~

N~i1'l

O'i'?N 1?'n~i '£>, [

]?N

' 137 ON??N ?N::>'N:J

'£> ?Nn?N 1'1,::>, ':1r~ rr'rr, ?n~ TN::> "?N 40,t,£)J i11::>''1 '::>N ?:J :1,t, r:1'N~ N?'? i11n::>?N '£> N? ~'iC?N

1':>~?N

"1' "?N OCN?N ' 137 ON??N

1'1, N?'? 'N 'r~

"'0

1.25.53.

i1N'C '£> 'n~?N i'~V:1 c,t,£)J

'£> rr:1'N?N:J oi1?'n~

nl'

1. FEA I 2441, [01. 115v T":lN. 112. *FEA I 2437, [01. 271r. 113. FEA I 2441, [01. 115v

+ m:l'.114. *FEA I 2437, [01. 271v.

Part I: Chapter 25

276

specified by the attaching lamedh to it. The same applies to tVJ~'

i'il;17?7 (Ezek. 3:3) and other cases. This lamedh has the function that is known in Arabic as al-tamyiz (,specification') where something has various possible aspects and one of these is specified and put in the accusative to mark this specification. An example of one type of this construction is JimtalaJa qalbi gay ~an

('My heart has become full with

anger'), since this is one of the things it could be filled with. Section 1.25.54. As for the lamedh that substitutes for something else, this may

occur as a substitute for another letter or may occur as a substitute for words. The lamedh that substitutes for letters is divided into various categories.

nr-~7 Ct.r~

i1?,~

1.25.55.

One of these is where it substitutes for beth, for example

Cy?~-'

(Lev. 5:5), which is like ~7?Wl

(Ezek. 25:12). Another example is ,~ which corresponds to "j?~ A further example is l~O/: which is l~O/: C'~: ~inf could be added to these. 1.25.56.

(Isa. 10:28),

~i1)7

lifo/T:l (Job 18: 15). Similar cases

like i'J~f,

The second category is where it substitutes for daleth, for

example ni1f'~lJ it to be ,~.

tvP.~7

~7?o/l

like 'r.ni "~ 1~f (Psa. 31 :6). (Gen. 49: 13), the virtual form of

tv7?~f C'~

"i?~

Ci~

',~

l1.' (Josh. 2:7), where the sense requires r~!.1iJ

Another example is 1'~-

corresponds to 1'~-,

i1}~:

(Gen. 49:13), which

which is a particle expressing an end limit.

1.25.57. The third category is the lamedh that substitutes for the heh of

definition, for example IJ~T71 corresponds to IJ;T~il

b7~NiJ

since the heh in C7~NiJ

l'(;J

(Joel 2: 17), which

requires that, so that it

"IoJ 'L£PZ I V3:.·h "Z

~NL'tC

'LS'SZ'I

11

L'tCm:U

"[C]~GL.

L!L t:aU~HL!

LUN4UL!N

L!L t:aUNt:L!

aN

.11.. J;,1..L! LUNt"L!N

'9S'SZ'I

N4aett " "au~

~a.1t:Ll

t:N~'L

LQN ,~L."

4tLL. C1.L.LL. 44'tL6 181 I "IoJ '1PPZ I V3d :L'C~.!

L~aCU

"tLt:

"tLt:

ual.."L.L!

ca:~

,ad,1.. L,N~a

aU4

atNt:

N41.." L!L UL.~ CLtL! aN

"lUZ "I

Nl.. N4L!N a" ~NL'tC L!N

N4UetL."~

tUL

C,!

4tL!N"L! N4'CN"L!

.11..

L,L.C:LlL .1't J;,1..L! 1..L.J. ~'L.J! .1't

LaU4L!

l..N4

tUL

L!l..N N4Q~L."

'tULL7 ,a,c ,~C:! t:aUNt:L!

aN't~

CULL7 ,a,c ,~C:! aU4 Ll ~C:L! C,1..J. Nad,1.. L.LU, LaU4L!

QU4

C~

'tac:~

LaU4L!

NUl..L!N aN z "nt: atNt:

'SS'SZ'I

,ad,1.. C:'t,L L!L C:, ,N~C 'tNULl

t:N tUL

utaOC N4" NaONC tN"t:L!

UL.~

etl

LU'C"

tN"t:L!

N4a~

etl

aN4tN"t:L!

aNaN N44NC N4tN"t:L! atNt: 'C"L.L!N aNtL!N

't'S'SZ'I

etl

UL.~

al..

U'C"

aA4

Nau4N a4t:" ~,N a"a",,! aN

c:"

4'CLN! [NQU4!NL! t:QN a" 1..4L

t:NUl..L!N

"oaN

a"

C:1.~

L"tAt:

et4"

N4etL.t:"

'taLlLd

N4ua",,!

N4ua",,!

ca~

N41.."

a" "uua4

NUl..

AL.Lt:L!

N4a>."

L'CLL!N

L'C"L.L!I LU 'CL. " L!1..L! N44NC C:" t:Nt:L!N a'CL."

ua",,!L! NUl.. N4auua4,,1 t:Nl..CN4 N44NC et4"L! LC1..4L N4UN4

SZ 19ldul[J :1 llBd

LLZ

Part I: Chapter 25

278

1'? ~

would be like il1?;"?iJ

i"~-?

T¥tp~

Ci~J

'7.?{-W~

be i'~-

T",~

(Gen. 1: 14). Another example is

(2 Kings 7:2), where the sense requires it to

H7tp~

17.?iJ-'W~·

1.25.58. The fourth category is the lamedh that substitutes for waw, for example C"?;j7~

T",~7

1W'r;ttr T",~

'9!.J"~

'i~J

C~"# 1',~

C"7'~ C"ry?~

(Isa. 59:2), which is like ?J~1 (Gen. 1:4). Other examples are '9~r;T{7,

Ct'i7 (Prov. 27:27) and C"7~

:J7.r~

:J"W~i7

(1 Sam. 15:22),

where it functions as a connective with what precedes. 1.25.59. The fifth category is the lamedh that substitutes for mem, for example il!?f'{ il?i?tp N~

~1

(2 Chron. 1: 13), the meaning of which is

il7?fi?· Another example is '~iJ

Tl~7

~7'r;Tl

correspond to Tli~:P?

positing such substitution) would

ilt1T~

(Gen. 11 :8), which (by

(1 Kings 15:21). A further example is :J"'~i7

(Jud. 3:18), which has the meaning

of:J"'~i,

~i?

lj"7~1 means irnVN il?"37~. :.

il~

'1,

i1l-C~

: '.'

??-;1 (2 Sam. 6: 18).

(2 Sam. 15:19), which is like

(Ezek. 12:3), and i1;ltp~ T

il7:;> 'W~

since 'ceasing' is said to

be 'from' something, as in ilJi37l:J Tli?~J Similar cases are '9r?iV~7

?1r;T~

il,7H'7 (1 Chron. 3:3), which

••

1.25.60. The sixth category is the lamedh that substitutes for the kaph of comparison, for example lV1TJ Y~lTJ

,ri f

YlJ7 '~"lp;1

"1i~7

l"f:~w

ilJ~

(Isa. 41: 15),

(Isa. 49:2), the meaning of which is "1i~f

and

n:r:;>· 1.25.61. The seventh category is the lamedh that substitutes for resh, for example, '~i)7:P is ,., lji)~:P,

b"~

itH'l (Isa. 13:22), the virtual form of which

that is 'palaces', on account of what is found in the

adjacent context. 12 Similarly, it is said concerning C"i~ 104:15) that it corresponds to '''iJ¥iJ7, from 'iJ~ 12

I.e. the parallel phrase that follows it

"a'¥ '7.~r

C'}l.:q.

'''r.r¥iJ7 (Psa.

(Gen. 6:16). Likewise,

Part I: Chapter 25

1,~

~N' ", 'V 7V~

7'~

,m 11"'11 7'~ J

0"11 7':1 'n~

'~N

,m C;:"J'~

1,n~'i 1':;)'"

"~1

~n1, 7'~ O"N ~'n

"~np

i1:I1:;)

:IN)~

'N'

279

")~'N

~'i1

i1,n~'

,m N~"

C"~

:IN)~

"V11 fI'J~

11:;)'"

n~, O::l'11'N cn" ,~n"

'fI~

~"i'1

11'::l '~N:l

,::l', i"~) 'n~

FEA I 2441, fo!' 59v, FEA I 2702, fo!. 29r.

11

3. FEA I 2702, fo!' 29r')37. 114. *FEA I 2437, fo!' 275v. 11 5. FEA I 2441, fo!' 60r, FEA I 2702, fo!' 29r + P7"7N ')37

N7. 11 6. FEA I 2441, fo!' 60r Nil7,p.

Part I: Chapter 25

286 Section

1.25.72. Take note that, just as the letter sometimes is attached to the front of a word and has no meaning, it may also be elided from it when the meaning requires it to be present. This occurs in two types of construction, one where an item is connected (to what precedes by a connective particle) and the other where there is no such connection. 1.25.73. As for cases where the letter is elided when an item is connected

m

h¥~' ::1"17 (Isa. 58:4). by a connective, this is illustrated by '~i This should be il¥~7' ::1",7, since the presence of the lamedh in the first noun, to which (the second noun) is connected, requires the presence of another lamedh in the connected noun, as is the usual practice, for example C"~i?71 CW~?l m\~1)7 il~?7 h?3?? il;irliJ l1NT (Lev. 7:37) and similar cases. Since, however, it is present in ::1"17, it has been elided from the other noun, relying on the fact that the first noun indicates how the second should be interpreted. Another example is ::1*7 .,~tp;1

C:1¥~

r1,~-'

'y?~

in"~-7

had a regular structure, it would be 'Wi~7. 1.25.74.

Ti'~7

il"i',;J7

(Gen. 45:8). If this

As for elision where the construction does not involve a

'~iJ '111 C"Jtp~ ,~.t:T (2 Sam. 15 :31), the virtual form of which is '117 '~iJ '~iJ, since he himself is not informing somebody else, but rather the news came to him by means of somebody else. This, therefore, would connective, this is illustrated by examples such as

correspond to the construction in 23:13). Another example is 1?~rl;J

'11 'O P"'J~

'i7t~. Another example is il"W~ which means P"'~7 (Psa. 89:2), the virtual form of which is il"tP~

"'J91) i7-'?tp~

(Psa. 89:29) and similar cases.

'17t~

(Isa. 3:10),

cjil' il111;, "'9lJ C?i1'7, like C7i1'7,

287

Part I: Chapter 25 7~£)

IN7 ~N£)7

7'N .,£) il'T~

:Nilm:1117 N"~1P :~'017N

""11 N~:>

"J17~N

,nJ£) ~'017N

m::111 "~1P

2:l"S

p::> 17' 1~

i'ltV~7N

i~1:>

Nil~n:>

l"il'" "717 17"

i~1:>"

"'7N N~£)

:l"S .,,,.,

1.25.73.

1N ilpn 1N::>

,m il"717 ~'017N ::1on ~'017N

rY~'

Y1'1

0'P1~7N

OON7N .,£)

OON7N .,£) "i::>N ON7

OtlNS, 1'1NUnS, rnJ~S, :l"S .,£) Nil11::111N

:S~,

1.25.72.

'p Nil7 "J17~

.,£) N~il'n

.,£) Nm~

ON77N m:l11 1N7 rY~S,

1~

Nm~

1'::>'"

i"" .,£) i::>N7N' ~'017N

:l"S rrr

Ni1:IN 0717N'

rrS'l1S rr"1'1rr 1'1Nt N~7

m::>7

7N1~'

17,

3

il"JN117N "717 "7'N7N il7N7' "717 . N7N::>11N i::>N7N OON7N

'1'1':l S~

r"NS, rl1'~S

11::>' 41N i'lt1J~7N

:lNS 'J~tI"

N~"

17'

'717 N" '7 ',,::1J' 1N::>

:S:I:l

StI~,

71~'

:StI'~, ,nJ£) ~'017N

""

"l~r

i'" '£) Nm~

"lrr ",S,

i~1:>'

N~

N~'

17' 71~'

1':l~

7P'

:", uS~J

07 'N ,S~

1'1:lS

i"'Y "~N il71~' rr"tlN oS'l1 '" ',on il71~' ',on 6,S '~tlN OS'l1S 71~ :l'~

,~

1.25.74.

:O"tI'i':l S~1'nN

ili"'pn

il::1 il'717 'i' i::1::>7N 7::1 ili""7 17'::1 i:1>~

S~

N~£)

:N£)~

,~ ili"P11

'~NS

"lrr

i"" 'il m'::>7

'lrr S'NtlS, :,S~ 1'1:l r":l~

7n~

m'::>7 ON7 i""::1 lon'£)

:i"'YS "~N silNJ17~ :rr"tlN OS'l1S ili"pm 17' ilN::1t1JN'

1. > FEA I 2437, fol. 276r. 11 2. :1"~ mn~'

'i'n: FEA I 2437, fol. 276r

:1'". 1 3. FEA I 2437, fol. 276v + i1~:J. 2437, fol. 298r i1~J7'.

116. BHS: ,~.

'i'

l~

i1P"

l~:J

114. *FEA I 4478, fol. 73v. 11 5. FEA I

PART I: CHAPTER 26

ON THE FOUR LETTERS THAT ARE USED SPECIFICALLY WITH VERBS, NAMELY THOSE THAT TOGETHER FORM THE (MNEMONIC) WORD 117'N 1.26.1. These four letters are attached to the imperative, which is one of the parts of the verb. When they are attached, it becomes a future verb, which may also be used to express the present, for example, iblP~,

iblP:. iblPT;l,

iblP~·

iblP,

There is no conjugation that these letters

cannot be attached to, though they cannot be attached to the parts of the verb other than the imperative, namely the past and the future forms. This is because the future form is made future by means of the letters and so it does not require them (to be attached a second time) and the past form is prevented from having them since its meaning is in contradiction with (the meaning expressed) by their attachment. For this reason they perform their function only on imperatives and not on other parts of the verb. 1.26.2. If one were to say: Is not ~N1

cry? i'iN

3~'inN

In''N i1'~)

1~

i~'

~'l0

~'O

'~.l ~

l'i i~

4

1~

~i1'l

~,

~i

~,

~'in

n'~"

:J'i~

1~

,~

~ml'

i1'0

C~0i'

1i'::> '~n"

':Jino~,

,~

l'm~

~':>O

",t,

i'1W~

"l'

~ i~'

~O'

6'N' ~'l0

:J~

,~t

c:-rt,

~i1:J

'5:)0'

i~O

'i' C~,:> 1~

'5:)0

ri'~)n

:J~,i

~,

m~

i') "l' '~:Jino,

~in

i~'

'0

"i' 1~0

'~:JinO

1~ ~'in

O"~

i1~'0 ~':JinO

i1',l' ~i1":>'J i') ~,

ii" ~,

5:Ji~

1~

')) 'i'0 ~,

1"

1.26.1.

'~l0

,~

10n',

'~no

i1,i1

i'~O

1~'

1~:>

i1l':J~

"~N

':JinO~

i1~)l'

~in'

,~

i1',l' ~i1":>

~i1:J

"jJ, N~

~i1":>J

i1"l'

n ,~

jJ~N:'

,::>,n

"l'

~':linO

jJ37:JiN'iN 2"£l lCN'i::>'iN

1~:>

1.26.2.

~,

i1',l'

1"

'0 '~n

n:Jn ii' ~ ,,::>, n:Ji'"

n'::>i

~,

7~'in i1'l~0

~inN.

l. *FEA I 2437, fo1. 298r. 11 2. FEA I 4478, fo1. 73v '73.'. 11 3. FEA I 2441, fo1. 61r

FEA I 4478, fo1. 73v ~inN7. fo1. 61r, FEA I 4478, fol. 73v

i~N.

11 11

4. *FEA I 2437, fo1. 298v. 11 5. FEA I 2441,

6. > FEA I 4602, fol. lr, FEA I 2441, fo1. 61r,

FEA I 4478, fo1. 67r. 11 7. *FEA I 4602, fol. lr.

290

Part I: Chapter 26

passive conjugation and this differs from an active conjugation in that it is not appropriate to derive an imperative from it, that a pronoun referring to the patient takes the place of a pronoun referring to the agent in situations where a pronoun of the agent stands independently, as in

nNT (Gen. 45:19) and 1"R~ ~tp

ilt'~

ilJ;~,

ilt'J.~

il'p~q

(Psa. 119:4) and that n~

is generally omitted from (before) its patient, just as you omit it from (before) the agent, for it is not appropriate to say O:1~t'-n same way as you say 7~ltp:-n'

t'~iJ

ilf~

in the

(On account of these

differences) there is no reason why it should not also differ from active conjugations in the attachment of the letters ofthe future to the past form, since it is impossible to derive from it an imperative, to which a letter of the future could be attached, as in the other conjugations. In a similar way the people of Arabic made its patient take the place of the agent with regard to the case inflection, for they said r;luriba Zaydun ('Zayd was hit') in the nominative as is the agent in the phrase r;laraba Zaydun (' Zayd hit'), although the action falls upon the first Zayd and the action procedes from the second Zayd. In some passive conjugations in Hebrew, however, a letter of the future is not attached to the past form but rather to a form that is simlar to what an imperative would be like, if an imperative had been derived from it. This applies, for example, to il1~;

'W~

(Exod.

34:34). If you were to remove the letter of the future from it, the form

ilW would remain. This is close to the imperative, which has the form m.~,

according to those who claim that it has an imperative. The past form is il1h"~

il~

(Num. 36:2) but the form

ilW; does not occur with

the letter of the future attached to it, as it has been attached to the past form in

';17 "tTN7 'J~9;

(Psa. 22 :31).

Part I: Chapter 26

il71N~

00' 07 N~ TN Ton' N' i1:IN '17N~

,~

9"~n

,~

Nil71~

ONP~

7NP N~ 117 f1N 9,n

T~ 2,~

N~il'71

:tf1N'

5:J'~

'7NP~

:IN'17N7N 71~N 17,P' 17~ "T :J'~ 07 N~ 9"~n f17:J ,~ '717 7N:JpnoN'N 9,n 7~" '~N

i1:I~

,~

N~'

'p' '~

')17 'N~

WJl1 f1Nt :tf1"y

'ilWN7N C"!)N f1N :t~ ,~

i1:I~ i1:I~

N~

,~

Nil~7'

"17n, Ni1:I"

9"N~n'

,~

'~N

,~

1"'i'!) :tf1"y :tf1N

", 'n~7

N~"

9'N~

'17N~

Ton' N' "'N '17N~ T17 Nil~'n 07 'N~ f1N f1'~:t, "pn N~ "17 'N:JpnoN7N 49"n "~, 9,n il"17 ,~ i1:I~ '~ '~N 'ilN '~NP

TN~

il~NP

7~)N

,~

N~

i1:I17 n'No 'n'N 9"N~n' 1,~0'

il"17~

291

i1:I~

il"17~

"pn 3TN IN 17m~' '~N7

ii'p:J 'n~

'N:JpnoN7N '17N~ ONP~ il"17~ il':J'177N Oil7'P ,~ '17N~ 17~'N:J "T IN "17 ')Nn'N T~ il17'P" ,'N7N:J 07 N~ ')N':J177N ,~ il71N~ 00'

'~

'nn '7 '~N :J'NP' N~ "17 ':J i1:I~ '~N7 :t,y 'P:J 7N:JpnoN7N 9,n n'TN N'N "'N :t,y' '~N ,m 6'~N il' 71~' 1~ 'N' '717 :t,y 'il "'N '~N 1~ N:J"P 9,n ,~" lN~ 7:t,y, '~ 0" "':1 :t,y '~N TN7 "" "" ,!)C' ,~ ,~ N~ 'n~ '~N '717 7N:JpnoN'N

1. FEA I 2441, fa!' 61v, FEA I 4478, fa!. 67r

N~O'.

112. > FEA I 4478, fa!' 67r. 11

3. *FEA I 4602, fa!' 1v. 114. FEA I 2441, fa!' 61 v, FEA I 4478, fa!' 67r ~'n.

"T: FEA I 2441, fa!' N'~.1I7*FEA

61v

N"T.

I 4602, fa!' 2r.

116. FEA I 2441, fa!' 62r N'~.

11 5. :J'~

FEA I 4478, fa!' 67v

Part I: Chapter 26

292

1.26.3. Take note that these four letters all have the aforementioned

meaning when attached to the beginning of verbs but when they occur in the middle or the end of words as pronouns, Jaleph is not included among them and only the three other letters are used in this way, as will be shown in the following discussion, which treats each letter separately. JAleph 1.26.4. Take note that Jaleph differs from other letters of the alphabet in

the feature of change (from the regular morphological pattern) that is associated with it. This feature is likewise exhibited by the letters heh, I;eth, cayin, and resh. The letter resh displays the least change whereas Jaleph displays the most change. The other three (heh, I;eth and Cayin) show no difference with regard to change. Change appears in association with all these letters when the letters of the future are attached to imperatives at the front of which there is one of the aforementioned five (guttural) letters. The resh exhibits change in some cases but not in others, and for this reason it is (said to be) the least associated with change. You can see, for example, that il~1

and il~:p

do not differ from

one another when the letters of the future are attached to them in and

il~:

but they do differ elsewhere, as in

il~f:

and

ilwr~.

ilN'" "."

:.

The letters

heh, I;eth and Cayin do not differ from one another when the letters of the future are added to them, for example il7?D~,

ilm:, il7.~:

JAleph, on the

other hand, since it is more prone to change than the other (guttural) letters, exhibits changes from these patterns, and from similar ones also. You see, for example, that when a letter of the future is attached to (the imperative forms) 'b~,

,,·,W, '~n

and ,~

the form with Jaleph exhibits

'~N\

a change that does not occur in the other three, for from 'b~ but from ,,-,W is derived

,,'w:, from '·~n

is derived '~n:

is derived and from

Part I: Chapter 26

".n7i'~N

.,£> p£>nn

6N£>7N7N tJNO'N .,£> iln7n7N 7::1 Niln7~

~'nN7

293

i7N il'il 1N 0737N' n7~

1.26.3.

":>'~7N

N'N' 7N37£>N7N 7"N'N .,£> 1~

~7N

16n N7£> 'N~7

Nil'::>N'N'

:N£>,n N£>,n Nil"£> iln,W "nN"

"737 '::>N7N N~

~7N

rn::>n n"::1 ~7N

~'nN

n"n7N' Nil7N Nil,n::>N ~7N'

il7~

")37~N

2

1~

~7N

N,"""n Nil7PN W"'7N P7 W"'7N' 1'377N'

"n7N '~N7

N7 il"PN::17N ;'7N' :N,"""n

"737 7N::1pnON7N ~"n .,£> ,""n W"'7N£> :4~'nN7

7'::>' ')37 7::>7N 3.,£> ilO~:>7N

il'il ,nN Nil7'N

1N ",n N7N 5N,"""n Nil7PN mN::> 17'7£> 37~' ~"n

1.26.4.

N,il .,£> il::>'W'" Niln"p::1 137 ,""n7N::1

'iltJ., ,"""n7N' ,"""n7N .,£> ~7n:> 37~'

1N 0737N

.,£> ,;"n N7'

7'::>' ')37 '::>N7N 137 N6il,nN ,;"n" 07 :1J:l, :1N' Nil~37:1

,""nn N7 1'377N' n"n7N' Nil7N' ::1N1! :1J~!

:1Jn' :1t.J:1' 17'P::> Nil"737 7N::1pnON7N

~"n

7'::>'::1 1'37::1 137 N~£> ::1'V'

,.,,, Niln"p::1 137 ,"""n7N .,£> iln'N"T7£> ~7N

s,,:lV t.;:ln l't'1 't.JN 71N ",n 6N7N :N~" N~£>

iln7n7N 137 ~7N

,,:lV 1~'

':In' '':In 1~'

Nil'~.

il7Nn~

137' Nm37

,;" Nil"737 7N::1pnON7N ~'n

l":1' l":1 1~'

1. FEA I 2441, fol. 62r, FEA I 4478, fol. 67v + 1" 62r

17'P::>

,~.

,t.J~

112. N,il ,~:

"t.J~

7'::>'::1

1~

FEA I 2441, fol.

11 3. FEA I 2441, fol. 62v 131.114. FEA I 2441, fol. 62v rpnN. 11 5. *FEA I

4602, fol. 2v.

11

6. FEA I 2437, fol. 374r "N. 11 7. > FEA I 2437, fol. 374r.

8. Different word order in FEA I 2437, fol. 374r ';'il ":131 ,':1n '''N.

11

Part I: Chapter 26

294 '":1~

is derived '":1~.

The change associated with ~aleph,

moreover, is not

restricted to one type, but rather (it is of various types). For example, from 'b~

is derived '~N,

is derived ~b.

but from Ti1~

is derived

TlJN' and from ~b

As you can see, in these it exhibits three types of

changes, although the pattern of the three imperatives is the same in each case. 1.26.5. Just as ~aleph

is associated to the greatest extent with change, it is

also distinguished from other letters in its feature of being hidden and assimilated. This is because it is a soft letter. If it were visible in future verb forms such as iJ'~,-

'~N

(Job 10:2), "~7

'P~

'?Nl

(Job

31: 17) and the like, they would, according to rule, have the form 'b~

and ,~

like ~O

~O

(Micah 2:12), since one of the two ~alephs

is

to express the future and the other belongs to the root of the word.

Section 1.26.6. Take note that it may also be elided in other ways, from either the beginning, the middle or the end of words. Examples where it is elided from the beginning of a word are ,~

~)t;J

(Num. 32:32), ~)W9

(Lam. 3 :42), since the most commonly used form is ~)t;J

~)71

with the ~aleph

retained. The same applies to Ci~7

MD (Ezek. 30:2). Examples where it is i1ifil (Num. 11: 11), elided from the middle of a word are T!.J 'lJ~?-7

C,¥ (Job 1:21), since the ~alephs 'lJ#~

belong to the root of the lexical

classes of 'finding' and 'coming out'. The same applies to ~)'.7¥

'i1~

(Jer. 9: 17) and also to

,:pi1;1 ~7?

i1~WlJ

(Ezek. 28: 16) and n:~

~7f

Sam. 6:10). Examples where it is elided from the end of a word are

'!pN1 '1~~aleph

~aleph

~7-C1

T7?W

WN\ (Psa. 141 :5), which should, according to rule, have and be like frJ;liN N'1~ (Num. 30:9), since ~aleph belongs to the

root of this lexical class. Other examples are i£)~,

i£)~,

(1

TP:-'7?

(Job 19:23),

(Job 24:25), since the usual form that occurs is Ni£)~ at the end.

with

Part I: Chapter 26

T~

295

~q

7:J n1nN' np"~ '737 ~7N '''''11 ,~' 07' :":111' i7N '737 ",~ ~ON' ON~ T~' trtN' tnN ~'T '~N '~N F'7N ,~ ~N' i 7N NmON 37~ "11 N~:J m~' n,'" T37 N~' lin:JN '''''117N ii1N'T:J fl1:JN N~:J' 1.26.5. f37:J '!J n~' '7 n)N7 N:J'7 N!J,n m':J7 ON"1N7N' N!J:J7N:J 2":1~ 'n~ ~N' t'~Nr ~N 'ON ,m n7:Jp10~N 7N37!JN7N

~'N 3T~

pn TN:J7 ~n7Nl1' ':JN7N' 7N:JP110N77 T'!J7N7N 1nN TN7 ~'ON 'ON~ "ONN N:J':J' TN

T'1~!J7N

71~

n~!J7N

7~N

7~!J

T':J' ,71' ,5~ 7'N T~ '~1:J

'737 N~' '~1:J '17N!J :Nn':JN'N' Nn~O' '!J "mV~7N TN7 'Jl1~

7N~310

m~'

N1n ,~' 6, 1'Y~ ~N

O"~

1p mN 0737N' ~N7

1.26.6.

7'N 4T~

UMJ :s,:1l1J 'JMJ i~!J7

rtrt '!J ON7:J7N' ~7N: ,m n6~, ~O, T~ ~l1:'

m:Jl1:J 'JMJN r~' '1'N' :"~'N :~"J7N' 1'~7N n"7 7~N T~ T'!J7N7N TN7 'nr' 0"11 :rM '~O ,71::l' "~7N N1n ',~ 'rtJ 'J~l1 rtJ~1' ,~ ON7:J7N' ro~ ,m n6!J7 ':IN T~ 7'~1:J '17N' :1'1':1:1 ,~ ,~'n N'J' 71~ P:J'7 ~7N:J '~ TN npn T~ '~N 'J' ~N ~N' ON' :'~N rn' '0 n"77N n1n 7~N T~ ~7N 1N rtn'N :n':JN '!J ~7N:J 8N'~ '~ "mv~7N 1N '~N N~

,m,

l.*FEA I 4602, fo1. 3r. 112. > FEA I 2441, fo1. 63r, FEA I 4478, fo1. 32r. 11 3. FEA I 2441, fo1. 63r ,~.

11

4. FEA I 2441, fo1. 63r ,~.

'~N.

6. FEA I 2441, fo1. 63r 'TlN~7-.

11 5. FEA I 2441, fo1. 63r + c'~"n.

11

11 7. *FEA I 4602, fo1. 3v. 11 8. FEA I 4478, fo1. 32v

Part I: Chapter 26

296

1.26.7. Take note that, just as it is elided from the three aforementioned positions, it can also occur redundantly and as a substitute for another letter (in these positions). 1.26.S. An example of it occurring redundantly at the beginning of a word is the >aleph of1',~9-

'~1

(Prov. 25:11), since it is said that

this corresponds to the more common form

"~

and so it means 'a word

spoken appropriately'. 1.26.9. Examples of substitution for another letter include cases where it substitutes for heh, like the >alephs in '~I)J;l (lsa. 63:3), ~'7iT;lP

(2 Chron. 20:35), 'T:l7~

(Psa. 76:6), since these are past form verbs and the

>aleph does not belong to their roots and so it must (be considered to) stand in place of heh in order for the forms to conform to a common pattern of conjugations. Another example is T"7?~i:' which is said to correspond to Ti~vJ.

'7

Ti~

'J:lN~7?

'T:l1W~

'tlJ~

(Jer. 52: 15),

Likewise it is said concerning

Tii1

(Hos. 12:9) that it corresponds to

account of it occurring in the context of the word'

r:'lW ~.

There are also

cases where it substitutes for (ayin, for example cry'7.~ 25:30), ni:?~-'l

hi:::!1

nt~-'

~Nl

on

N?~T:l

(Jer.

(Jer. 28:8),1 the virtual

forms of which are C~r7.,

i~1-'n nt)?~-'l, since (verbs of) this lexical class generally transfer their action (to their object) by ,~ rather than ,~. and C'~W1

Likewise 'NP.7?l:-~

'7.71)

".NW-'~

,~.

2i~N

i1!l~

'i?W-';> (Jer. 40:16)

np?

(Ezek. 21:34), to both of

which applies what has just been said. 1.26.10. An example of a redundant letter in the middle of a word is the

>aleph in ~7f

liNW CNi?l

(Hos. 10: 14), since it does not belong to

the root of this lexical class. A similar case is the >aleph in '~,

'~WN,l

(Ezek. 9:8), since the lexical class of this contains only one root >aleph, 1 BHS: 2

n;~?7-1.

BHS: 1.1);1'\.

Part I: Chapter 26

~m

37~'t;,

it;,~

.,~

~t;,

1~ ~'n

m~t;,

:"J~

:J~)

t,V ,,:1, ~t;, .,t;,37 ~t;"p

:i1n;,~

~:>

137 :J,)"

'm~

~

m~

~:J")

,~

;,~t

t;,~

2")37" ,;t1)~ ~t;"p

,m ~;, n~t;,

'~n:>"

297

~'n

1.26.7.

~1"T

.,~

~;'

1"~Tt;,

:Jon "J~

;'~

Ot;,37~'

:J~)

.,~

~

1P~

i:J~n

1.26.8.

t;,.,p 1;,5~

:J"~)t;,

~,

1.26.9.

~t;,

no"t;" ;,.~ t;,~37 ~mt;, ,t'J1rQ~ 'J1t,~l ':1nJ~ ,"n:> t;,n~ ,t;,1:> 1,:>nt;, ~;, i:J~n ~;' ~m':> ":J)~ ~;,t 1~ 4,t;,1:>' 7'~r ;':J~n m~ t;,.,p 7'~r ,J1' 3 ~"'nt;, 1~ ~ ;'~ :'J1,rQV m",pt;, 7,rr ;':J~n ;,5~ ,t, 7'~ 'J1~Y ,~. t;,.,p t,~ J1,:1, J1'Y~ t,~ '~:1J" cr't,~ ~:1J ,m 1"37 :J~) :J,)" 1~t;, J1'~t, t,V' J1'Y~ t,V crr't,v ,t;,1 '''1pn "1t;,~ J1'~t, rJ1~ 'i'rQ ,~ ,t;,1:>' :t,~J ~t;, t,V:J "137n" ;,t~ ;'1;' ,;t1)~ O~t;,:> :s,t,t,n "~'Y t,~ rJ1'~ J1J1t, :t,~VrQ' t,~ ,:1"

.,~

"nt;,~

;,tn~'

~t;,

1n~'

:;,t~ ~t;,

'm~

;'1;' "'0 ;,n"t;,

r~t;,

.,~

t;,~

~o,

no"t;, 1~

O.,t;,

.,~

1~

'J~

1"~Tt;,

61~

'~V:1

1.26.10.

7'~rQ

'~rQJ

1. > FEA I 4478, fo1. 32v. 11 2. > FEA I 2437, fo1. 375r. FEA I 4478, fo1. 32v. FEA I 4602, fo1. 3v has

~,

.,~

11

"nt;,~

C~i" ~t;,

3. FEA I 2437, fo1. 375v,

1m. 11 4.*FEA I 4602, fo1. 4r. 11

5. > FEA I 2441, fo1. 64v. 116. FEA I 2437, fo1. 375v'n7N.

Part I: Chapter 26

298 and also the ~alephs

1:QNtv ';;:'1

in i19W~7

C?J;lt' (Ezek. 43:13), 'l\~

'DN·~:;l

(Jer. 30:16), "l}N~'1

(Ezek. 47:11), since the lexical

classes of 'plundering', 'being satisfied' and 'oozing from the ground' do not contain ~aleph. 1.26.11. With regard to its occurrence in the middle of a word as a substitute for a letter, an example of this is its substitution for yodh as in

jlJ~?

C"1ijlT'~ "~,

C}N~1

(1 Chron. 12:9), since the singular form is

with the pattern of"'~

and the plural of these is C":~

A similar case is ni~t:'9J

"~i'f

(Jer. 38:12), which (by taking into

account the substitution performed by the ~aleph) precedes it, namely C.,r:t7~

,:'i~

and C":1~.

would conform to what

ntJt:'9 J:.i'f

(Jer. 38:11). Another

case of substitution, is where it takes the place of lJ,eth as in TD~1

~).lJ1

(1 Chron. 8:35), who is called in another genealogy ~1.r;lJ

(1 Chron.

9:41). A further case is where it substitutes for zayin, for example

i~1

C"1ij~ 'H~

'~T-jtp

N~iJ

(lsa. 18:2), which would conform to 'W~

(Num. 31 :53). Another case is where it substitutes for ?lJiJ (Josh.

in itu~

10:24),

N71 (lsa. 28:12) and N"in-C1 (Joel 4:19), since no other N'~

examples of these lexical classes occur elsewhere. ~aleph

1.26.13. With regard the occurrence of an

as a substitute for

another letter at the end of a word, this is illustrated by N9~

N7t1.~

(2

Chron. 16: 12), where it stands in the place of heh, since it does not belong to the root of a conjugation of the lexical class of 'illness'. If it were (a root letter), it would have qame:f like ~I"$-nt'

N"J~D

Cil~

Nt?n~

etc. Another case is

i1J.p:-jt~

(Job 39:18), which should be "'l~D (Josh. 1: 18). A further case is N,~.I]

like It;'~-f N~

.,? (Jer.

48:9), where it is said to stand in the place of heh, since there is no ~aleph in the root of the lexical class of 'contending'. The same also applies to

Part I: Chapter 26

2, n~Y" c~n

"TO~t,l 1"O~ iTnN::1nON7N jU,7 'n 1~"

N~'7

299

"l"T'

,m,

nNn7N

N7 1N ,~:U

"n~Y:l

:~7N N~

iT'n ~'n

::1Nm N::1'N.:I 3iT~n7

~O'

l"~n'

:1N.I~

7n~

n"n :1N.I~

~:lY"T

'~J

.,~

"'~7

i1.:JN 7"P '~J

"l'

C"l"TJ

,m

1T1::1

"':JN7N i1::10.:l7N "n i1.:J37 7'P~N

'Y~

:l~n

::1,.:1"

':lY 171 1~ 1':J"7 n':lnol"T ,~t:l N~ i1"n, c'nt,~ ",t,:l,

::1,.:1"

:l',nn,

::1,.:1" N~i1"n'

1.26.11.

,m 1'" :1N.I~

C"l"Tl"T t,l' '~:lYC iT7n~' :C"'l' C":lY N~iT37 .,~ n':lno ",t,:l iT7::1p ":J1~7N n~7 :tn~'

T'T.:I7N'

'n 'n7N N~'

1nN'7N 1N 'l"T~t,

1"37 :1N.I~

'~t:l

,m ,~

::1,.:1" N~

,mn

"n 1~'"

N7 1N 5' TN "7~N

m.7 '!) 7~3nO

"Q~'

'7N 'N 7~il Nil:J :J~N>n7

nO'7 NmN

"7N il6!)77N 7il'p:J 6i~7N ~in7N'

p::>n

p::>n TN N~'

N1il 'i~

TN7 il:J>~

p::m

il:J>~

il':J~

:'i~7N

40::>n T~

il'7~N

nNN' 7n~

nNN' 7n~

Nm,::> ':J37~ ~in7N

1"7N TN 0737N' 1.26.15.

31" " , nNN' 7n~

:171 ilN:J'tVN'

:171 7Nn~'

303

7NT 'n~

7:J ''tV '!) 1'1il T~

TN i'l T~

lliJN ':J37~

n'n7N' T''tV7N 'P:J M~'

T~

Nil'!) 13iln!)~

0'7 ':J~7N

'7N 10':J37~N

7Nn

1"7N n7TN N1N 1:JN

'737 7~3no:J

il;:J~7N

14N'7N:J ilni'tV 01pn N~'!) N~O7

1in'tVm il:J::>Ni7N N'7N:J 171 '!) 7N37t)N7N 1it):Jm

7'N'N

,t)

il1'NT N~

7il!)

7'P

il7 7'P ':J37~

TNt)

N~O7

0'7' N~'

il'7~N

ti1Nt)N i'" T~

1i!):!n

N'7N

,t)

1.26.16.

7N37t)N7N'

il1'NT N' 6N!)7N7N

1. *FEA I 4602, fa!' 6r. 11 2. > FEA I 2437, fa!' 378r. 11 3. FEA I 2437, fa!' 378r lVM". 114. FEA I 4478, fa!' Ir rpM. 11 5. FEA I 2437, fa!' 378r iI'NM:J. 116. FEA I 2437, fa!' 378r, FEA I 2441, fa!' 65v, FEA I 4478, fa!' Ir. FEA I 4602, fa!' 6r has m:Jn. 11 7. FEA I 2437, fa!' 378r + ~"M.

FEA I 2441, fa!. 65v n'i':J. 11 8. FEA I 2437, fa!'

378r Ni':Jn. 11 9. FEA I 2437, fa!' 378v ilN):J. 11 10. FEA I 2437, fa!' 378v

')31~.

11

ilm,'~.

11. *FEA I 4602, fa!' 6v.III2. FEA I 2441, fa!' 65v m,'.II13. FEA I 4478, fa!' Iv 1114. FEA 12437, fa!' 378v N"N:J.

Part I: Chapter 26

304

reply to him would be: No, not as a redundant addition in the way you describe, but a noun may occur that has the same meaning both when it contains the letter and also when the letter is omitted. An example is

C'~

igiJ ~TJ}i

(2 Kings 3:16) - C'~J

C'~P

(Jer. 39:10). This

should not be considered as a redundant additional letter, since it is not analogous to the lamedh in i1~-P

Ci7tp~U?

(1 Chron. 3 :2) and the

like, which must be removed in order for the word to have the correct meaning. This is not the case with regard to

C'~

and

C'~;,

but rather

they are both nouns with the meaning of 'cistern' and the yodh that occurs in one of them is a structural addition, as it is also in f1.*iJ ~;

C'1iJ

(Jud. 6:4) - i?-~Ntr':

C'1iJ (Job 39:8) ~i1}'

~:J'

f1~iJ

(Job 40:20) and likewise in '~1!; '~J;1

(Num. 13:25).

1.26.17. Take note that it is more likely for one to confuse the yodh of the future with a root yodh than to confuse it with a yodh that is a structural addition. The principle that allows us to distinguish the root letter from the other two is that, unlike the other two, it remains in place in inflected forms, although you need to undertake further examination for all uncertainty to be removed. A case in point is as follows. The yodh in 371~ must belong to the root but the yodh in 371:' expresses the future since it is attached to the imperative that has the form

371

and is not retained ~l

elsewhere in the inflection of its conjugation, for example ~tp.lJ-i1

(Jud. 18:14), 'iP~.lJ

the conjugation of 371~, 'T:l¥1~,

~¥1,

yodh in 371~

t;1¥~,

i1~

'd'l (Jer. 2:23).3 All inflections of

on the other hand, have yodh, for example

C1)¥1;

and the remainder of its conjugation. The

has no relation to the yodh in 371:', but confusion is possible

in two ways. Either somebody may say that the past form from

371

~371,

or he may say, on the contrary, that the yodh in

the future and does not belong to the root.

371~ 371~

is derived expresses

Part I: Chapter 26

iln'N~

305

T,::m 'p ,:1 N'~ iln':J' ""N '"'N .,,37 :O':ll rnrr t,n.lrr 'n~ N'O .,,37 m37 Nil'N'T:1' il"~ Nilm:1n:1 .,~ N' 'N '''NT'N :1N:1 T~ ", '37" N" :O'!:Il" O'~ ",,:1)" ""N :lililN:1WN' r~l1 7!:1 O,t~:UON' .,~ N~;1 ,:1 O':U', O'!:Il ",:J 0"" ")37~'N o"pno", il~NpO .,~ ",:J "il N~ 'n~ il"):1~ N~il'" .,~ N"'N' :1~" TN~O 'rl1~ o',rr "n' ",:J, ,t, 'N~ o',rr t,'!:I~ r'Nrr t,'!:I' OON

.,~

2

:r'Nrr "n~ il"'~N T"~n

.,~

,.,,,

N~m"

N"'N:1 'N:1pnON'N N" ON:1n'N TN O'37N' ':1n37~N :il")1~'N N.,'N:1 NilON:1n'N T~ ~"'nN .,~ Nilm:1n 'il N~m

1.26.17.

T~

':IN

il"'~N

"" :ON:1n'N'N "T'" '''NT ':10 "'N ~Nn" ", 37~ 3il 5N 11,!. .,~ ".,'N' il'N"~ N' il"'~N 4"il 11" .,~ ""'N TN .,~ n:1nn N" 11' 'il ""N '~N "'37 Nil":J', 'N:1pnON" N' 11'" '~l1n r~ '11' :s'~l1n r~ W' ,m il~"'n T~ s,.ll1" 'nl1" W" ,m N"'N:1 N'N il~"'n T~ "'IV ,~. ""'N no",~ il~"'n il'P:1 T~ ", ,.,,, "'N onl1" 9nl1" ", .,~ m:J~ ilil:1'IV'N P' "'IV .,~ 11,!. .,~ ""'N T~ 1'~ .,~ 11' T~ "~N 11" TN '''NP'N "p" TN N~il'" T"il~ "N T~ :il"'~N no"" 'N:1pnON" 1'~ .,~ N"'N ,:1 "p" TN 1:JN'N'

i]'"'

7

6

1. FEA I 2437, fo!' 379r intllUN'. 112.*FEA I 4602, fo!' 7r. 11 3. i1lN 1'l: repeated by mistake in FEA I 4602, fo!' 7r. 11 4. 'iT 17i': FEA I 2441, fo!' 66v iT17i'.

11

5.

iT~

'17i

'lU17n > FEA I 2441, fo!' 66v. 11 6. > FEA I 2441, fo!' 66v, FEA I 4478, fo!' 2r. 11 7. N"N:J ••• '17i > FEA I 2437, fo!' 379v. FEA I 2441, fo1. 66v, FEA I 4478, fo1. 2r + Ni1l~.

11

8. *FEA I 4602, fo!' 7v. 119. > FEA I 2437, fo!' 379v.

Part I: Chapter 26

306

1.26.18. The response concerning the first type (of confusion) is that it is said that the past verb form

371,

371~

cannot be derived from the imperative

since the past form of the verb does not have a root letter that does

not exist in the imperative and the imperative does not have a root letter that does not have its counterpart in the past form. Surely you see that forms with the pattern of 371~

initial shin in the imperative, for 13:5), t"r,~

:1;>tp, n7W and the like retain the :1,;>0/ (2 Sam. example J~0/-7

such as

h70/ (Exod. 4:4). This is not the case with 371, since no past

form is derived from this particular imperative and when you attach the yodh of the future to it, the yodh has !jere, for example 7: 16), as is the case when you attach it to

'~iJ

37j~

(Isa.

:1 W, 17. and other imperatives

with this pattern, all of which have !jere (under the prefixed yodh). The imperative of 371~

is

371; not 371 and (the imperative) 371 cannot be made

into a past verb, except by forming it from the future form by attaching waw to it with dagesh, for example i1~'.¥-P which corresponds in meaning to ~l

37'~C

:1~"

37'l~1

(2 Sam. 14:1),

(2 Sam. 14:22).

1.26.19. The response concerning the second type (of confusion) is that the yodh in

371~

cannot be the yodh of the future but rather it is a root

letter, as has been stated above. The claim that it is to express the future is flawed in several respects. Firstly, a word that has the yodh of the future at its front does not have at its end the first person pronoun. To

371~,

however, may be joined the first person pronoun consisting of taw and yodh, resulting in the form 'T:l¥1~,

like 'T:l¥i?W, 'T:lt;t7W etc. If there is no

doubt that 37i?W and n7W are past verbs, the same applies to other forms

Part I: Chapter 26

1':J n~" .,~

307

N' mN 'Nj?" 1N "N'N il~"N

.,~

117 :IN'~

1.26.18.

N' mN' V1'il "1'N ,r.>N'N 1r.> N"~r.> 'r.>~N

n:Jn" N"

.,~

",n N'N :"~Nr.>'

n:Jn", N'N "'~N

"N .,~

.,~

:", nt,t' '!:l~tO 'VJ:T V'~

~'n

t,V !:l~t'

V"

"~Nr.>'

il'nr.> 1':J" N'N "~N

1'W'N Nr.>il"'" Int,t" !:l~t'

N1N' ,r.>N'N O~.l

N'17~

'17~N

~'n

,r.>N'N ,~

,m 1r.> V" F':J Nr.> 1N il"j?:J n:Jnn Nr.>mr.> 1',r.>N'N

1r.> il' '~Nr.>

N' 1N il'Nn il1il no', V"

ij?:J rn'Oj?.l:J 1':Jn 2'N:Jj?nON'N N' il"17 n':J1

rn'Oj?.l:J il17'r.>~

,~

1r.> N'N '~Nr.> j!:l !:IN''

'~

Nr.>r.> Nr.>mNnN'

sV' '~

V'"

,t"

!:It' ',17 Nil":J1:J

N" V' N' 4 1r.> 3'r.>N~

6ij?:J il11Wr.> il"17 'N"N ":J1:J ':Jj?nOr.>'N "!:lV V" 'nr.> '.l17r.>'N ,~

N"N 11:J "'0' N' mN 7'.lNn'N il~"N

'il '1'N :T"'Y

117 :IN'~

1.26.19.

"j?'N' il':J1 C1j?n Nr.>' il"~N

'il ,:J 'N:Jj?nON N'

'n'N il6~"N

1r.> 10~'

1N: N:il1nN: i1~'

'r.>~

Nfr':JN ,~

,n'N

c':Jnr.>'N:

'~

'~nt,"

1"~Nr.>

1. FEA I 2437, fo!. 380r ~'lZ71. ,~.

Nil"N

1"7~

'~VOt

N:i1:JN::J

N' Nil"N ,~ ~N.l'

1j?

'~

V'"

:c':Jnr.>'N:

"~n

1"'N'

'nr.> '~V" nt,t" VOt' 1':J ,~

ilil:JW N' 1N:J

11 2.*FEA I 4602, fo!' 8r. 11 3. FEA I 2441, fo!' 67r'l)

114. FEA I 2441, fo!' 67r, FEA I 4478, fo!' 2v. FEA I 4602, fo!' 8r has 3." 3."'. 11 5. FEA I 4478, fo!' 2v 3."'. 11 6. FEA I 2441, fo!' 67r 1~. 380v, FEA I 2441, fo!' 67r, FEA I 4478, fo!' 2v + '~i". 9. FEA I 4478, fo!' 2v ':JinO~.

,~

8V"

'N::Jj?nON:"

N' ~N:Jj?nO'

"r.>~

N1N' :Nr.>il"'" Nr.> 10':J~

T

3.'"

11 7. FEA I 2437, fo!'

118. FEA 12441, fo!' 67r 3.".11

1110. FEA I 4478, fo!' 2v l":J'.

Part I: Chapter 26

308

with their pattern, which include l?1;. Secondly, the various forms of other verbs that have a letter of the future, form a past form from their imperative, but this is not possible for l?1. Surely you see that ::mv; has a past form

:Jtp derived from its imperative, and the same applies to other

imperatives of the same pattern. The past form derived from the imperative of:JO; is :JQ, and so with similar forms. The past form derived from the imperative of:J""1; is :J1, and so with forms of the same pattern. Thirdly, a verb that has a yodh of the future vocalized with qame$ normally has a noun of agent that resembles the past form. This applies to :Jo/, :JQ and :J1, but l?1 has no past form nor a noun of agent. The exceptions to this are few in number, for example i1Q~? 26:19) and '?-~,;

.,? (1

Kings 8:37). The yodh in these expresses the

future and their imperatives are n1iJ and '~iJ,

rlJ¥t-7~

with the pattern of :J~i

(Ezek. 21:35), but the noun of agent is n1~, pattern of :J"O/j?i? l?1~,

n').; (1 Sam.

(Prov. 17:4), as seen in i1~

,~

"J:l N1i?

with the '~iJ,-T?

(Psa. 118:5). 1.26.20. In this section we have unequivocally removed the confusion between the root yodh and the yodh attached to express the future in the two aforementioned conjugations of the lexical class of 'knowing', one of these having the imperative l?1 and the other l?1;. If a second yodh were to be attached to the latter in order to express the future, it would have the form l?1":, with the pattern oft~.,:

and l?h~":

(lsa. 40:28), in which there

are two yodhs, one belonging to the root and the other to express the future.

Part I: Chapter 26

~'n

~il'tI

'~

,~i\

1~

'n~

,~

~'et

':Jl7~

il'~

~O'

1~ m~ ~"

~ilt'n;:,

1~

il' .,~

~,

.,~'

,m

,i1tv~

1~

'tI O:J ,~

~O,

l'W'

ill7'" ,;:~

il'~

V'

'~:Jjino"

V'" ,;:~

1~;:" "':!r~

'~:JjinO"

.,~

",~

l~tI

:rT'V.M t,N ~etrT

8~'il

l7'~

1~

il';:~" .",~

.,,;:,i\ ~il'n

",;:"

'l7~tI

~il.,tI

'tI '~:JjinO"

~il'n

~

117 ~ ,~;:

'il " ,

':!rtl~

~o

",;:"

,"ji 5,tI ~et

co~,

'~T

",;:" ~et

~

:rT' '.MN'i' 'YOrT 70 ;ji;:" ",~

""

',l7 il'tI '~:Jjino,

'ji~

,~

'~n

:mT1:J

V" :1"

,t, 'Y' ':l rTnJO n,'

'YrT 6n'rT ~m 1T1:J 'YO n,o 7 FEA I 2437, fol. 381v.116. FEA I 2441, fol. 67v 371jJ.\I 7. FEA I 2441, fol. 67v, FEA I 4478, fol. 3r. FEA I 4602, fol. 8v has "N'N. \I 8. *FEA I 4602, fo1. 9r. 119. FEA I 2441, fo1. 68r. FEA I 4602, fo1. 9r has '~N.

11

10. FEA I 2441, fol. 68r"'N. \Ill. FEA I 2437, fo1. 381v, FEA I 2441, fo1. 68r

Part I: Chapter 26

310

1.26.21. As for yodh that is a structural addition, although it resembles a root yodh in that the word is broken up when it is removed from it, the fact that the root letters remain after its removal is convincing proof that the two should be distinguished, as was argued above in connection with 37W~,

nw~

and other words. and the yodh in :JV?:'

1.26.22. The discussion concerning the yodh in :JW~ is identical to what has been said concerning what should be said concerning '1~, foregoing discussion concerning 371~

371:' and 371~

'1.:' and N¥~, and 371:'.

1.26.23. Take note that the yodh in 371~

N~:'

and, likewise, is the same as the

turns into waw in

37';n:-N71

(Gen. 41 :31). Likewise the yodh in :JW~

has turned into waw in btp'~1

C'1¥lJ (Ezek. 36:10). Theyodh in r1.~,

'Q,'! (Psa. 104:5) has turned into

waw in

'91T:l

in r~1

',~i]1

(Isa. 44:28). The yodh in r~

(1 Kings 12:6). Theyodh in i1,t;-I~

turned into waw in NJ.W T~?

has turned into waw N).; (1 Kings 18:12) has

(Psa. 130:4).

1.26.24. As for yodhs that occur at the beginning of words as substitutes for another letter, these are of two types. One involves the substitution of letters of the future and the other involves a letter that appears to belong to the root substituting for another letter. An example of the first4 is

'T:l1~

1'J.)·~7

(Psa. 119:131), which is said to correspond to taw and

be equivalent to

'T:l1~J;

commandments' like l'jR~7

4

'?

and mean 'I wanted to perform your

'T:l1~J;

miJ, (Psa.

119:40). An example

This was, in fact, the second type mentioned in the previous sentence.

Part I: Chapter 26

il'7~N

"~

il~'

T~

Nil£>"" m:ln TN£> N~ :lO" N~i1l': i"~n7N

n'~

311

TN' il':~7N N'7N N~£> 1.26.21. Nil7N'i:l il~£>7N 7N7n:;:'N '£> '£> 3.'lP~ il'£> ,7' 'l3.' il'7~N N~il"' M~" V~, N' '£> c'pn

Nnl~

"! '£> 7'P7N ,7':;:" IV'!' V,! '£>

:V'" V'' ••

T

'£> ,~

,~

N~

N~

," '73.' !l~

:lO":l ~Y"

~Y"

••

"!'

T

'£> 'N' '7N :l7PlM V'' '£> 'n7N N'7N TN C73.'N' 1.26.23. 3'!l~J '£> N'~ :l7PlN !l~' '£> N'7N ,7':;:" 2 4'1'17N N'7N ,7':;:" :rv'" :~,

N:l'Nl N£>7~ 7'N'N '£> nNN'7N T~ T3.' Nil~3.': s7N:lpnON7N '£> 7'N7N Nn~7 :6il"" T3.' :l'l' '7~N:; T,:;:,n7 Nn il:Nn~ NnlN 7'P '~!l

9""

:71"'i'!:)S '~!l

:1J:1 7n~

1. FEA I 2441, fo1. 68r l"". 4602, fo1. 9r has l"'. 4478, fol. 3v. n"l

l"'i~

ll'

11

11

11

*

'~

T'il~

N~

9'"

rv~S

N6N£> 1.26.24. '73.'£> :lN~ '£> ':;:'N7N' f3.':l

9'"

l' ~,yoS

'N~

,~

,m

73.'£> n"N 'l3." '~!l

2. FEA I 2441, fo1. 68r, FEA I 4478, fo1. 3r. FEA I

3. *FEA I 4602, fo1. 9v.

11

4. > FEA I 2441, fo1. 68v, FEA I

5. FEA I 2441, fo1. 68v + :l'N~.

:I'l' > FEA I 2441, fol. 68v. 'n::lNn > FEA I 2441, fo1. 68v.

1

7. illn ~n/:)

11

6. '~N:l IN'~

fpn ,~

~l'

':lN~

m'N 'll"

312

Part I: Chapter 26

of the second is in N'7~iJ

~p;'

',~iJ

(Isa. 29:14) and ~9;'

'~iJ

1'~-

(Isa. 38:5), where (the yodh) is said to stand in the place of ~aleph

of the future. This would make better sense and avoid adding lPiJ,~

anything. A similar case is

31~?t

(lsa. 22:19), (where

substitution must be assumed) in order for it to correspond to the l'[:~1m,

preceding word ,~:

N7-C~'

which refers to the speaker. Another case is

(Ruth 4:4), in which the yodh is in place of taw so that it

corresponds to the (second person) address to rOQ in the preceding context. 5 Another case is '~1:-7

l'J.~37

nW!9~

(Mal. 2:15), which is

said to have the meaning of '''1T:l. Further similar examples could be cited. If it is established that letters other than those that express the future may be interchanged, it is all the more legitimate to accept this with regard to the letters that mark the future, since they share a common meaning, which is notthe case with other interchanged letters. Section 1.26.25. Take note that the yodhs in the middle of a word that do not

belong to the root fall into two categories. 1.26.26. One of these is a yodh that has no meaning but is a redundant

addition, as in

p~i?n

(Psa. 39:7),

31 :38), for they are absent in 14:32), ~f1:-'?

1~;9n

(Psa. 36:8) and

~17?t;J

~7?n

(Psa. 46:4),

~Qn

1~;f:

(Job H,~

(lsa.

(Num. 11:13) and the (same) meaning is expressed. The

same applies to i1~:;>l

(Lam. 1: 16), i1~;t

(lsa. 22:2), '~1iJ

W;~17

(Ezra 10: 16), and similar cases.

5

'AM al-Faraj, in confonnity with the Midrashic tradition and also the Karaite Yefet

ben FEA I 2441, fo1. 68v. 113. FEA I 2437, fo1. 372r, FEA 12441, fo1. 68v, FEA I 4478, fo1. 3v

,~.

11

4. FEA I 2437, fo1. 372r i1N10. 11 5. FEA I

2441, fo1. 68v, FEA I 4478, fo1. 3v Ni1::JN,n1VN'.

11

6. FEA I 2441, fo1. 69r, FEA I

4478, fo1. 4r. FEA I 4602, fo1. 10r has no',. 117. FEA I 4602, fol. lOr + 'i11. 8. FEA I 4478, fo1. 4r n'NT.

Part I: Chapter 26

314

1.26.27. The other has meaning and is divided into four types. One is the

yodh that occurs in transitive verbs in place of a waw that is found in these verbs before they are made transitive. Examples of this are the yodhs in :J"W~, ,~O"

T

and

O"j?~, m~".

T

,.t;>~

and r1"?~,

which were waws in :J~lV,

O~p,

These yodhs and waws in the verbs cited here, it should

be noted, are not root letters but structural additions. 1.26.28. The second is where yodh and waw interchange, as in ',~U

(Gen. 32:32) and ',~"

(Gen. 32:31), 01~n

Sam. 5: 11), i1~)tp

and i1~"tp

(2 Chron. 2:2) and 0,"1} (2

(Deut. 21: 15), and similar cases among

Oii?7?

nouns. It occurs also among verbs and infinitives, for example ~)J

1"77 (Gen. 24:23) and P77 (Prov. 3:21) and ~T"7-' 07.~

O~tp-.,

Oi?7-~

(Gen. 24:25), 1:~"

(Prov. 4:21), O"W~

1Wt)

~T7-' (Job 19:8) and

(Exod. 4:11). These are not the same as the

aforementionedyodhs in ,~O

- ,.t;>~

and the like, since (the yodh and the

waw) in such cases have the function of expressing the transitivity of the verb or the lack of transitivity, whereas here both forms with waw and also those withyodh are intransitive. 1.26.29. The third type is yodh that acts as the pronoun of the agent

bound to a pronoun of the patient, like the yodhs in

'J:l~nw-

0.,tl1r~

(lsa. 42:16), "P-I,~f

~3$1

O"[:l~n

(Hos. 6:5),

(Cant. 3:4), and similar cases.

N71 N71 'T:lIJ~

O~.,tp

Part I: Chapter 26

'~

315

N7:l Nil1nN :ONOPN ., '737 ,;" ':J377:l il7 '::>N7N' i7:Jp 7N37!)N7N 17n 'I!) 'N' T7:l N~'37

2"0" C'i'" !l'~ 'I!) 377:l 1'~" "0" C'i'" 0'7

il"::>17:l7N

4

'n7N

!l'~

1.26.27.

il'137n7:l7N 7N37!)N7N 'I!)

,m

nNN'7N

171'

Nil'137n

'I!) nN'N' n:JN::> 'n7N 1'~"

7N37!)N7N

'I!)

nN'N'7N'

nNN'7N

3

N1il

il'7~N:J

:il':J:J7:l 7:J

t,NU~

,m

'I!)

171

,m N~'

37~

TN:J'Nm' 'N'7N

7Nn~'

:TN'J~'

:TNU~

'1N~7

171::>

N~

T'::>'

T'::>

':JNn7N'

1.26.28.

c,'n, c"n t,N' J~'

7N37!)N7N

'~n

'I!)

1p'

N~O7

:sn't" t,N :1' J'l1~

,t,t" t,N :7't,t, C'i~ Cl :7't,t, Ut, C'i~ nNN'7N T~ 171 0'7' :Ct,N c,~ ~, :6C'~ ~n1

il~1pn7:N

0137' 737!)7N '137n7 37'~

: 7'13n~

"7:l~J

"" 1":J i1:J~

7~nN

N~'

'N':J

NiN 737N£l7N "7:l~

'~.,

C'1'1l':T :C'1'1!ltl1 Nt" C'1~l N1il 'I,,,' N7:l' "

1'N!l:-t~

"0', "0'

1N1 TN7 il7Nn~'

N~

N1;" il'137n

I.26~9

N7:l Niln7Nm '!)

'11 'J~N

i1:J~

nNN'7N

'I!)

,m 7'3!)~N

Nt" "1'1tnN :'~

8"~N!l "~7:lN

l.*FEA I 4602, foJ. 10v.1I2. > FEA I 2441, foJ. 69r. 113. FEA I 2437, foJ. 372v, FEA 12441, foJ. 69r, FEA I 4478, foJ. 4r inil.

11

4. FEA I 2441, foJ. 69r no'~.

2437, foJ. 372v, FEA I 2441, foJ. 69r. FEA I 4478, foJ. 4r + ")'37~. foJ. 69r + ~N.

lIr.

11

7. "37n~

":1: FEA I 2441, foJ. 69v N~O

'737.

11 11

5. FEA I

6. FEA I 2441,

11 8. *FEA I 4602, foJ.

316

Part I: Chapter 26

1.26.30. The fourth type is yodh that occurs in nouns as a marker of the

plural, for example 1:]tl~i;

C,~'lJ";r7?1

q~'1.

Ci7lP

T7¥ T~1' TJj~

'? (Ezek. 7:4), b~'

C~'lJ?

(Deut. 12: 12), ~t';l1c iJ'~1 (Prov. 3:17) and the like. It is sometimes elided

iJ'p:lr7~1

from such words, as in TD~?IJ

(Gen.4:4), iJ,?¥ 1?~)

i1]~f(Isa.

1:30),

JP~o/i 7~ ~i?nW (Lam. 1:7). The yodhs have been elided from these nouns and the other markers of the plural have been relied upon (as sufficient to express the meaning). Section 1.26.31. Take note that the yodhs that occur at the end of words fall into

two categories, one expressing meaning and the other not expressing meaning. 1.26.32. Examples of cases where it does not express meaning are '~

'i?~

377,9:;

i"~j?

bii7? (Isa 22: 16), ,:;>~¥

7~

i11111 '?' ':;>;!m7?7 (Psa.

116:7) and the like. 1.26.33. The category expressing meaning is divided into several types.

One type is the yodh of genealogy, for example '1~

'1~

i~

(1 Sam. 30:13), 'i?7~

(Lev. 24:10), '!~-tV

,~

(Exod. 21 :2),

(2 Sam. 1:13), '7~1tpiJ tV'~1 (1 Kings 7:14) and similar words that

"~1

iJ~

express an affiliation to a tribe or place. 1.26.34. The second type is the yodh of a pronoun. This is of several

kinds. One is the feminine pronoun in the imperative and the future verb, for example 1~

Ci'trl1~

•

I

'!J~Cp1t.T

'~i1P

'rJ7?W1 'i~N

•

'~iJ1

'~1,

1~

-'~7?Cp

•

•

•

(Psa. 45: 11), ''Cp'y,'

(Lam. 4:21), '1¥J;1l:l1 '1fo/t:l (Lam. 4:21), '7~1;l (Isa. 47:12) and similar cases. Another kind is the

'~i17 pronoun referring to a male person when he is speaking and attaches a

pronoun referring to himself onto a noun, for example '::IN • JT

11

~Q"L

'4WLIt~lS9£

'z

'AV 'IOJ 'SLvv I Y:;Id
,f.-i7~ .,!~

(Isa. 48:10), "~-;'71

(Psa. 50:2), "~1

":;11f,'7 .,;to/7 'W~l

(Jer. 48:5),

T"J¥

(Jer. 15:2), 1"l~

(Ezek. 23 :40), and similar forms.

1.26.38. The sixth type is the yodh that occurs at the end of derived nouns that are similar to nouns of agent and nouns of patient but are not either of these, for example ",~ "7i?1 cry7.1 (Lev. 23:14),

tV"~

(Deut. 24:12), "i?~

"J¥ i7~:

0'] (Deut. 19:10),

(Isa. 44:16).

1.26.39. The seventh type is the yodh that occurs at the end of certain nouns referring to tangible entities that are derived but do not belong to the previous category of noun, for example lJ~T7 "~PW,

which can be inferred from "~PW1

.,~

(Num. 17:3),

(Hos. 2:7).6

1.26.40. The eighth type is yodh that occurs in a non-derived noun, for example

;,bt;Ti? "::r. (Deut.

15:8), },"37 1;>

"n (Gen. 42:15), 'J~ "~1

(Isa.

33:21), '?1 iiJ;';"P";;> (Isa. 1:20).

1.26.41. The ninth type is yodh that occurs as a substitute for other letters. One of these letters is heh, for example

"1W r"J1

(Psa. 50:11),

"10/ "JP'lpf (Jer. 4: 17), since (",0/ here) corresponds to iilo/. Another example is )'7~1J

.,~

Further cases are 1.~ correspond to "7m:;r '~f1

iitp:

(Zech. 11: 17), which corresponds to '7~1J

.,W: (Psa. 55:16), .,r:t7}T'~

and

iilj7try.

ii¥'.

(Jer. 18:23), which

A second is Jaleph, for example rn .:

-

"T

l':;>l;l, 1;::>T:l, iij?tptl,

iiftl, 1'~tl,

and similar forms. Before taw was attached to these, heh

•

stood at the front of their imperatives, which are i~J,

iij?tpiJ, n1.1 iJ , n1.fi),

p;:r, 1;::>i), 1~iJ,

and when the taw of the future was attached the

initial heh was elided, which is also the case with the other letters of the future, the resulting forms being iift\, if~'

iiftl and the equivalent if~'

in the other verbs. 1.26.45. One way in which taw and yodh resemble one another but both differ from the other two letters (of the group 1n'N) is that when they are attached to a pure imperative form, this becomes thereby a predication that can be used to give a command in some cases, and when the particle of negation is combined with it, the form may be used as a prohibition or as a predication. The form h:~

~7-m?

(1 Kings 2:36), for example, is a

pure imperative form and when the taw of the future is attached to it, it may also have the meaning of a command, as in iilii; n,~T-t'

'9;j~

i~=?T:l

(Deut. 27:6). The same form may be used as a predication and the

two must be distinguished by means of the context. This applies also to

';:J~ n;~

- '~Nn,

for example: i~J-nt'

'~Nn

(Exod. 23:15), 37~o/l}

Another example is itp~

'Dt' ijp~

)';:J~

tv~Jfi-n'

-

iW~tl,

(Exod. 14:2), :J7.-'~1Tf 1Jn~

)'~Nn

iipt\

as in n~tl

~7

- 1~T;l,

1,~T;l

'~1T;l

i~t\1

(Gen. 6:14),

1W~

as in '~o/:

nJ~=?W

(Micah 6:14).

ijp~

(Num. 28:4), j:T,D"N i~p

6:15). A further example is 1~ '9~ftp

N71

(Ezek. 3:1), b'~

iir,

(Gen.

~:P-'t (Exod. 28:3), 1W~

(2 Kings 6:12) and similar cases.

"~1

°CCc:!L + AlL °IOJ 'IttZ I V3d °I4'tA~ + AlL °IOJ 'IttZ I V3d °OIlIoCll AlL °IOJ 'IttZ I V3d °61c~u UCCW + A9 %J 'SLtt I V3d 'AlL °IOJ 'IttZ I V3d °slo~c AlL °1 0 J 'IttZ I V3d °L 11 o~N AlL °IOJ 'IttZ I V3d °911 °AtI 'Z09t I V3d* oS II °CL.ClC;WN llL %J 'IttZ I V3d °t lIoCL.ClC;WNllL %J 'IttZ I V3d o£ lIoccw UCW :A9 °loJ 'SLtt I V3d 'llL %J 'IttZ I V3d u~ l:lplO PlOM lU:J~a °z 11 °ltI °loJ 'Z09t I V3d* °1

L.n.. t:L.. N~ Ll a~l.: c:a~

c:~

uc:a, ~t:

N~L.

LC:L.'iL l..t:L.. Lll..t:L.. c:~ a~l.:

LlNC:~

~1.

a~Ll

LlNC:~

L.n.. t:L.. t:Ul..L.. LN~U'i l..t:L.. N~

NLl l.:ct~

Llt:Ll 01: NLll.: LlNC:~

LC:L.'iL NC:L~ N'-,l.:'1..: LC:~U'i1.!

aL. ~'i"1.!

Nl t:~l.

L~N

c:a~6 N9~L.

LC:L.'iL a~l.: NLl l.:at~

N,~

t:,Ll N~L.

L~t.

N'itG" ~'iU

aL.

C:C:L.N ~tL.

L.'iL: LNLll.: N~L.

Lla~.:

~t:aLl NUL.I!~

c:a~

~L."U

UL.~ ~'i"1.!

Ntl.!~

t:~"

NUl.. Ll a~l.:I Ll~t:a

NC:L~

C:C:L. 8 : LC:N'iaL."tl..! "U~l UC:L1L c:~t" ~1.

LNL.N L.C:'i ~'i"1.! C:L.'iI!~Nl>

I..!L

,a,c ~l

Llt:~.

N'i~C:L.

NLl a~t:u

,L,

L.C:L'i UN9 N'iNOUaC:N'i 'i'itl..!" LN'iC:C:L. N,~:

"~'iU

'iN~L.

L.C:'iI!~N£

L~N

°St:'°nOI

~l

~'i"

N'i~L.

LL.'iL

C:~

N'iLtLI..!

N'i~L."U

L"~,.

"UGa G"I..! N'iUL LN'i"LL. L.Ll N'iUL.G"l N'iNC:L."l

LlC:l.: z Lc:a"UI..!N C:L.'iL ~U'i

c:a,,1..! UL.~

l.:eL..Ll G~tL.

N'iNOUaC:N'i N,~

L~N.U

NC:l.: ,C:l.: ~C:l.

L.C:L'i UN N'iNOUaC:N'i IN'iU N'iI..!N ~l

NL'i NL~.I;!

NLN"'iI..!N

c:aL'iL l.:C:l.: l.:C:L.. l.:C:! l.:C:L! l.:~a

l.:c:L..Ll

LlC:L..,Ll LlC:L..Ll LN~U'i

c:aL'iL LlC:l.: LlC:,L.. LlC:,! LlC:L!: Ll ~dl.:

C:NtU N'iI..!N UNC:UI..! G"

L.'iL N'iU" ac:'i L.C:L'i N'iUN ~'i"I.!N N~'i"

LI..!L N'iI..!N ~l

C:'i LNUL. ~tl.!N

t~'il.!

N'iUL.~

Gael IN'iU L'iN uuc:u

NL.N L.C:'i ~'i"

L~N

°t:'t:'°9Z"I

N'i~L.

LC:Nl NL'i UL.LGI..! 'C"L.

"uGaNl G"I..! ~

N'i~

LN'itLl N,~

I..!LI Nl

9Z l;}ldBq::> :1 llBd

5;Z£

326

Part I: Chapter 26

1.26.46. As for the use of future forms of verbs with yodh to express a

I "?'

command and a predication, this is shown by cases such as i1~n?l

O"i?iJ? ''';1 (1 Chron. 21:18), '9"7¥ j"t?~ b$.p'~ tv~,fiJ-n

(Ezek. 46:15), '~,-tvl

~

i:P1~

~i:J

(Lev. 19:19), ~tbl

(Psa. 106:19), also O